530450

Skoda Octavia 2011 Handleiding

47
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/275
Pagina verder
SIMPLY CLEVER
ŠkodaOctavia
OWNER'S MANUAL
Introduction
You have opted for a Škoda - our sincere thanks for your confidence in us.
Your new Škoda offers you a vehicle featuring the most modern engineering and a wide range of equipment which
you will undoubtedly wish to use to the full during your daily motoring. That is why, we recommend that you read
this Owner's Manual attentively to enable you to become familiar with your car and all that it offers as quickly as
possible.
Please do not hesitate to contact your specialist garage or importer should you have any further questions or any
problems regarding your vehicle which may arise. He will be ready at any time to receive your questions, sugges-
tions and criticisms.
National legal provisions, which deviate from the information contained in these operating instructions, take prec-
edence over the information contained in the operating instructions.
We wish you much pleasure with your Škoda and pleasant motoring at all times.
Your Škoda Auto
s43s.1.book Page 1 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Introduction2
On-board literature
The on-board literature for your vehicle consists of this “Owner's Manual”
as well as a “Service schedule” and a “Help on the road”. There can also be
a variety of other additional operating manuals and instructions on-board
(e.g. an operating manual for the radio) depending on the vehicle model and
equipment.
If one of the publications listed above is missing, please contact an author-
ised Škoda dealer immediately, where one will be glad to assist you in such
matters.
One should note that the details given in the vehicle's papers always
take precedence over those in the Owner's Manual.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes the current scope of equipment. Certain
items of equipment listed are only installed later on and only envisaged for
particular markets. The illustrations can differ in minor details from your
vehicle; they are only intended for general information.
In addition to information regarding all the controls and equipment, the
Owner's Manual also contains important information regarding care and
operation for your safety and also to retain the value of your vehicle. To
provide you with valuable tips and aids. You will learn how you can operate
your vehicle safely, economically and in an environmentally conscious
way.
For safety reasons, please also pay attention to the information on
accessories, modifications and replacement of parts page 214.
The other chapters of the Owner's Manual are also important, however, for
proper treatment of your car - in addition to regular care and maintenance -
helps to retain its value and in many cases is also one of the conditions for
possible warranty claims.
The Service schedule
contains:
Vehicle data,
Service intervals,
Overview of the service work,
Service proof,
Confirmation of mobility warranty (only valid in certain countries),
important information on the warranty.
The confirmations of the carried out service work are one of the conditions
for possible warranty claims.
Please always present the Service schedule when you take your car to an
authorised Škoda Service Partner.
If the Service schedule is missing or worn, please contact your authorised
Škoda Service Partner, where your car is serviced regularly. You will receive a
duplicate, in which the previously carried out service work are confirmed.
Help on the road
contains the most important telephone numbers in individual countries as
well as the addresses and telephone numbers of Škoda importers.
s43s.1.book Page 2 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Contents 3
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Contents
Layout of this Owner's Manual
(explanations)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The brief instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic functions and important information . . . . .
Instruments and warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of the instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift recommendation for changing gears* . . . . .
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)*
Information display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Check Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the battery of the radio remote control
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syncronisation of the remote control . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting front seats electrically* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Middle rear head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage net partition* (Combi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger
side* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the dash panel* . . . . . . .
Storage compartment in front centre console* . .
Storage net on the front centre console* . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment for spectacles* . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment in the front doors . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment below front passenger seat*
Front seat armrest with storage compartment* . .
Rear seat armrest with storage compartment* . . .
Storage compartment in rear centre console* . . .
Seat backrest with opening for skis* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removeable through-loading bag* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment behind the rear seats* (Combi)
Clothes hooks* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating and air conditioning system . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* (semi-automatic air conditioning system)
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . .
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)*
Starting-off and Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting steering wheel position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II* . . . . .
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl* . . . .
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection to the internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music playback via Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
7
9
9
10
10
15
15
15
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
22
24
27
37
37
37
38
38
38
43
44
44
46
48
51
51
58
59
61
64
67
67
68
70
71
72
74
74
79
81
82
83
83
85
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
88
88
89
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
94
94
95
97
100
104
107
107
107
108
109
110
110
111
112
113
116
116
122
122
125
125
130
132
137
138
139
139
s43s.1.book Page 3 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Contents4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The physical principle of a frontal collision . . . . . .
Important safety information regarding the use of seat
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are seat belts correctly fastened? . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What you should know about transporting children!
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system .
Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system
Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intelligent Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antilock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uphill Start Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromechanical power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitoring system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards . .
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving through bodies of water on roads . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the exterior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the interior of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Biofuel Ethanol E85* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspecting and replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles of category N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Breakdown assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid box* and Warning triangle* (Octavia) . .
First-aid box* and warning triangle* (Estate car) .
Fire extinguisher* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow-starting and towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and
EU guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK (1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI -
EU5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
141
141
142
145
145
145
146
147
150
150
151
153
155
157
159
159
161
164
165
167
167
167
170
171
171
171
172
172
172
173
175
175
176
176
179
180
180
181
182
182
185
185
185
185
189
192
192
192
194
195
196
196
198
200
202
203
207
208
208
214
214
214
214
215
215
215
215
215
216
216
217
217
221
222
226
226
229
237
237
237
237
237
237
237
238
239
240
242
244
246
248
250
252
254
256
258
260
s43s.1.book Page 4 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Contents 5
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
s43s.1.book Page 5 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)6
Layout of this Owner's Manual (explanations)
The Owner's Manual has been systematically designed, in order to make it easy for you
to find and absorb the information you require.
Chapters, table of contents and subject index
The text of the Owner's manual is divided into relatively short sections which are
combined into easy-to-read chapters. The chapter you are reading at any particular
moment is highlighted at the bottom right of the page.
The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Subject
index at the end of the Owner's Manual helps you to rapidly find the information you
are looking for.
Sections
The majority of Sections apply to all models.
Since there is a wide range of different equipment and options available it is clearly
unavoidable, despite dividing the contents into sections, that mention may be made
of equipment which is not fitted to your vehicle.
Brief information and instructions
Each section has a Heading.
This is followed by Brief information (in large italic lettering), which tells you the
subject which is dealt with in this section.
Most of the illustrations are accompanied by an Instruction (in relatively large letters)
which explains to you in a straightforward way the action you have to take. Work steps
which have to be carried out are illustrated with a hyphen.
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the direction of
travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
Equipment which is marked in such a way is only standard on certain vehicle model
versions or only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
End of a section.
The section is continued on the next page.
Notes
All four kinds of notes, which are used in the text, are always stated at the end of the
respective section.
WARNING
The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING. These
WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury.
While reading the text you will frequently encounter a double arrow followed
by a small warning symbol. This symbol is intended to draw your attention to a
WARNING note at the end of the section to which you must pay careful atten-
tion.
Caution
A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle (e.g.
damage to gearbox), or points out general risks of an accident.
For the sake of the environment
An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection aspects.
This is where you will, for example, find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consumption.
Note
A normal Note draws your attention in a general way to important information.
s43s.1.book Page 6 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
7
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Using the system
s43s.1.book Page 7 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Cockpit8
Fig. 1 Certain items of equipment shown in the illustration are only fitted to particular model versions or are optional items of equipment.
s43s.1.book Page 8 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Cockpit 9
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Cockpit
Overview
This overview will help you to quickly familiarise yourself with the
displays and the control elements.
Electric power-operated window* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric exterior mirror adjustment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
Turn signal light, headlight and parking light, headlight flasher . .
Speed regulating system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel:
with horn
with driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
with pushbuttons for radio, navigation system and mobile phone*
Instrument cluster: Instruments and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for the multi-functional switch:
Multi-functional indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for heating on the driver's seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the dash panel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
Radio*
Navigation*
Control dial for heating on the front passenger seat* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch for the front passenger airbag* (in front passenger storage
compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse box (on side of dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control dial for the instrument lighting and control dial for the headlight
beam range regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment on the driver's side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lever for adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
Operating controls for the heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating controls for Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating controls for Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCS switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front and rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector lever (automatic gearbox*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation pressure-control system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depending on equipment fitted:
Front ashtray - high centre console* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* . . . . . .
Note
Cars with factory-fitted radio or navigation system are supplied with separate
instructions for operating such equipment.
The arrangement of the control elements on right-hand drive models may differ to
some extent from that shown in page 8, fig. 1. However the symbols correspond to
the individual control elements.
A
1
46
A
2
65
A
3
94
A
4
57
113
A
5
151
122
A
6
15
A
7
19
61
A
8
73
A
9
94
A
10
56
A
11
87
A
12
A
13
73
A
14
86
A
15
157
A
16
151
A
17
A
18
A
19
A
20
A
21
A
22
A
23
A
24
A
25
A
26
A
27
A
28
A
29
A
30
s43s.1.book Page 9 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
The brief instruction10
The brief instruction
Basic functions and important information
Introduction
The chapter of the brief instruction is only used as a quick reference of
the most important operating elements of the vehicle. It is necessary to
observe all the information which is contained in the following chapters
of the Owner's Manual.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the boot lid
Locking the vehicle
Folding out/folding up of the key
Further information page 43, “Unlocking and locking the vehicle”.
Setting steering wheel position
Fig. 3 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever on the steering column / the correct distance of the
driver from the steering wheel
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the
desired position.
– Pull the lever below the steering wheel down fig. 3 - left.
– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/back
position).
– Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.
Further information page 107, “Setting steering wheel position”.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
and your chest is at least 25 cm fig. 3 - right. Not maintaining this minimum
distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect
you - hazard!
You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!
For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of
accident!
Fig. 2 Remote control key
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 10 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
The brief instruction 11
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seat belt height adjuster
– Move the height adjuster in the desired direction up or down fig. 4.
– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly
locked in place.
Further information page 147, “Seat belt height adjuster”.
WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is
positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no account
across your neck!
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
Adjusting height of seat*
Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
Adjusting lumbar support*
Further information page 67, “Adjusting the front seats”.
WARNING
Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
Electric exterior mirror adjustment*
Further information page 65, “Exterior mirror”.
Fig. 4 Front seat: Seat belt height
adjuster
Fig. 5 Controls at seat
Heating of the external mirror
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror
Switching off operating control
Folding in both exterior mirrors*
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
Fig. 6 Inner part of door: Rotary knob
s43s.1.book Page 11 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
The brief instruction12
Switching lights on and off
Further information page 51, “Switching lights on and off ”.
Turn signal and main beam lever
Turn signal light right
Turn signal light left
Switching over between low beam and main beam lights
Headlight flasher
Further information page 57, “The turn signal and main beam lever ”.
Windscreen wiper lever
Intermittent switch, sensitivity setting rain sensor*
Wipers off
Intermittent wipe

Automatic light control*
Switching off all lights/daylight driving lights*
Switching on side lights
Switching on the low beam and main beam
Fog lights*
Rear fog light
Fig. 7 Dash panel: Light switch
Fig. 8 Turn signal and main beam lever
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
Fig. 9 Windscreen wiper lever
A
A
A
0
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 12 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
The brief instruction 13
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Slow wipe
Fast wipe
one time wipe
Automatic wipe/wash
Rear window wiper*
Intermittent wipe - every 6 seconds
Automatic wipe/wash
Further information page 61, “Windshield wiper”.
Power windows*
Button for the power window in the driver's door
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
Button for the power window at the rear right door
Button for the power window at the rear left door
Safety switch
Further information page 46, “Power windows*”.
Refuelling
Fig. 11 Right rear side of the vehicle: Open fuel filler flap / fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed
– In order to open the fuel filler flap, press it on the left side in the middle fig. 11 -
left.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be unlocked to the left using the
vehicle key (only valid for vehicles which do not have automatic unlocking of the
fuel filler flap).
– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above
on the fuel filler flap fig. 11 - right.
Further information page 195, “Refuelling”.
Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's side fig. 12.
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
Fig. 10 Buttons on the driver's door
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
S
Fig. 12 Bonnet release lever
s43s.1.book Page 13 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
The brief instruction14
Opening the bonnet
Fig. 13 Radiator grille: Locking lever / securing the bonnet with the bonnet support
– Pulling on the locking lever in direction of arrow fig. 13 will unlock the
bonnet.
– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for
it.
Further information page 196, “Opening and closing the bonnet.”.
Inspecting the engine oil level
Engine oil must not be refilled.
Engine oil can be refilled.
Engine oil must be refilled.
Further information page 198, “Check engine oil level”.
A
1
A
2
Fig. 14 Dipstick
A
A
A
B
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 14 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 15
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Instruments and warning lights
Overview of the instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter page 15
Speedometer page 16
Coolant temperature gauge page 16
Display
with counter for distance driven page 17
with Service Interval Display page 17
with digital clock page 18
with Multi-functional indicator* page 19
with Information display* page 22
Button for the selection of the mode (turn button) / the setting (press button):
Set hours / minutes
Activating / deactivating the second speed in mph or km/h*
Service interval - Display of the remaining number of days, kilometres or miles
to the next Inspection Service / Reset*
1)
Reset trip counter for distance driven
Resetting Service Interval Display
Activate / deactivate display mode
Fuel gauge page 16
Engine revolutions counter
The red zone of the rev counter scale fig. 15 indicates the range in which the
engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed. The engine control unit restricts
the engine speed to a steady limit value.
Shift into the next higher gear or select the selector lever position D of the automatic
gearbox before reaching the red zone of the rev counter scale.
Fig. 15 Instrument cluster
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
1)
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.
A
6
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 15 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights16
Avoid high engine speeds during the driving time and before the engine has been
warmed up to operating temperature page 175.
For the sake of the environment
Shifting up early helps you save fuel and reduce the operating noise of your vehicle.
Speedometer
Warning against excessive speeds*
An acoustic warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 kilometres
per hour. The acoustic warning signal will switch off again when the vehicle speed goes
below this speed limit.
Note
This function is only valid for some countries.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge page 15, fig. 15 operates only when the ignition
is switched on.
In order to avoid any damage to the engine, please pay attention to the following notes
regarding the temperature ranges.
Cold range
If the pointer is in the left-hand area of the scale it means that the engine has not yet
reached its operating temperature. Avoid running at high engine speeds, at full throttle
and at severe engine loads.
The operating range
The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into
the mid-range of the scale. The pointer may also move further to the right at high
engine loads and high outside temperatures. This is not critical provided the warning
symbol in the instrument cluster does not flash.
If the symbol in the instrument cluster flashes it means that either the coolant
temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. Observe the guidelines
page 31, “Coolant temperature/coolant level ”.
WARNING
Pay attention to the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before opening the bonnet and inspecting the coolant level.
Caution
Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the fresh air inlet
impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant. There is then a risk of the engine over-
heating at high outside temperatures and high engine loads!
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge page 15, fig. 15 only operates when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55°litres or 60 litres
2)
. The warning symbol in
the instrument cluster lights up when the pointer reaches the reserve marking. There
are now about 9 litres of fuel remaining in the tank. This symbol is a reminder for you,
that you must refuel.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel!
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
Caution
Never run the fuel tank completely empty! The irregular supply of the fuel system can
lead to irregular running of the engine. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system
and damage the catalytic converter.
A
3
2)
Valid for Octavia Combi 4x4 and Octavia Scout.
A
6
s43s.1.book Page 16 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 17
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
After filling up, it can occur that during dynamic driving (e.g. numerous curves, braking,
driving downhill and climbing a steep hill) the fuel gauge indicates approx. a fraction
less. When stopping or during less dynamic driving, the correct fuel supply quantity is
indicated. This effect is not a fault.
Counter for distance driven
The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in kilometres (km). In
some countries the measuring unit “mile” is used.
Reset button
If you hold the reset button page 15, fig. 15 pressed for about 1 second, the trip
counter is set back to zero.
Trip counter for distance driven
The trip counter indicates the distance which you have driven since it was last reset -
in steps of 100 metres or 1/10 of a mile.
Counter for distance driven
The counter for distance driven indicates the total distance in kilometers or miles
which the vehicle has been driven.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument cluster, the constant text Error appears in the display.
Have the fault rectified as soon as possible by a specialist workshop.
WARNING
Never seek to adjust the trip counter for distance driven while driving for safety
reasons!
Note
If vehicles which are fitted with the information display* the display of the second
speed is activated in mph or km/h, this driving speed is indicated instead of the
counter for the total distance driven.
Service Interval Display
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, the text can differ on the display.
Service Interval Display
Before the next service interval a key symbol and the remaining kilometers are
indicated after switching on the ignition fig. 16. At the same time, a display appears
regarding the remaining days until the next service interval.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service in ... km or ... days
The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km. or days until
the service due date is reached.
A flashing key symbol and the text Service appears in the display for 20 seconds
as soon as the due date for the service is reached.
The following will be displayed in the information display*:
Service now!
Resetting Service Interval Display
It is only possible to reset the Service Interval Display, if a service message or at least a
pre-warning is shown on the display of the instrument cluster.
We recommend having this resetting performed by a specialist garage.
The specialist garage:
resets the memory of the display after the appropriate inspection,
A
5
Fig. 16 Service Interval Display: Note
s43s.1.book Page 17 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights18
makes an entry in the Service schedule,
affix the sticker with the entry of the following service interval to the side of the
dash panel on the driver's side.
Reset the service interval displays by using the button page 15, fig. 15.
On vehicles which are equipped with information display*, you can call up this infor-
mation in the following menu on page 23:
SETUP
Service Interval
Reset
Caution
We recommend that you do not reset the Service Interval Display yourself otherwise
this can result in the service interval display being incorrectly set, which may also result
in problems with operation of your vehicle.
Note
Never reset the display between service intervals otherwise this may result in
incorrect readouts.
information is retained in the Service Interval Display also after the battery of the
vehicle is disconnected.
If the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair, the correct values must be
entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display. This work is carried out by a
specialist garage.
The data displayed is the same after resetting the display with flexible service inter-
vals (QG1) using the reset button as that for a vehicle with fixed service intervals (QG2).
We therefore recommend having the Service Interval Display reset only by an author-
ised Škoda Service Partner who is familiar with the procedure for resetting the display
with a vehicle system tester.
Please refer to the brochure Service schedule for extensive information about the
service intervals.
Digital clock
You can set the time with the rotary knob page 15, fig. 15.
Select the information which you wish to change by turning the button and carry
out the change of the selected information by pressing the button.
On vehicles which are fitted out with the information display*, it is possible to set the
time in the menu Time page 25.
WARNING
The clock should not be adjusted while driving for safety reasons but only when
the vehicle is stationary!
Shift recommendation for changing gears*
An information for the engaged gear fig. 17 is shown in the display of the instru-
ment cluster.
In order to minimise the fuel consumption, a recommendation for shifting into
another gear is indicated in the display.
If the control unit recognises that it is appropriate to change the gear, an arrow is
shown in the display. The arrow points up or down, depending on whether it is recom-
mended to shift into a higher or lower gear.
At the same time, the recommended gear is indicated instead of the currently engaged
gear .
A
5
A
5
A
5
Fig. 17 Shift recommendation for
changing gears
A
A
A
B
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 18 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 19
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Multi-functional indicator (onboard computer)*
Introduction
The multi-functional indicator appears in the display fig. 18 or in the information
display page 22 depending on the equipment fitted to your vehicle.
The multi-functional indicator offers you a range of useful information.
On vehicles which are fitted out with information display*, it is possible to switch off
the display of some information.
Note
In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of measures.
If the display of the second speed is activated in mph, the current speed* is not
indicated in km/h on the display.
Memory
The multi-functional indicator is equipped with two automatic memories. The
selected memory is displayed in the middle of the display field fig. 18.
The data of the single-trip memory (memory 1) is shown if a 1 appears in the display.
A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory
(memory 2).
Switching over the memory with the help of the button page 20, fig. 19 on the
windscreen wiper lever or with the help of the button on the multifunction steering
wheel* page 20, fig. 19.
Single-trip memory (memory 1)
The single-trip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition
is switched on until it is switched off. New data will also flow into the calculation of the
current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off
the ignition. The memory will be is automatically erased, on the other hand, if the trip
is interrupted for more than 2 hours.
Total-trip memory (memory 2)
The total distance driven memory gathers data from any number of individual jour-
neys up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes driving or 1.999 kilometres driven and
on vehicles which are fitted with information display* up to a total of 99 hours and 59
minutes driving or 9.999 kilometres driven. The memory is deleted when either of
these limits is reached and the calculation starts from anew.
The total-trip memory will not, contrary to the single-trip memory, be deleted after a
period of interruption of driving of 2 hours.
The outside temperature page 20
Driving time page 21
Current fuel consumption page 21
Average fuel consumption page 21
Range page 21
Distance driven page 21
Average speed page 22
Current speed* page 22
oil temperature* page 22
Warning against excessive speeds* page 22
Fig. 18 Multi-functional indicator
A
B
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 19 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights20
Note
All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is
disconnected.
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever and on
the multifunction steering wheel*
Fig. 19 Multi-functional indicator: Controls on the windshield wiper lever / controls on the
multifunction steering wheel
The rocker switch and the button are located on the windshield wiper lever
fig. 19. Switching over and resetting is performed with the handwheel fig. 19
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Selecting the memory
– After briefly pressing the button on the windshield wiper lever or by briefly
pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel, you can select the
desired memory.
Selecting the functions with the help of the windshield wiper lever
– Press the top or bottom rocker switch for longer than 0.5 seconds. In this way,
call up in sequence the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.
Selecting the functions with the help of the multifunction steering
wheel
– By pressing the button , you can call up the menu of the multi-functional indi-
cator.
– Turn the handwheel upwards or downwards. In this way, call up in sequence
the individual functions of the multi-functional indicator.
– Short-term pressing of the button allows to select the highlighted function.
Setting function to zero
– Select the memory you want.
– Press the button or for more than 1 second.
The following readouts of the selected memory will be set to zero with the button
on the windshield wiper lever or with the button on the multifunction steering
wheel:
average fuel consumption,
distance driven,
average speed,
Driving time.
You can only operate the multi-functional indicator when the ignition is switched on.
After the ignition is switched on, the function displayed is the one which you last
selected before switching off the ignition.
Outside temperature
The outside temperature appears in the display when the ignition is switched on.
If the outside temperature drops below +4 °C, a snow flake symbol (warning signal for
ice on the road) appears before the temperature indicator and a warning signal
sounds. After pressing the rocker switch at the windshield wiper lever fig. 19 or
the button at the multifunction steering wheel fig. 19, the function shown last is
indicated.
A
A
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 20 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 21
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside temperature display
that there is no ice on the road. Please note that black ice may also be present
on the road surface even at temperatures around +4°C - warning, drive with
care!
Driving time
The driving time which has elapsed since the memory was last erased, appears in the
display. If you wish to measure the driving time as of a particular time, you must set the
memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button on the windshield
wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or the handwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel* page 20, fig. 19 for longer than 1 second.
The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on
vehicles which are fitted with information display*, it is 99 hours and 59 minutes. The
indicator is set back to null if this period is exceeded.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption level is shown in the display in litres/100 km. This infor-
mation can help you to adapt your style of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to
achieve.
The display appears in litres/hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed.
The indicated value will be updated every 0.5 seconds while you are driving.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is shown in the
display in litres/100 km page 19. This information can help you to adapt your style
of driving to the fuel consumption you wish to achieve.
If you wish to determine the average fuel consumption over a certain period of time
you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using the button
on the windshield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or with the handwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19. A zero appears in the display for the
first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Note
The amount of fuel consumed will not be indicated.
Range
The estimated range in kilometres is shown on the display. It indicates the distance you
can still drive with your vehicle based on the present level of fuel in the tank for the
same style of driving.
The readout is shown in steps of 10 km. After lighting up of the indicator light for the
fuel reserve the display is shown in steps of 5 km.
The fuel consumption for the last 50 km is taken as a basis for calculating the range. If
you drive in a more economical manner from this moment on, the range will be
increased accordingly.
If the memory is set to zero (after disconnecting the battery), the fuel consumption of
10 ltr./100 km is calculated for the range; afterwards the value is adapted accordingly
to the style of driving.
Distance driven
The distance driven since the memory was last erased appears in the display
page 19. If you wish to measure the distance driven of a particular time, you must
set the memory to zero at this moment in time by pressing the button on the wind-
shield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or the handwheel on the multifunction
steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19.
The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1 999 km or on vehicles with
information display*, it is 9 999 km. The indicator is set back to null if this period is
exceeded.
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 21 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights22
Average speed
The average speed since the memory was last erased is shown in the display in
km/hour page 19. If you wish to determine the average vehicle speed over a certain
period of time you must set the memory to zero at the start of the measurement using
the button on the windshield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or with the handwheel
on the multifunction steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19.
A zero appears in the display for the first 100 m you drive after erasing the memory.
The indicated value will be updated every 5 seconds while you are driving.
Current speed*
The current speed which is identical to the display of the speedometer, is indicated on
the display page 15, fig. 15.
oil temperature*
If the oil temperature is lower than 50°C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil
temperature is present, three lines are displayed instead of the oil temperature.
Warning against excessive speeds*
Warning against excessive speeds
This function enables you to set a speed limit, e.g. if you drive in town. A text in the
display is intended to draw your attention to the fact that you have exceeded the set
speed limit.
Select the menu point Speed warning --- km/h..
Drive e.°g at a speed of 50 km/h.
Press the button on the windshield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or the hand-
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19. Speed warning
50 km/h is displayed in the information display*.
The desired speed can also be set in steps of 5°km/h by pressing the button on the
windshield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or by turning the handwheel on the
multifunction steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19. The set speed is confirmed by
pressing the button on the windshield wiper lever page 20, fig. 19 or the hand-
wheel on the multifunction steering wheel* page 20, fig. 19.
If you now exceed the set speed limit, Speed 50 km/h exceeded will be shown on the
display. This message is indicated for as long as the speed is reduced below the set
limit or switch off the message by pressing the button on the windshield wiper lever
page 20, fig. 19 or the handwheel on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 20, fig. 19.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
The set speed limit remains stored even after switching off the ignition.
Information display*
Introduction
The information display provides you with information in a convenient way
concerning the current operating state of your vehicle. The information system also
provides you with data (depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle) relating
to the radio, mobile phone, multi-functional indicator, navigation system, the unit
connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox.
Certain functions and operating conditions are always being checked on the vehicle
when the ignition is switched on and also while driving.
Functional faults, if required repair work and other information are indicated by red
symbols page 24 and yellow symbols page 24.
Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal.
Information and texts giving warnings are also shown in the display page 27.
The display of text is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian and Chinese.
You can select the desired language in the setting menu.
The following information can be shown in the display (depending on the equipment
installed on the vehicle):
A
B
A
D
A
2
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
D
A
B
A
D
A
B
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 22 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 23
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Main menu
Fig. 20 Information display: Controls on the windshield wiper lever / controls on the multi-
function steering wheel
Operating with the buttons on the windshield wiper lever
– You can activate the MAIN MENU by pressing the rocker switch fig. 20 for
more than 1 second.
– You can select individual menu points by means of the rocker switch . When the
pushbutton is briefly pressed, the information you have selected is displayed.
Operating with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
– You can activate the MAIN MENU by pressing the rocker switch fig. 20 for
more than 1 second.
– You can select the individual menus by pressing the handwheel . After briefly
pressing the handwheel , the desired menu is indicated.
– After briefly pressing the button you can achieve a higher level, by pressing the
button for longer than 1 second, you can call up the MAIN MENU.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on
the vehicle):
MFD (Onboard computer) page 19
Audio*
Navigation*
Phone* page 125
Aux. Heating (auxiliary heating)* page 104
Assistants* page 53
Vehicle status page 24
Setup page 25
The menu point Audio is only then displayed when the factory-fitted Radio* is
switched on.
The menu point Navigation is only then displayed when the factory-fitted Navigation
system* is switched on.
The menu point Aux. Heating is only then displayed, if the vehicle is factory-fitted with
the auxiliary heating*.
The menu point Assistants is only then displayed, if the vehicle is fitted with cornering
lights*.
Note
If warning messages are shown in the information display, these messages can be
confirmed with the button on the windshield wiper lever or with the button on
the multifunction steering wheel in order to call up the main menu.
If you do not activate the information display at that moment, the menu shifts to
one level higher every 10 seconds.
The operation of the factory-fitted radio* or the navigation system* is described in
separate operating instructions to be found in the on-board literature.
Main menu page 23
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warn-
ing
page 24
Service Interval Display page 17
Selector lever position for an automatic gearbox page 116
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
D
A
C
A
C
A
B
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 23 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights24
Door, luggage compartment door and bonnet ajar warning
The door, luggage compartment and bonnet ajar warning lights up if at least one door,
the luggage compartment or bonnet are not closed. The symbol indicates which door
is still open or whether the luggage compartment door or bonnet is not closed.
The symbol goes out as soon as the doors, luggage compartment door and bonnet are
completely closed.
A warning signal sounds if the car is driven at a speed of more than 6km/hour and if
the engine or the luggage compartment door is open.
Auto Check Control*
Car state
The Auto Check Control carries out a check of certain functions and vehicle compo-
nents. The check is performed constantly when the ignition is switched on, both when
the vehicle is stationary, as well as when driving.
Some operational faults, urgent repairs, service work or other information appear in
the display of the instrument cluster. The displays are shown with a red or yellow light
symbol depending on the priority of the message.
The red symbols indicate danger (priority 1) while the yellow symbols indicate a
warning (priortity 2). Information for the driver may also appear in addition to the
symbols page 27.
Shown in the menu Vehicle status, if there is at least one error message. After selecting
this menu the first of the error messages is displayed. Several error messages are
shown on the display under the message e.g. 1/3. This indicates that the first of a total
of three error messages is displayed. Investigate the displayed faults as soon as
possible.
As long as the operational faults are not rectified, the symbols are always indicated
again. After the first display, the symbols are indicated without information for the
driver.
If a fault occurs, a warning signal will also sound in addition to the symbol and text in
the display:
Priority 1 - three warning signals
Priority 2 - one warning signal
Red symbols
A red symbol signals danger.
– Stop the vehicle.
– Switch the engine off.
– Investigate the function indicated.
– Obtain professional assistance.
Meaning of the red symbols:
Three successive warning signals will sound if a red symbol appears.
Yellow symbols
Check the relevant function as soon as possible.
The meaning of the yellow symbols:
Engine oil pressure too low page 30
Overheated clutches of the automatic gearbox
DSG*
page 36
s43s.1.book Page 24 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 25
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
In certain countries, if a yellow symbol appears one warning signal will sound as well.
If several operational faults of priority 2 exist, the symbols appear one after the other
and are each illuminated for about 5 seconds.
Setup
You can change certain settings by means of the information display. The current
setting is shown on the information display in the respective menu at the top below the
line.
You can select the following information (depending on the equipment installed on
the vehicle):
Language
MFD Data
Convenience
Lights & Vision
Time
Winter tyres
Units
Assistants
Alt. speed dis.
Service Interval
Factory Setting
Back
After selecting the menu point Back you will reach one level higher in the menu.
Language
Here you can set in which language the warning and information texts should be
displayed.
Displays of the MFA
Here you can switch off or on certain displays of the multi-functional indicator.
Comfort*
You can set the following functions (depending on the equipment installed on the
vehicle):
Check engine oil level,
engine oil sensor faulty
page 35
Brake pad worn page 34
Problem with engine oil pressure
It is also important to have the vehi-
cle inspected without delay by a spe-
cialist garage. The information about
the maximum permissible engine
speed is displayed together with this
symbol.
Rain closing
On vehicles with rain sensor you can switch on or off the
function for automatic closing of the windows and the
sliding/tilting roof in case of rain and locked vehicle. If it is
not raining and the function is set, the windows including
the sliding/tilting roof are closed automatically after
approx. 12 hours.
Door open Here you can switch on or off the functions for opening a
single door and automatic closing.
ATA confirm
Here you can set if a signal tone should sound additionally
when activating or deactivating the anti-theft alarm system
.
Window op. Here you can set the convenience mode only for the driver
window or for all the windows.
s43s.1.book Page 25 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights26
Lights and Visibility
Here you can set how long the light should stay on for the function Coming/Leaving
Home. Furthermore you can here switch on or off the functions daylight driving lights
and convenience turn signal.
After selecting the menu point Factory setting the factory setting of the lighting is
established again.
Time
Here you can set the time, the time format (12 or 24 hour indicator) and the time
change summer/winter time.
Winter tyres
Here you can set at which speed a warning signal should sound. This function is used
for e.g winter tyres with the permissible maximum speed less than the maximum
speed of the vehicle.
When exceeding the speed, the following is displayed on the information display*:
Winter tyres max. speed ... km/h
Measures
Here you can set the units for temperature, consumption and distance driven.
Assistant
Here you can adjust the tones of the acoustic signals of the parking aid*.
Second speed
Here you can switch on the display of the second speed in mph or in km/h
3)
.
Service
Here you can have the kilometers still to be driven and the days until the following
service interval shown and the Service Interval Display reset.
Factory Setting
After selecting the menu point Factory Setting the factory setting of the information
display is established again.
Mirror down
Here you can switch on or off the function for mirror low-
ering on the front passenger side when engaging the
reverse gear
a)
.
Mirror adjust. Here you can switch on or off the function for left and right
exterior mirror adjustment simultaneously.
Factory setting
After selecting this menu the convenience setting is reset
to factory setting. The following is displayed in the infor-
mation display:
Convenience factory settings restored
a)
This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable driver seat.
3)
Valid for countries where the values are indicated in British measuring units.
s43s.1.book Page 26 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 27
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Warning lights
Overview
The warning lights indicate certain functions or faults.
Fig. 21 Instrument cluster with warning lights
Turn signal lights (to the left) page 28
Turn signal lights (to the right) page 28
Fog lights* page 29
Main beam light page 29
Low beam light page 29
Rear fog light page 29
Cruise control system* page 29
Failure of the light bulbs page 29
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine) page 29
Airbag system page 30
Control system for exhaust page 30
Electromechanical power steering page 30
Engine oil pressure page 30

EPC fault light (petrol engine) page 31
s43s.1.book Page 27 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights28
WARNING
If you do not pay attention to the warning lights coming on and the corre-
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in severe body inju-
ries or major vehicle damage.
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. There is a risk of
injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine compartment,
e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. It is also essential to
observe all warnings page 197, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Note
The arrangement of the indicator lights depends on the model version. The
symbols shown in the following functional description are to be found as indicator
lights in the instrument cluster.
Operational faults are shown in the instrument cluster as red symbols (priority 1 -
danger) or yellow symbols (priority 2 - warning).
Turn signal system 
Either the left or right indicator light flashes depending on the position of the turn
signal lever.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a turn signal light fails.
Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn
signal lights as well as both indicator lights to flash.
Further information about the turn signal system page 57.
Glow plug system (diesel engine) page 31
Coolant temperature/coolant level page 31
Traction control system (TCS) page 32
Electronic stability programme (ESP)* page 32
Switch off traction control system (TCS) page 32
Selector lever lock* page 33
Tyre pressure* page 33
Antilock brake system (ABS) page 33
Bonnet page 33
Seat belt warning light page 34
Brake pad wear* page 34
Boot lid page 34
Open door page 34
Fluid level in windshield washer system* page 34
Brake system page 34
Dynamo page 35
Engine oil level page 35
Fuel reserve page 35
s43s.1.book Page 28 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 29
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fog lights*
The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating page 54.
Main beam
The indicator light comes on when the main beam is selected or also when the
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information about the main beam page 57.
Low beam
The warning light comes on when low beam is selected page 51.
Rear fog light
The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are operating page 55.
Cruise control system*
The warning light lights up, when operating the speed regulating system.
Bulb failure
The warning light comes on if a bulb is faulty:
up to 2 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
when switching on the defective light bulb.
The following text e.g will be displayed in the information display*:
Check front right dipped beam!
The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting require several light bulbs. The indi-
cator light only lights up if all light bulbs of the licence plate lighting or the parking
light (in one rear light unit) are defective. Check regularly the function of the light
bulbs.
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine)
If the warning light comes on, this means that soot has accumulated in the diesel
particle filter because of the frequent short distances.
In order to clean the diesel particle filter, the vehicle should be driven at an even speed
of at least 60 km/h at engine speeds of 1 800 - 2 500 rpm for at least 15 minutes or until
the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic gearbox: posi-
tion S) when the traffic situation permits it. This increases the exhaust temperature and
the soot deposited in the diesel particle filter is burnt.
Always pay attention to the valid speed limits .
The warning light goes out after the successful cleaning of the diesel particle filter.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and the
warning light begins to flash. In the information display* appears Diesel-particle:
Owner's manual. Afterwards the engine control unit shifts the engine into the emer-
gency mode, which only has a reduced power output. After switching the ignition off
and on again the warning light comes on.
Have the vehicle inspected without delay by your specialist garage.
WARNING
If you do not pay attention to the warning light coming on and the corre-
sponding descriptions and warning notes, this may result in injuries or major
vehicle damage.
Always adjust your speed to suit weather, road, region and traffic condi-
tions. The route indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard
the national regulations for road traffic.
Caution
As long as the warning light lights up, one must take into account an increased fuel
consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine.
Note
Further information about diesel particle filter page 173.
s43s.1.book Page 29 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights30
Airbag system
Monitoring the airbag system
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
There is a fault in the system if the warning light does not go out or flashes while driving
. This also applies if the warning light does not come on when the ignition is
switched on.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Error: Airbag
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag
has been switched off.
The following situation applies if the front, side and head airbags or belt
tensioner have been switched off using the vehicle system tester:
The warning light lights up for 4 seconds after switching on the ignition and then
flashes again for 12 seconds in intervals of 2 seconds.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated
The following situation applies if the airbag has been switched off using the
switch for the airbag* in the storage compartment:
the warning light comes on for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched
on,
switching off the airbag is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting
up of the indicator light   (airbag switched off) page 157.
WARNING
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of
an accident.
Control system for exhaust
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
If the warning light does not go out after starting the engine or it lights up when driving,
a fault exists in an exhaust relevant component. The engine management system
selects an emergency programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist
garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
Electromechanical power steering
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up continu-
ously, a fault exists in the electromechanical power steering.
If the yellow warning light lights up , this indicates a partial failure of the power
steering and the steering forces can be greater.
If the red warning light lights up , this indicates a complete failure of the power
steering and the steering assist has failed (significantly higher steering forces).
Further information page 172.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
Note
If the yellow warning light goes out after starting the engine again and a short
drive, it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the yellow warning light
comes on after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a
short distance.
Engine oil pressure
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
4)
when the ignition is switched on.
4)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switch-
ing the ignition on, but only if a fault exists or the engine oil level is too low.
s43s.1.book Page 30 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 31
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Stop the vehicle and switch the engine off if the warning light does not go off after
the engine has started or flashes while driving. Check the oil level and top up with oil
as necessary page 199, “Replenishing engine oil”.
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi-
tions prevailing to top up with oil. Keep the engine switched off and obtain profes-
sional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine
damage.
Do not drive any further if the warning light flashes even if the oil is at the correct
level. Do not run the engine not at idling speed either. Contact the nearest specialist
garage to obtain professional assistance.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Oil Pressure: Engine off! Owner's manual
WARNING
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system.
The red oil pressure light is not an oil level indicator! One should there-
fore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably after every refueling
stop.
EPC fault light  (petrol engine)
The  (Electronic Power Control) warning light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on.
If the warning light  does not go out or lights up after starting the engine, a fault
exists in the engine control. The engine management system selects an emergency
programme which enables you to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a
gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault. Workshop!
Glow plug system (diesel engine)
The warning light lights up for a cold engine when switching on the ignition (pre-
heat position) page 107. Start the engine after the indicator light goes out.
The glow plug indicator light will come on for about 1 second if the engine is at a
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This
means that you can start the engine right away.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come on at
all or lights up continuously. Contact a specialist garage as soon as possible to obtain
assistance.
If the warning light begins to flash while driving, a fault exists in the engine control.
The engine management system selects an emergency programme which enables you
to drive to the nearest specialist garage by adopting a gentle style of driving.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Engine fault. Workshop!
Coolant temperature/coolant level
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
5)
when the ignition is switched on.
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level too low if the warning light
does not go out or flashes while driving.
3 peeps sound as an additional warning signal.
In this case stop and switch the engine off and check the coolant level; top up the
coolant as necessary.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the condi-
tions prevailing to top up with coolant. Keep the engine switched off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.
5)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching
the ignition on, but only if the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low.
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 31 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights32
If the coolant is within the specified range, the increased temperature may be caused
by an operating problem at the coolant fan. Check the fuse for the coolant fan, replace
it if necessary page 227, “Fuse assignment in engine compartment”.
Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off although the fluid is at the
correct level and also the fuse of the fan is in proper order. Contact a specialist garage
to obtain assistance.
Please also refer to the additional instructions page 200, “Cooling system”.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check coolant! Owner's manual
WARNING
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning light system page 56.
Take care when opening the coolant expansion bottle. If the engine is hot,
the cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding! It is best to allow the engine
to cool down before removing the cap.
Do not touch the coolant fan The coolant fan may switch on automatically
even if the ignition is off.
Traction control system (TCS)
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
The warning light flashes when a control cycle is activated while driving.
The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the system.
The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the TCS system
can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the TCS system can be switched
on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes out, the TCS
system is fully functional again.
Further information about the TCS page 169, “Traction control system (TCS)”.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes on
after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short
distance.
Switch off traction control system (TCS)
The TCS system is switched off by pressing the button page 169, fig. 150 and the
warning light lights up.
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.
When the ESP helps to stabilise the vehicle, the warning light flashes in the instru-
ment cluster.
The warning light lights up permanently if there is a fault in the ESP system.
The fact that the ESP system operates together with the ABS means that the ESP
warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating properly.
If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine, the ESP system
can be switched off for technical reasons. In this case, the ESP system can be switched
on again by switching the ignition on and off. If the warning light goes out, the ESP
system is fully functional again.
Further information on the ESP page 167, “Electronic stability programme (ESP)*”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)*
The EDL is a part of the ESP. A fault in the EDL is indicated by the lighting up of the ESP
warning light in the instrument cluster. Have the vehicle inspected without delay by an
authorised Škoda Service Partner. Further information on the EDL page 168, “Elec-
tronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL)*”.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the warning light comes on
after switching on the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short
distance.
s43s.1.book Page 32 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 33
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Selector lever lock*
If the green warning light lights up, operate the brake pedal. This is necessary, in
order to be able to move the selector lever out of the position P or N.
Further information about the selector lever lock page 116.
Tyre inflation pressure*
The warning light lights up, if there is a substantial drop in inflation pressure in one
of the tyres. Reduce the speed and check or correct as soon as possible the inflation
pressure in the tyres page 208.
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Visit the nearest specialist garage and
have the fault rectified.
Further information about the tyre pressure monitoring system page 172.
WARNING
When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without
delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation pres-
sures.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected, the warning light comes on after switching on
the ignition. The warning light must go out after driving a short distance.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
The warning light shows the functionality of the ABS.
The warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition has been switched on
or when starting the engine. The warning light goes out after an automatic check
sequence has been completed.
A fault in the ABS
The system is not functioning properly if the ABS warning light does not go out
within a few seconds after switching on the ignition, does not light up at all or lights up
while driving. The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system. Visit a
specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropriately as you will
not know how great the damage is.
Further information about ABS page 171, “Antilock brake system (ABS)”.
A fault in the entire brake system
If the ABS warning light comes on together with the brake system warning light
(handbrake must be released), there is a fault not only in the ABS but also in another
part of the brake system .
WARNING
If the brake system warning light comes on together with the ABS
warning light stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in
the reservoir page 202, “Brake fluid”. If the fluid level has dropped below the
MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Obtain professional
assistance.
Pay attention to the following instructions before checking the brake fluid
level and opening the bonnet page 197, “Working in the engine compart-
ment”.
If the brake fluid is at the correct level, the ABS control function has failed.
The rear wheels may then block very rapidly when braking. In certain circum-
stances, this can result in the rear end of the car breaking away - risk of skid-
ding! Drive carefully to the nearest specialist garage and have the fault
rectified.
Bonnet
The warning light comes on if the bonnet is unlocked. If the bonnet unlocks while
driving, the warning light lights up and as a warning an audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light
lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
s43s.1.book Page 33 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights34
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle symbol
page 24.
Seat belt warning light
The warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the
driver to fasten the seat belt. The warning light only goes out if the driver has fastened
his seat belt.
If the seat belt has not been fastened by the driver, a permanent warning signal sounds
at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km/h and simultaneously the warning light flashes.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver during the next 90 seconds, the warning
signal is deactivated and the warning light lights up permanently.
Further information on the seat belts page 145, “Seat belts”.
Thickness of the brake pads*
The warning light comes on for a few seconds
6)
when the ignition is switched on.
If the warning light comes on, contact a specialist garage immediately and have the
brake pads on all of the wheels inspected.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check brake pads!
Boot lid
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if the luggage
compartment door is open. If the boot lid opens while driving , the warning light
lights up and an audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light
lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle symbol
page 24.
Open door
The warning light comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid is
opened. If one of the doors opens while driving, the warning light lights up and an
audible signal sounds.
The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off. The warning light
lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes.
On vehicles with information display* this warning light is replaced by a vehicle symbol
page 24.
Windshield washer fluid level*
The warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on if there is insufficient
fluid in the windshield washer system. Top up with liquid page 207.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Top up wash fluid!
Brake system
The warning light flashes or comes on if the brake fluid level is too low, if there is a
fault in the ABS or if the handbrake is applied.
If the warning light flashes and an audible signal sounds three times (handbrake is
not applied), stop and check the brake fluid level .
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Brake fluid: Owner's manual
If there is a fault in the ABS which also influences the function of the brake system (e.g.
distribution of brake pressure), the ABS warning light comes on and at the same
time the brake system warning light starts flashing . Be aware that not only the ABS
but also another part of th brake system is defective .
An audible signal sounds three times as an additional warning signal.
One should get used to high pedal forces, long braking distances and long free play of
the brake pedal when driving to the next specialist garage.
6)
The warning light on vehicles fitted with information display does not come on after switching
the ignition on, but only if a fault exists.
s43s.1.book Page 34 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights 35
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
For further information on the brake system page 170, “Brakes”.
Handbrake applied
The warning light
also comes on if the handbrake is applied. An audible warning is
also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km/h.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Release parking brake!
WARNING
Pay attention to the following instructions before checking the brake fluid
level and opening the bonnet page 197, “Working in the engine compart-
ment”.
If the brake system warning light does not go out a few seconds after
switching on the ignition or comes on when driving, stop immediately and
check the brake fluid in the reservoir page 202. If the fluid level has dropped
below the MIN marking, do not drive any further - risk of accident! Obtain
professional assistance.
Alternator
The warning light comes on after the ignition has been switched on. It should go
out after the engine has started.
If the warning light does not go out after the engine has started, or comes on when
driving, drive to the nearest specialist garage. The vehicle battery will be discharged in
this case so switch off all non-essential electrical components.
Caution
If the warning light comes on when driving and in addition the warning light
(cooling system fault) also comes on in display, you must then stop the car immedi-
ately and switch the engine off - risk of engine damage!
Engine oil level
Warning light lights up
If the warning light lights up, the quantity of oil in the engine is probably too low.
Check as soon as possible the oil level or top up page 199, “Replenishing engine oil”
with engine oil.
A peep sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Check oil level!
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 seconds. If no
engine oil has been replenished, the warning light will come on again after driving
about 100 km.
Warning light flashes
A fault on the engine oil level sensor is indicated additionally by an audible signal and
the warning light coming on several times after the ignition has been switched on.
In this case have the engine inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Oil sensor. Workshop!
Fuel reserve
The warning light comes on, if the fuel level is still below 9 litres.
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
The following text will be displayed in the information display*:
Please refuel! Range...km
Note
The Text in the information display* goes out only after refuelling and driving a short
distance.
s43s.1.book Page 35 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Instruments and warning lights36
Temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG*
In the event that the temperature of the clutches of the automatic gearbox DSG is too
high, the symbol and the warning are shown in the information display*.
Gearbox overheated: Stop! Owner's man.!
An audible signal sounds as an additional warning signal.
WARNING
If you must stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe distance
from the traffic and switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning light
system.
Caution
In the event that the clutches of the automatic gearbox have overheated, bring the
vehicle to a stop and switch off the engine. You must wait until the symbol and the
warning go out - risk of gearbox damage! You can continue the trip as soon as the
symbol and the warning go out.
s43s.1.book Page 36 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 37
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Unlocking and locking
Key
Fig. 22 Set of keys without remote control / set of keys with remote control key
Two keys are provided with the vehicle. Depending on the equipment, your vehicle can
be equipped with keys without radio remote control fig. 22 - left, or with radio
remote control* fig. 22 - right.
WARNING
Always withdraw the key whenever you leave the vehicle - even if it is only
for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle.
The children might otherwise start the engine or operate electrical equipment
(e.g. power windows) - risk of injury!
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle has
come to a stop. The steering lock might otherwise engage unintentionally - risk
of accident!
Caution
Each key contains electronic components; therefore protect them against moisture
and severe shocks.
Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean as impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.)
have a negative effect on the proper operation of the locking cylinder and the ignition
lock.
Note
Please approach an authorised Škoda Service Partner if you lose a key since he can
obtain a new one for you.
Changing the battery of the radio remote control
Fig. 23 Remote control key - remove cover / remove battery
Each remote control key contains a battery which is housed under the cover
fig. 23. If the battery is discharged, the red indicator light does not light up after
pressing a button on the remote control fig. 22. Change the battery as follows:
– Fold open the key.
– Carefully press off the battery cover at the points of the arrows fig. 23.
– Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery downwards at
the point of the arrow fig. 23.
– Insert the new battery. Ensure that the “+” symbol on the battery is facing upwards.
The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover.
– Position the battery cover on the key and press on it until it is heard to lock in place.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of a used battery in accordance with environmental regulations.
A
B
A
A
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 37 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking38
Note
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery.
If it is still not be possible to unlock or lock the vehicle with the remote control even
after replacing the battery this means that the system has to be synchronised
page 44.
Electronic immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser prevents the vehicle being operated by an
unauthorised person.
An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key. The immobiliser is deactivated
with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock. The electronic
immobiliser is automatically activated when you withdraw the ignition key from the
lock.
Note
It is only possible to start the engine of your car with a Genuine Škoda key with the
matching code.
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the
inside.
The rear doors are equipped with a child safety lock. You can switch the child safety
lock on and off using the vehicle key.
Switching child safety lock on
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit in the rear door to the left in the direction of the
arrow fig. 24.
Switching child safety lock off
– Use the vehicle key to turn the slit to the right against the direction of the arrow.
So long as the child safety lock is switched on it is not possible to open the door from
the inside with the door opening lever. In this case the door can be opened only from
the outside.
Central locking system
Description
Unlocking or locking causes all the doors and the fuel filler flap* to be unlocked or
locked at the same time by the central locking system (as long as it is not set differently
in the menu Setup - Convenience information display*). The boot lid is unlocked
when opening. It can be opened by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate
page 42.
Operation of the central locking system is possible:
from the outside using the vehicle key page 40,
using the button for the central locking system page 41,
by using the remote control page 43.
Indicator light in the driver's door on vehicles without anti-theft alarm system
After the car is locked, the indicator light flashes after 2 seconds.
After the car is locked with the deactivated safe securing system, the indicator light
flashes only after 30 seconds.
Fig. 24 Child safety locks on the rear
doors
s43s.1.book Page 38 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 39
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Indicator light in the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
After locking the vehicle the indicator light flashes for 2 seconds fast, then more slowly.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system page 39 is not operating, the
indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to
flash slowly after about 30 seconds.
If the indicator light first of all flashes fast for about 2 seconds, afterwards lights up for
about 30 seconds and then flashes slowly, there is a fault in the system of the central
locking or the interior monitor* page 45. Visit a specialist garage to obtain assist-
ance.
Convenience operation of the windows
One can open and close the electrically powered windows when unlocking and
locking the vehicle page 48.
Opening a single door*
This function makes it possible to only unlock the driver's door. The other doors and
the fuel filler flap* remain locked and are only unlocked after repetitive unlocking.
If you wish, you can have your authorised Škoda Service Partner activate the function
of the single door opening mode.
On vehicles with information display*, this function can be switched on in the menu
Setup - Convenience - Door open.
Automatic locking and unlocking*
All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of
about 15 km/h.
If the ignition key is withdrawn, the car is then automatically unlocked again. In addi-
tion, it is possible for the driver to unlock the car by pressing the central locking button
or by pulling the door opening lever.
If you wish, you can have a specialist garage activate the automatic locking function.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents involuntary opening in an exceptional situation (an
accident). Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside,
for example at road crossings. Locked doors do, however, make it more difficult
for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - danger to life!
Note
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are
automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle.
Only the front doors can be unlocked and locked using the key if the central locking
system fails. You can lock or unlock manually the other doors and the boot lid.
Emergency locking of the door page 41.
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 42.
Safe securing
The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing
7)
system. Locking the
vehicle from the outside causes the door locks to be automatically blocked. It is not
possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the inside or from the
outside. This acts as an effective deterrent for attempts to break into your vehicle.
You can deactivate the safe securing system by locking twice within 2 seconds.
If the safe securing system is not operating, the warning light in the driver door flashes
for about 2 seconds fast, goes out and starts to flash slowly again after about
30°seconds.
The safe securing system is again activated the next time the vehicle is unlocked and
locked again.
The doors can be opened from the inside if the vehicle is locked and the safe securing
system is deactivated:
The door is unlocked by actuating the door-opening lever.
The door opens upon actuating the door-opening lever again.
7)
Only valid for some countries.
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 39 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking40
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person and animals in the vehicle as it is then not
possible to open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors
make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency -
hazard!
Note
The anti-theft alarm system* is also activated with the deactivated safe securing
system when locking the vehicle. The interior monitor* is however not activated.
Unlocking the vehicle using the key
– Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the direction of travel
(unlock position) fig. 25.
– Pull on the door handle and open the door.
All the doors (only the driver's door on vehicles with anti-theft alarm system) and
the fuel filler flap* are unlocked.
The boot lid is then unlocked.
The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact.
The safe securing system is deactivated.
The windows open provided the key is held* in the unlock position. On vehicles
fitted with anti-theft alarm system the window operation is only possible 45 seconds
after deactivation of the warning system.
The indicator light in the driver's door stops flashing if the vehicle is not fitted with
an anti-theft alarm system* page 44.
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system*, you must insert the key into
the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after unlocking the door
in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The alarm will be triggered if you
do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.
Locking the vehicle with the key
– Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the opposite direction of
travel (lock position) fig. 25.
The doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap* are locked.
The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact.
The windows and the electric sliding/tilting roof* close provided the key is held in
the lock position.
The safe securing system is activated immediately.
The indicator light in the driver door begins flashing.
Note
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
Fig. 25 Turning the key for unlocking
and locking the vehicle
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 40 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 41
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Button for the central locking system
If the vehicle was not locked from outside, you can also unlock and lock it with the
rocker switch on the centre console without the ignition switched on.
Locking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button page 41, fig. 26. The symbol in the button comes on.
Unlocking all doors and the boot lid
– Press button page 41, fig. 26. The symbol goes out in the button.
The following applies if you have locked your vehicle using the button :
It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside (safety feature,
e.g. when stopping at traffic lights etc.).
You can unlock the doors individually from the inside and open them by pulling the
door opening lever.
As long as one door is opened
8)
, the vehicle cannot be locked in order to avoid
inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed, the locked doors are
automatically unlocked from the inside in order to enable rescuers to gain access to
the vehicle.
By pressing and holding the button or , you can conveniently close or open the
windows page 48.
WARNING
The central locking system also operates if the ignition is switched off. All the
doors and the boot lid are locked. Children should never be left unattended in
the vehicle since it is difficult to provide assistance from the outside when the
doors are locked. Locked doors make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
The door opening lever and the buttons for the central locking system do not operate
if the safe securing system is activated.
Emergency locking of the doors
An emergency locking mechanism is located on the rear side of the doors which have
no locking cylinder; it is only visible after opening the door.
Locking
– Remove the panel fig. 27.
– Insert the key into the opening under the panel and press the stopping lever as
far as the stop toward the inside.
– Re-insert the panel.
After closing the door, you can no longer open it from outside. If the child safety lock
is not switched on, it is possible to open the door from the inside by pulling twice on
8)
Is not valid for the boot lid.
Fig. 26 Centre console: Buttons for
central locking
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
1
A
2
Fig. 27 Rear door: Emergency locking of
the door
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 41 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking42
the door opening lever. If the child safety lock is switched on, it is necesary to also open
the door from outside besides pulling twice on the inner door handle.
Boot lid
Open the boot lid by pressing the hand grip above the licence plate after unlocking the
vehicle using the key or the radio remote control.
Opening the boot lid
–Press on the handle fig. 28 and at the same time raise the boot lid.
Closing the boot lid
– Pull the boot lid down and close it with a slight swing .
A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner paneling of the boot
lid.
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid. Other-
wise, the boot lid might open suddenly when driving even if the boot lid lock is
closed - risk of accident!
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust
gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack -
risk of injury!
Note
After closing the boot lid, it is automatically locked within 2 seconds and the
anti-theft alarm system* is activated. This applies only if the vehicle was locked
before closing the boot lid.
The function of the hand grip above the licence plate is deactivated when starting
off or as of a speed of more than 5 km/hour for vehicles with central locking. The func-
tion of the hand grip is activated again when the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Octavia)
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:
– Fold the seat backrest forwards page 72.
– Take out the warning triangle* fig. 29.
– Press the operating lever in the direction of arrow in order to unlock the boot lid.
The operating lever is located under the panel .
– Open the boot lid from the outside.
Fig. 28 Handle of boot lid
Fig. 29 Emergency unlocking of the
boot lid
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 42 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 43
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Emergency unlocking of the boot lid (Combi)
If there is a fault in the central locking, you can open the boot lid as follows:
– Fold the seat backrest forwards page 72.
– Open up the cover of the lock upwards fig. 30.
– Move the operating lever with the aid of a narrow object e.g. screwdriver up to
the stop in the direction of arrow; the boot lid is then unlocked.
– Open the boot lid from the outside.
Remote control*
Description
You can use the remote control:
to unlock and lock the car,
unlocking boot lid,
electrically open and close the windows.
The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key. The
receiver is located in the interior of the car. The operating range of the remote control
key is approx. 10 m. But this range can be reduced if the batteries are weak.
The key has a fold-open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car
manually and also for starting the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or a new unit installed,
it is then necessary for an authorised Škoda Service Partner to initialise the system.
Only after this is it possible to again use the remote control.
Note
The remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interference
from transmitters close to the car and which operate in the same frequency range (e.g.
mobile phone, TV transmitter).
The battery must be replaced, ideally by an authorised Škoda Service Partner, if the
central locking or anti-theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than
3 metres away.
If the driver door is opened, the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote
control.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Unlocking the vehicle
– Press the button fig. 31 for about 1 second.
Locking the vehicle
– Press button for about 1 second.
Fig. 30 Emergency unlocking of the
boot lid
A
A
Fig. 31 Remote control key
A
1
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 43 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking44
Deactivating safe securing system
– Press button twice in 2 seconds. Further information page 39.
Boot lid remote release
– Press button for about 2 second. Further information page 42.
Folding out of the key
– Press button .
Folding up of the key
– Press button and collapse the key bit in the housing.
The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been unlocked.
The vehicle will lock again automatically if you unlock the vehicle using button but
do not open a door or the boot lid within the next 30 seconds. This function is intended
to prevent the car being unlocked unintentionally.
In addition, when the car is unlocked, the electrically adjustable seats and exterior
mirrors* move into the position assigned to this key. The stored setting of driver seat
and exterior mirrors is retrieved.
Display of the locking
The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked.
If the vehicle is locked by pressing the button and some doors or the boot lid are
not closed, the turn signal lights flash only after closing.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked from the outside and the safe securing system is acti-
vated, there must not be any person in the vehicle as it is then not possible to
open either a door or a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more
difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency - hazard!
Note
Operate the radio remote control only when the doors and boot lid are closed and
you have visual contact with the vehicle.
Once in the car, you must not press the lock button of the radio remote control
before inserting the key into the ignition lock in order to avoid the car being inadvert-
ently locked and the alarm system* being switched on. Should this happen, press the
unlock button of the radio remote control.
Syncronisation of the remote control
If the vehicle cannot be unlocked by actuating the remote control system then it is
possible that the code in the key and the control unit in the vehicle are no longer
synchronised. This can occur when the buttons on the radio-operated key are actuated
a number of times outside of the operative range of the equipment or the battery on
the remote control was replaced.
This means it is necessary to synchronise the code as follows:
Press any button on the remote control.
pressing of the button means that the door will unlock with the key within 1
minute.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description
The anti-theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to
break into the vehicle. The system triggers audible and visual warning signals if an
attempt is made to break into the vehicle.
How is the alarm system activated?
The anti-theft alarm system is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked with
the key on the driver's door or by using the radio remote control. It is activated 30
seconds after locking the door.
How is the alarm system deactivated?
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated if the vehicle is unlocked by only using the
radio remote control. The anti-theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not
opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal.
A
3
A
2
A
4
A
4
A
1
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 44 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 45
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Once you unlock the vehicle by inserting the key into the driver door you then have to
insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after
opening the door in order to deactivate the anti-theft alarm system. The alarm will be
triggered if you do not switch on the ignition within 15 seconds.
When is the alarm triggered?
The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored:
Bonnet,
Boot lid,
Doors,
Ignition lock,
Angle of the vehicle* page 45,
Vehicle interior* page 45,
A drop in voltage of the on-board power supply.
An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is disconnected
while the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
How is the alarm switched off?
You switch the alarm off if you unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control or if you
switch the ignition on.
Note
The working life of the alarm siren is 6 years. More detailed information is available
by a specialist garage.
Before leaving the car, check that all the doors, windows and the electric
sliding/tilting roof* are properly closed in order to ensure that the anti-theft alarm
system is fully operational.
Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the
radio remote control from other vehicles.
Interior monitor* and Towing protection monitoring*
Switch off the interior monitor and towing protection monitoring
– Switch off the ignition.
– Open the driver door.
–Press the button at the centre column on the driver side fig. 32, the symbol
which lights up in the button changes from red to orange.
– Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
The interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring are switched on again
automatically the next time the car is locked.
Note
You can switch the interior monitor and the towing protection monitoring off if
there is a possibility that movements from (e.g. children or animals) inside the vehicle
interior or if the vehicle must be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed, might
trigger the alarm.
The opened storage compartment for spectacles reduces the effectiveness of the
interior monitor. In order to ensure the function of the interior monitor to be fully
operational, always close the storage compartment for spectacles before locking the
vehicle.
Fig. 32 Button for interior monitor and
towing protection monitoring
s43s.1.book Page 45 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking46
Power windows*
Buttons on the driver's door
The power windows operate only when ignition is switched on.
Opening a window
– A window is opened by pressing lightly on the respective button in the door. The
process stops when one releases the button.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing the
button up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop
immediately.
Closing a window
– A window is closed through pulling lightly on the respective button in the door. The
closing process stops when one releases the button.
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pulling the
button up to the stop. Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop
immediately.
The buttons for the individual windows are located in the armrest of the driver's door
fig. 33, front passenger door and in the rear doors* page 47.
Buttons for the power windows in the armrest for the driver
Button for the power window in the driver's door
Button for the power window in the front passenger's door
Button for the power window in the rear door on the right*
Button for the power window in the rear door on the left*
Safety pushbutton*
Safety pushbutton*
You can deactivate the buttons for power windows at rear doors by pressing the safety
pushbutton fig. 33. The buttons for power windows at rear doors are activated
again by pressing the safety pushbutton again.
If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated, the indicator light in the safety
switch lights up.
WARNING
If you lock the vehicle from the outside, do not leave any person in the
vehicle since it is no longer possible to open the windows from the inside in an
emergency.
The system is fitted with a force limiter page 47. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimeters.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
It is recommended to deactivate the electrically operated power windows in
the rear doors (safety pushbutton) fig. 33 when children are being trans-
ported on the rear seats.
Note
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for a
further 10 minutes. During this time the automatic closing and opening functions of
the window will operate. The power windows are switched off completely once you
open the driver or front passenger door.
When driving always use the existing heating, air conditioning and ventilation
system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle. If the windows are opened, dust as
well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at
certain speeds.
Fig. 33 Buttons on the driver's door
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
A
S
s43s.1.book Page 46 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 47
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Button in front passenger door and in rear doors
A button for the relevant window is provided in these doors.
Opening a window
– Lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the window has moved
into the desired position.
– Additionally you can open the window automatically (fully opened) by pressing the
button down up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window
to stop immediately.
Closing a window
– Lightly press the appropriate button up and hold it until the window has moved
into the desired position.
– Additionally you can close the window automatically (fully closed) by pressing the
button up up to the stop. Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to
stop immediately.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter page 47. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimeters.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
Note
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open or close the windows for a
further 10 minutes. During this time the automatic closing and opening functions of
the window will operate. The power windows are switched off completely once you
open the driver or front passenger door.
If the child safety lock is switched on, the lighting of the switch for the window lifter
in the rear doors* is not activated.
Force limiter of the power windows
The electrically operated power windows are fitted with a force limiter. It reduces the
risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by
several centimeters.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 seconds, the
closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several
centimeters.
You must try to close the window once again within 10 seconds after the window has
gone down twice, even if the obstacle was not yet removed, the closing process is
stopped. During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window. The
force limiter is still switched on.
The force limiter is only switched off, if you attempt to close the window within the next
10 seconds - the window closes now with full strength!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
WARNING
You should take particular care when closing the windows! You may otherwise
suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example, jammed in the
window!
Fig. 34 Position of button in front
passenger door
s43s.1.book Page 47 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking48
Window convenience operation
You can open and close the electrically powered windows as follows when unlocking
and locking the vehicle (only close the sliding/tilting roof):
Opening a window
– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the unlock position or
press the unlock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are
opened.
Closing a window
– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or press
the lock button of the radio remote control until all the windows are closed.
You can interrupt the opening or closing operation of the windows immediately by
releasing the key or the lock button.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter page 47. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimeters.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
Note
On vehicles fitted with anti-theft alarm system the convenience window opening is
possible by means of the key in the locking cylinder only 45 seconds after deactivating
the warning system or after activating the anti-theft alarm system.
Operational faults
Electrically operated power windows do not operate
If the battery of the car has been disconnected and then reconnected, the electrically
operated power windows do not operate. The system must be activated. Proceed as
follows in order to re-establish the function:
Switch on the ignition.
Press the relevant switch top and hold it pressed as long as necessary until the
window is closed.
Release the switch.
Press once again the relevant switch top and hold it pressed for approx. 3 seconds.
Operation in winter
Ice accumulating on the surface of the windows during the winter may result in a
greater resistance when closing the windows and the window may stop and go down
several centimetres
It is necessary to put the force limiter out of operation in order to close the window
page 47, “Force limiter of the power windows”.
WARNING
The system is fitted with a force limiter page 47. If there is an obstacle, the
closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimeters.
You should then take particular care when closing the windows! You may
otherwise suffer severe injuries as a result of getting an arm, for example,
jammed in the window!
Electric sliding/tilting roof*
Description
Fig. 35 Control dial for the power
sliding/tilting roof
s43s.1.book Page 48 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking 49
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The sliding/tilting roof is operated by means of the control dial page 48, fig. 35 and
only functions when the ignition is switched on. The control dial has several positions.
After switching the ignition off, it is still possible to open, close and tilt the sliding/tilting
roof for approx. 10 minutes. It is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof
after opening one of the front doors, however.
Note
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, it is possible that the
sliding/tilting roof does not close fully. Here you have to set the control dial to the
switch position and press it forward for about 10 seconds.
Opening and tilting
Comfort position
– Turn the switch to position page 48, fig. 35.
Opening fully
– Turn the switch to position and hold it in this position (spring-tensioned posi-
tion).
Tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position .
When the sliding/tilting roof is in the comfort position, the intensity of the wind noise
is much less.
The sun screen is also opened automatically when the roof slides open. You can slide
the sun screen into the opened or closed position by hand when the sliding/tilting roof
is closed.
Caution
It may be necessary during winter to remove any ice and snow in the area of the
sliding/tilting roof before opening it in order to prevent damaging the opening
mechanism.
Closing
Sliding closed/closing the sliding/tilting roof
– Turn the switch to position page 48, fig. 35.
Safety closing
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter. If an obstacle (e.g. ice) prevents
closing, the sliding/tilting roof stops and opens completely. You can close the
sliding/tilting roof completely without force limiter by pressing the switch to the
position page 48, fig. 35 at the front for as long as it takes for the sliding/tilting roof
to close completely .
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury!
Convenience operation
You can also close an open sliding/tilting roof from the outside.
– Hold the key in the locking cylinder of the driver's door in the lock position or press
the lock button of the remote control until the sliding/tilting roof is closed .
The closing operation stops when one releases the key or the lock button.
WARNING
Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully - risk of injury! The force limiter does not
operate with the convenience closing.
A
A
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
A
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 49 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Unlocking and locking50
Emergency operation
Fig. 36 Detail of the headliner: Points for positioning screwdriver - left / emergency opera-
tion - right
You can close and/or open the sliding/tilting roof by hand if the system is defect.
– Position the flat blade of a screwdriver carefully against the rear edge of the cover
of the electrical drive at the points of the arrows fig. 36.
– Pull the cover down.
– Insert an Allen key, Group 4, up to the stop into the opening fig. 36 and close
or open the sliding/tilting roof.
– Press on the cover again by first of all inserting the plastic lugs and then pushing the
cover up.
– Have the malfunction rectified by a specialist garage.
Note
It is necessary after each emergency operation to move the sliding/tilting roof into the
basic position. Here you have to turn the control dial forward to the switch position
page 48, fig. 35 and press for about 10 seconds.
A
1
A
2
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 50 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 51
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lights and Visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on side lights
– Turn the light switch into position .
Switching on the low beam and main beam
– Turn the light switch into position .
– Press the main beam lever forward in order to switch on the main beam
page 57, fig. 43.
Switching off lights (except daylight driving lights)
– Turn the light switch into position°0.
Low beam comes on only if the ignition is switched on. After switching off the ignition,
the low beam is switched off automatically and only the side lights come on.
On vehicles with separate lights* for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the
front bumper, the low beam does not light up when the light switch is in position 0
even if the ignition is switched on.
On models fitted with right-hand steering the position of certain switches differs
from that shown in fig. 37. The symbols which mark the switch positions are iden-
tical, however.
WARNING
Never drive with side lights on - risk of accident! The side lights are not bright
enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by other
oncoming traffic. In this case, always switch on the low beam when it is dark or
if visibility is poor.
Note
An audible warning will sound if you withdraw the ignition key and open the
driver's door when the vehicle lights are still on.
The acoustic warning signal is switched off over the door contact when the driver's
door is closed (ignition off). The vehicle can be parked with the side lights on.
If the car is parked for a lengthy period, we recommend switching off all lights, or
leaving only the parking lights switched on.
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance
with the legal requirements.
If a fault occurs in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically
In the event of cool or humid weather conditions, the headlights can be misted up
from inside.
The temperature difference between interior and external area of the headlight
lenses is decisive.
When the driving lights are switched on, the light outlet surfaces are free from
mist after a short period. The headlight lenses can possibly mist up at the border
areas.
It also concerns reverse light and turn signal lights.
This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system.
Fig. 37 Dash panel: Light switch
s43s.1.book Page 51 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility52
“DAY LIGHT”*
Switching on daylight driving lights
– Switch on the ignition without turning the light switch out of the position 0 or .
Deactivating the function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel up to 3 seconds after
switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to the bottom and hold it in
this position for at least 3 seconds.
Activating the function daylight driving lights
– Pull the turn signal light lever towards the steering wheel up to 3 seconds after
switching on the ignition and at the same time, slide it to the top and hold it in this
position for at least 3 seconds.
On vehicles fitted with an information display*, you can also activate or deactivate in
the menu the function daylight driving lights:
SETUP
Lights & Vision
On vehicles with separate lights* for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the
front bumper, the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when acti-
vating the function daylight driving lights (neither front nor rear).
If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights* for daylight driving lights, the
combination of the low beam, the parking lights (front and rear) including the licence
plate light is used as daylight driving lights.
In some countries, the national legal provisions require that the rear parking lights also
come on together with the separate lights* for daylight driving lights when activating
the function daylight driving lights.
When the daylight driving lights are switched on, the illumination of the instrument
cluster is switched off, however, it is switched on in the position  when it is dark
and the low beam shines with full brightness (100% of the performance).
Automatic driving lamp control*
Switching on automatic driving lamp control*
– Turn the light switch fig. 38 into position .
Switching off automatic driving lamp control*
– Turn the light switch to the position 0, or .
If the light switch is in the position , the symbol illuminates when the ignition is
switched on  next to the light switch. If the low beam is activated with the light
sensor, the symbol illuminates additionally next to the light switch.
If the light comes on automatically, the side lights and low beam as well as licence plate
light light up at the same time.
If the automatic light control* is switched on, the light is regulated with the light sensor
in the rear mirror holder. If the light intensity drops below the set value, e.g when
driving during the day into a tunnel, the low beam and the side lights as well as the
licence plate light come on automatically. If the light intensity increases again, the
lights switch off automatically.
Motorway lights
If the automatic light control* has been switched on and the vehicle speed is over 140
km/h for at least 10 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on automati-
cally.
If the vehicle speed is below 65 km/h for at least 2 minutes, the lights are switched off.
Fig. 38 Dash panel: Light switch
s43s.1.book Page 52 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 53
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Rain lights
If you switch on the windscreen wipe in the operation rain sensor* for longer than 10
seconds or in the operation permanent wipe (position 2 or 3) page 61 switching on
for longer than 15 seconds, the side lights and low beam are switched on automati-
cally. The light switches off if the windscreen wipe is in operation rain sensor* for more
than 4 minutes or is not switched on in the operation permanent wipe.
WARNING
The automatic light control only operates as a support. The driver is not
released from his responsibility to inspect the light and if necessary to switch on
the light depending on the light conditions. The light sensor cannot detect for
example rain or snow. For these conditions we recommend to switch on the low
beam !
Note
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair its
function or put it out of operation.
The same principles as for using the automatic light control also apply to the light
which is switched on manually page 51.
Cornering lights*
The cornering lights are used to illuminate the curves by means of the cone of light
swiveling together with the front headlight with Xenon lights*. This function is active
when the speed of the car increases to more than 10km/h.
The swiveling function of the headlights can be switched off / on via the menu point
Assistants in the main menu of the information display* page 23.
WARNING
If the cornering lights are defective, the headlights are automatically lowered to
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic.
Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened. Drive carefully and have
the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
Coming Home Function
The function makes it possible to switch on the lights in the darkness for a short time
after leaving the vehicle.
Switching on Coming Home Function
– The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control  and the low
beam illuminates.
– Switch off the ignition.
– After opening the driver's door, the function Coming Home is switched on.
– Close all the doors and the boot lid and lock the vehicle. After a short time, switch
all lights off.
Depending on equipment fitted the function Coming Home switches on the following
lights:
Parking lights,
Low beam,
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
Licence plate light.
Coming Home Function
The lights go out 10 seconds after closing all the doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the lights go out 60 seconds after switching off
the ignition.
The function Coming Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the inte-
rior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor, the
Coming Home Function is not switched on after switching off the ignition.
Note
If the Coming Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be heavily
discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance
with the legal requirements.
s43s.1.book Page 53 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility54
You can change the illumination period for the Coming Home Function by means
of the information display*.
Leaving Home Function
This function makes it possible to switch on the lights when approaching the vehicle.
Switching on Leaving Home Function
– The light switch is in the position automatic driving lamp control .
– Unlock the vehicle with the radio remote control - the lights come on.
Depending on equipment fitted the function Leaving Home switches on the following
lights:
Parking lights,
Low beam,
Entry lighting in the exterior mirrors,
Licence plate light.
Leaving Home Function
The function Leaving Home is controlled with the light sensor in the mount of the inte-
rior rear mirror. If the light intensity is higher than the set value of the light sensor, the
Leaving Home Function is not switched on after unlocking the vehicle with the radio
remote control.
After unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control, the lights come on for 10
seconds. The Leaving Home Function is also switched off after the ignition is switched
on and after locking the vehicle.
If no door is opened within 30 seconds, the lights go out and the vehicle is locked auto-
matically.
Note
If the Leaving Home Function is switched on constantly, the battery will be heavily
discharged particularly in short-haul traffic.
The switching on of the described lights should only be undertaken in accordance
with the legal requirements.
You can change the illumination period for the Leaving Home Function by means
of the information display*.
Tourist light*
This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system, driving
on the left/right, without dazzling the oncoming vehicles. When the mode “tourist
light” is active, the side to side swivel of the headlights is deactivated.
The mode “tourist light” is activated / deactivated via the information display* in the
menu:
SETUP
Lights & Vision
Travel mode
Off
Switched on
Fog lights*
Switching on the fog lights
– First of all turn the light switch into position or fig. 39.
– Pull the light switch into position .
The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched
on page 27.
Fig. 39 Dash panel: Light switch
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 54 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 55
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fog lights with turning light “CORNER”* function
The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are designed for a better illu-
mination of the surrounding area near the vehicle when corning,
parking etc.
The fog lights with the function “CORNER” are adjusted according to the steering angle
or after switching on the turn signal light
9)
in the following circumstances:
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running or it moves with a speed of
maximum 40 km/h,
the daylight driving lights are not switched on,
the low beam is switched on or the light switch is in the position  and the
intensity of the ambient light causes the low beam to be switched on,
the fog lights are not switched on,
no reverse gear is engaged.
Note
If you engage the reverse gear during the active function “CORNER”, both fog lights
illuminate.
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
– First of all turn the light switch into position or page 54, fig. 39.
– Pull the switch into position .
The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is
switched on page 27.
Only the rear fog light of the trailer lights up automatically when you are towing a trailer
using a factory-fitted towing device which is fitted with the rear fog light.
The rear fog light is located in the rear light array on the driver's side.
Caution
The rear fog light should only be switched on if visibility is particularly poor (conform
with any varying legal provisions) to avoid dazzling vehicles behind your vehicle.
Instrument lighting*
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting.
Instrument lighting
– Switch on the light.
– Turn the control dial fig. 40 to the desired intensity of the instrument lighting.
For the information display* page 22 the intensity of the lighting is automatically
set. It is only possible to adjust the instrument lighting with the control dial if the light
intensity drops below the set value of the light sensor.
9)
If both switch on versions are conflicting, for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left
and the right turn signal light is switched on, the turn signal light has the higher priority.
A
2
Fig. 40 Dash panel: Instrument lighting
s43s.1.book Page 55 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility56
Headlamp range adjustment
Once the low beam is switched on you can then adapt the range of the
headlights to the load of the vehicle.
– Turn the control dial fig. 41 until you have adjusted the low beam so that
oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Settings
The positions correspond approximately to the following vehicle loads:
Front seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Driver seat occupied, luggage compartment laden.
Caution
Set the headlight beam adjustment in such a way as to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic.
Note
Headlights fitted with Xenon bulbs* adapt automatically to the load and driving state
of the vehicle (e.g. accelerating, braking) when the ignition is switched on and when
driving. Vehicles which are equipped with Xenon bulbs* do not have a manual head-
light range adjustment control.
Switch for hazard warning lights
– Press switch fig. 42 to switch the hazard warning light system on or off.
All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning
light system is switched on. The indicator light for the turn signals and the indicator
light in the switch also flash at the same time. You can also switch on the hazard
warning light system if the ignition is switched off.
The hazard warning light system is switched on automatically if an airbag is deployed
in the event of an accident.
Please comply with any legal requirements when using the hazard warning light
system.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning light system if, for example:
you encounter traffic congestion,
your vehicle breaks down or an emergency situation occurs.
Fig. 41 Dash panel: Lights and Visibility
A
-
A
1
A
2
A
3
Fig. 42 Dash panel: Switch for hazard
warning lights
s43s.1.book Page 56 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 57
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The turn signal and main beam lever
The parking lights and headlight flasher are also switched on and off
using the turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever perform the following functions:
Right and left turn signal light
– Push the lever upwards or downwards fig. 43.
– If you only wish to flash three times* (the so-called convenience turn signal), push
the lever briefly up to the upper or lower pressure point and release it. This function
can be activated/deactivated in the information display* page 22.
– Turn signal for changing lanes - in order to only flash briefly, move the lever up or
down to the pressure point and hold it in this position.
Main beam
– Switch on the low beam.
– Push the lever forwards in direction of arrow (spring-tensioned position).
– If you push the lever towards the steering wheel in direction of arrow (spring-
tensioned position) the main beam is switched off.
Headlight flasher
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel (spring-tensioned position) in direction
of arrow - the main beam and warning light in the instrument cluster come
on.
Parking light
– Switch off the ignition.
– Push the lever up or down - the right-hand or left-hand parking light is switched
on.
Information concerning the function of the lights.
The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning light or in the instrument cluster also flashes.
The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve.
The indicator light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb of the turn signal light
fails.
The side light and rear light on the appropriate side of the vehicle are switched on
when the parking light is selected. The parking light only operates if the ignition is
switched off.
Caution
Use main beam or the headlight flasher only if this does not risk dazzling other road
users.
Note
If you have switched on the right or left turn signal light and you switch off the igni-
tion, the parking light is not automatically switched on.
Use only in accordance with the legal requirements the described lighting and
signal systems.
Fig. 43 Turn signal and main beam lever
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 57 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility58
Interior lighting
Vehicle interior lighting front and rear*
The same principles apply for the lighting of the front and rear part of the vehicle.
Switching the interior light on
– Press the switch to the left, the symbol fig. 44 appears.
Switching the interior light off
– Press the switch into the middle position O.
– On the version without reading lights press the switch to the right, the symbol
O appears.
Door contact setting
– Press the switch to the right, the symbol appears.
– On the version without reading lights press the switch into the middle position
.
Reading lights*
– Press on one of the switches in order to switch the right or left reading light on
or off.
The interior light comes on as soon as you unlock the car or open a door or when the
ignition key has been removed. The light goes out again about 30 seconds after all the
doors have been closed. The interior lighting is switched off when you lock the car or
switch the ignition on. This only applies when the switch for the corresponding interior
lights is standing n the door contact setting.
The interior lighting goes off after about 10 minutes when a door has been left open in
order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
If the switch is in the position (permanent lights), the interior lighting goes off at the
latest after 10 minutes in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
Note
We recommend having these bulbs replaced by a specialist garage.
Rear interior lighting
The rear interior lighting fig. 45 is actuated by moving the switch to the symbol ,
O or to the middle position .
The same principles apply for the interior lighting at the rear as for the for the interior
lighting at the front page 58.
Note
We recommend having the bulb replaced by a specialist garage.
Fig. 44 Detail of the headliner: Front
and rear interior lighting
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
Fig. 45 Roof liner light at the rear
s43s.1.book Page 58 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 59
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Lighting of the storage compartment on front passenger side*
– When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger side the
lighting in the storage compartment comes on.
– The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes
out when the flap is closed.
Front door warning light*
The warning light is located in the door trim panel below fig. 46.
The warning light goes on every time the door is opened. The light goes out about 10
minutes after opening the door in order to avoid discharging the battery of the vehicle.
There is a reflector installed on some vehicles instead of the warning light.
Luggage compartment light*
The lighting comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened. If the lid remains
open for more than about 10 minutes, the luggage compartment lighting switches off
automatically.
Entry lighting*
The lighting is positioned on the bottom edge of the exterior mirror.
The light beam is directed towards the entry area of the front door.
The light comes on after the doors have been locked or on opening the boot lid. The
light goes out after switching on the ignition or up to 30 seconds after closing all the
doors and the boot lid.
If a door or the boot lid remains open, the light goes out within 2 minutes if the ignition
is switched off.
WARNING
If the entry light comes on, do not touch its cover - risk of burns!
Visibility
Rear window heater
– You can switch the rear window heater on or off by pressing the switch
fig. 47 - the indicator light in the switch comes on or goes out.
The rear window heater only operates when the engine is running.
The rear window heater switches off automatically after 10 minutes.
For the sake of the environment
As soon as the window is de-iced or free from mist, the heating should be switched off.
The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy
page 179, “Saving electricity”.
Fig. 46 Front door: Warning light
Fig. 47 Switch for rear window heater
s43s.1.book Page 59 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility60
Note
The position and the shape of the switch can differ depending on equipment
installed in the vehicle.
If the on-board voltage drops, the rear window heater is switched off automatically,
in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control.
Sun visors
Fig. 48 Sun visor: Swivelling out / double sun visor
You can pull the sun visor for the driver or front passenger out of the fixture and swivel
it toward the door in the direction of the arrow fig. 48.
The vanity mirrors* in the sun visors are provided with covers. Push the cover in direc-
tion of arrow .
On vehicles which are equipped with double sun visor*, you can also unfold the auxil-
iary visor in direction of arrow after swivelling the sun visor.
WARNING
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deployment
area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are attached
to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is
deployed.
Sun screen*
Fig. 49 Unroll / remove the sun screen
The sun screen is located in a housing on the luggage compartment cover. If required,
you can remove the housing with the sun screen from the luggage compartment cover.
Pulling out
– Pull the sun screen at the loop and hang it in the brackets fig. 49.
Folding
– Take the sun screen out of the brackets and hold it at the loop so that it can
roll up slowly and without damage into the housing on the luggage compartment
cover.
Removing
– Unhook the fastening elements from the luggage compartment cover .
– Roll up the sun screen again into the housing on the luggage compartment cover.
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow and take out the sun screen in
the direction or arrow .
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 60 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 61
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Windshield wiper and wash system
Windshield wiper
You can operate the windscreen wipers and automatic wipe/wash
using the windscreen wiper lever.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 50 has the following positions:
Finger-operated wiping
– If you wish to wipe the windscreen only briefly, push the lever into the sprung
position . If you hold the lever in the lower position for more than 1 second, the
wiper wipes faster.
Intermittent wiping
– Position the lever up into position .
– Set with the switch the desired break between the individual wiper strokes
Slow wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Fast wipe
– Position the lever up into position .
Automatic wipe/wash for windscreen
– Pull the lever towards the steering wheel into sprung position , the wash system
sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later. The wash
system and the windscreen wiper operate simultaneously at a speed of more than
120 km/h.
– Release the lever. The windscreen wash system stops and the wiper continues for
another 3 - 4 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of the wind-
screen). At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again* 5 seconds
after the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Rain sensor*
– Move the lever into position .
– You can set the sensitivity of the sensor individually with switch .
Wiping the rear window pane*
– Push the lever away from the steering wheel into position - the widescreen
wiper will operate every 6 seconds.
Automatic wipe/wash for the rear window pane*
– Press the lever from the steering wheel forward into the sprung position , the
wash system sprays immediately, the windscreen wiper starts wiping a little later.
As long as you hold the lever in this position, the wiper operates as well as the wash
system.
– Letting go of the lever will cause the windscreen wash system to stop and the wiper
to continue for another 2 - 3 wiper strokes (depending on the period of spraying of
the windscreen). The lever will stay in position after releasing it .
Switching windscreen wipers off
– Move the lever back into its home position .
After the windscreen wiper switches off each time or the ignition switches off for the
third time, the position of the windscreen wiper changes, this counteracts an early
fatigue of the wiper rubbers.
Fig. 50 Windscreen wiper lever
A
4
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
5
A
1
A
A
A
6
A
7
A
6
A
0
s43s.1.book Page 61 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility62
The windscreen wipers and the wash system only operate if the ignition is switched on
and the bonnet is closed
10)
.
If the intermittent wipe is switched on, the intervals are also controlled depending on
speed.
The rain sensor* automatically regulates the break between the individual wiper
strokes depending on the intensity of the rain.
The rear window will be wiped again if the front window wipers are on when reverse
gear is selected.
The windscreen washer nozzles are heated* when the ignition is switched on.
Top up with wash liquid page 207.
Winter position
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from the wind-
screen. For this reason we recommend adjusting the windscreen wipers in winter so
that they can be folded out from the windscreen easily. You can set this rest position as
follows:
Switch on the windscreen wipers.
Switch off the ignition. The windscreen wipers remain in the position in which they
were when switching off the ignition.
You can also use the service position page 63 as a winter position.
WARNING
Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi-
bility and safe driving page 63.
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. Otherwise the window cleaner could
freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
The rain sensor only operates as a support. The driver is not released from
the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers manually
depending on the visibility conditions.
Caution
In frosty weather, please first of all check whether the windscreen wiper blades are not
frozen to the windscreen before switching them on. Switching on windscreen wipers
when the blades are frozen to the windscreen may result in damage both to the blades
and the motor of the windscreen wipers!
Note
If the slower or the faster wiper setting is switched on page 61, fig. 50 and
the vehicle speed decreases to below 4 km/h, the lower wiper step is switched on
automatically. At a speed increase of more than 8 km/h the previous wiper setting is
established again.
If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wiper will try to push away the
obstacle. If the obstacle continues to block the wiper, the wiper stops after 5 cycles, in
order to avoid a damage to the wiper. Remove the obstacle and and switch on the
wiper again.
Automatic rear window wiper* (Combi)
If the windshield wiper lever is in the position page 61, fig. 50 or , the rear
window wiper carries out a wiping process every 30 seconds or 10 seconds at a speed
above 5 km/h.
When the rain sensor* is active (the lever is in the position ) the function is only
active if the front window wipers continue to operate (no break between each wiping
process).
Activation/deactivation
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is activated/deactivated in the infor-
mation display* in the menu:
Setup
Lights & Vision
Rear wiper
10)
On vehicles which do not have a contact switch for the bonnet, the windshield wiper and wash
system operates also when the bonnet is opened.
A
2
A
3
A
2
A
3
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 62 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 63
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
The function of the automatic rear window wiper is only valid for Combi vehicles which
are equipped with the information display*. The function is activated in the factory.
Headlight cleaning system*
The headlights are being cleaned after the windscreen has been sprayed for the first
time and fifth time, the low beam or main beam are switched on and the windscreen
wiper lever was held in the position page 61, fig. 50 for about 1 second.
The headlight washer nozzles are moved forward out of the bumper by the water pres-
sure for cleaning the headlights.
You should remove stubborn dirt (such as insect residues) from the headlight lenses at
regular intervals, for example when refuelling. Please refer to the following guidelines
page 188, “The headlight lenses”.
You should remove any snow from the fixtures of the washer nozzles and clear ice in
winter with a de-icing spray in order to ensure proper operation of the cleaning
system.
Replacing wiper blades for the windscreen wipers
One cannot fold out the wiper arms in the rest position from the windscreen. Before
replacing the wiper arms you must put them into the service position.
Service position for changing wiper blades
– Close the bonnet.
– Switch the ignition on and then again off.
– Then press the windscreen wiper lever in the position page 61, fig. 50 within
20 seconds - the wiper arms move into the service position.
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade
at right angles to the wiper arm .
– Take off the wiper blade in direction of arrow fig. 51 .
Attaching a wiper blade
– Push the new wiper blade over the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade into the
vertical position.
– Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms onto the window and switch on the ignition. By
pressing the window wiper lever into the sprung position fig. 51 or when
driving at a speed greater than 4 km/h, the windscreen wiper arms move back into
the rest position.
Wiper blades in proper condition are essential to obtain good visibility. Wiper blades
should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust, insect remains and preserving wax.
Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on
the windscreen by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems. It is therefore
important to degrease the lips of the wiper blades after every pass through an auto-
matic vehicle wash system.
WARNING
The ignition must not be switched on if the front windscreen wiper arms are
folded out. The wiper blades would move back into their rest position and while
doing so damage the paintwork of the bonnet.
If the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly, there is a risk of damage to
the windscreen.
A
5
Fig. 51 Wiper blade for the windscreen
wiper
A
4
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 63 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility64
You should clean the wiper blades regularly with a windscreen cleaner in
order to avoid any smears. Clean a wiper blade with a sponge or cloth if it is very
dirty, for example from insect residues.
Replace the wiper blades once or twice a year for safety reasons. These can
be bought from an authorised Škoda Service Partner.
Replacing the wiper blade on the rear window wiper
Taking off the wiper blade
– Fold windscreen wiper arm out from the windscreen and position the wiper blade
at right angles to the wiper arm fig. 52.
– Hold the window wiper arm at the top end with one hand.
– With the other hand unlock the locking button in the direction of arrow and
remove the wiper blade.
Attaching a wiper blade
– Position the wiper blade onto the wiper arm and lock the locking button .
– Check whether the wiper blade is correctly attached.
The same remarks apply here as for page 63.
Rear-view mirror
Manual dimming interior rear-view mirror
Basic setting
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror forward.
Dimming mirror
– Pull the lever on the bottom edge of the mirror back.
Automatic dimming interior mirror*
Switching on the automatic dimming
– Press the button - the warning light lights up fig. 53.
Switching off the automatic dimming
– Press again the button - the warning light goes out .
If the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on
the light striking the mirror from the rear. The mirror has no lever on the bottom edge
of the mirror. After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the
normal position.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 52 Wiper blade for rear window
A
A
A
A
Fig. 53 Automatic dimming interior
mirror
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 64 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility 65
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for the rear
window in the housing on the luggage compartment cover is not in use or the light
striking the interior rear-view mirror is not affected by other objects.
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair the
automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exterior
mirror dimming is switched off.
Exterior mirror
You can adjust the exterior mirrors electrically*.
The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running and up to an
outside temperature of +20 °C.
Heating of the external mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position fig. 54.
Adjusting left and right exterior mirrors simultaneously
– Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical
to the movement of the rotary knob.
Adjusting the right-hand exterior mirror
– Turn the rotary knob to position . The movement of the mirror surface is identical
to the movement of the rotary knob.
Switching off operating control
– Turn the rotary knob to position .
Folding in both exterior mirrors*
– Turn the rotary knob to position .
Folding exterior mirrors* using the key with radio remote control
– If all the windows are closed, press the unlock button on the radio remote
control page 43, fig. 31 for approx. 2 seconds.
Tilting surface of front passenger exterior mirror*
When the rotary knob is in position fig. 54 and the reverse gear is engaged, the
surface of the mirror tilts down slightly. This provides an aid in seeing the kerb of the
pavement when parking the car.
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the
position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Memory for exterior mirrors*
On vehicles fitted with a memory for the driver seat, the relevant setting of the exterior
mirror is also stored automatically when the seat position is stored page 68.
WARNING
Convex (curved outward) or spherical (differently curved) exterior mirrors
increase the vision field. They do, however, make objects appear smaller in the
mirror. These mirrors are only of limited use, therefore, for estimating distances
to the following vehicles.
Use whenever possible the interior rear mirror, for estimating the distances
to the following vehicles.
Fig. 54 Inner part of door: Rotary knob
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 65 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Lights and Visibility66
Note
If the exterior mirrors are folded in using the remote control* of the vehicle key,
these are folded back into the driving position after opening the door or switching on
the ignition.
If the exterior mirrors are folded in using the rotary knob page 65, fig. 54, they
can only be folded back into the driving position using the rotary knob.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the remote control* of the vehicle key
and if the rotary knob was in the fold-in position before switching on the ignition, the
mirrors remain in the fold-in position the next time the ignition is switched on. Folding
back into the driving position is performed by actuating the rotary knob in a different
position from the fold-in position.
Do not touch the surfaces of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on.
You can set the exterior mirrors by hand, if the power setting function fails at any
time by pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
Contact your specialist garage if a fault exists with the power setting of the exterior
mirrors.
Automatic dimming exterior mirror on the driver's side*
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dimmed together with the interior mirror. If
the automatic dimming is switched on, the mirror dims automatically depending on
the light striking the mirror from the rear.
After the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror always moves back into the normal (not
dimmed) position.
Note
Automatic mirror dimming operates only properly if the sun screen* for the rear
window is not in use or the light striking the rear of the interior rear-view mirror is not
affected by other objects.
Do not affix any stickers in front of the light sensor, so that you do not impair the
automatic dimming function or put it out of operation.
If you switch off the automatic dimming interior rear-view mirror, also the exterior
mirror dimming is switched off.
s43s.1.book Page 66 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 67
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seats and Stowage
Front seats
Basic information
The front seats have a wide range of different settings and can thus be matched to the
physical characteristics of the driver and front passenger. Correct adjustment of the
seats is particularly important for:
safely and quickly reaching the controls,
a relaxed, fatigue-free body position,
achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag
system.
WARNING
Never transport more occupants than the maximum seating in the vehicle.
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened page 159, “Transporting children safely” with a
suitable restraint system.
The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is being driven -
never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. This is particularly important for the front seat passenger.
You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply
the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer
fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position!
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at
least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. Not maintaining this
minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly
protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must always also
be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no
longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Adjusting the front seats
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
–Pull the lever fig. 55 up and push the seat into the desired position.
– Release the lever and push the seat further until the lock is heard to engage.
Adjusting height of seat*
– Lift the seat if required by pulling or pumping lever upwards.
– Lower the seat if required by pushing or pumping lever downwards.
Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
– Relieve any pressure on the seat backrest (do not lean on it) and turn the hand-
wheel fig. 55 to adjust the desired angle of the backrest.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 55 Controls at seat
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 67 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage68
Adjusting lumbar support*
– Turn the wheel until you have set the most comfortable curvature of the seat
upholstery in the area of your spine.
The driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed
to the floor with slightly bent legs.
The seat backrest on the driver's seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper
point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms.
WARNING
Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
Take care when adjusting the seat! Adjusting the seat without care can lead
to bruises or injuries.
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk
of injury!
Adjusting front seats electrically*
Adjusting seats
Fig. 56 Side view: Controls for adjusting the seat / seat setting switch
Adopt the correct seated position before setting page 67.
Adjusting a seat in a forward/back direction
– Press the switch fig. 56 forwards or backwards .
Set the height of the seat cushion
– Press the switch upwards or downwards.
Adjust the angle of the seat cushion
– Press the switch at the front or at the back .
Adjusting the seat backrest
– Press the switch in the direction of the desired setting.
Adjusting lumbar support
– Press the switch front fig. 56 in order to enlarge the curvature of the lumbar
support.
– Press the switch rear in order to reduce the curvature of the lumbar support.
– Press the switch top in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar support
higher.
– Press the switch bottom in order to adjust the curvature of the lumbar support
lower.
Switch is operated in order to move the seat up/down and forward/back, while
switch is operated in order to move the seat backrest forward or back.
WARNING
Only adjust the driver seat when the vehicle is stationary - risk of injury!
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
In view of the fact that the seats can also be adjusted when the ignition is
switched off (even when ignition key withdrawn), you should never leave chil-
dren unattended in the vehicle.
A
4
A
A
A
1
A
A
A
A
A
2
A
3
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 68 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 69
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk
of injury!
Note
If the movement of the seat is inadvertently interrupted during an adjustment, once
again press the switch in the appropriate direction and continue with the adjustment
of the seat to the end.
Storing setting
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
– Switch on the ignition.
– Adjust the seat page 68.
– Adjust both exterior mirrors page 65.
– Press button SET fig. 57.
– Press one of the memory buttons within 10 seconds after pressing the button
SET - an acknowledgement signal confirms that the seat setting is stored.
Storing exterior mirror setting for reversing*
– Switch on the ignition.
– Turn the exterior mirror control to position page 65.
– Engage the reverse gear.
– Move the right exterior mirror into the desired position page 65.
– Take the vehicle out of gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Memory buttons
Memory for the seat offers the possibility to store the individual driver seat and
external mirror position. An individual position can be allocated to each of the three
memory buttons fig. 57, that is three in total. After pressing the corresponding
memory button , the seat and the exterior mirror are automatically moved into the
positions which have been allocated to this button page 69.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of the
driver seat.
Note
When storing settings with the memory buttons, we recommend that you begin
with the front button and assign a memory button to each additional driver.
Each new setting stored with the same button erases the previous setting.
Each time you store the seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward you
also have to re-store the individual setting of the exterior mirror on the passenger side
for reversing.
Assigning remote control to the memory buttons
After storing the settings of the seat and exterior mirrors, you have 10 seconds in order
to assign the radio remote control to the appropriate memory button.
– Withdraw the ignition key.
– Press the unlock button page 43. The setting is stored with the memory button
which you have selected.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 57 Driver seat: Memory buttons
and SET button
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 69 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage70
If you wish to be able to retrieve the settings which are stored in the memory by also
using the radio remote control, you have to assign the radio remote control to a
memory button in each case.
If you wish, you can obtain an additional remote control key from an authorised Škoda
Service partner and then assign the remote control key to another memory button.
Note
If the radio remote control had previously been assigned to another memory
button, this setting is then erased by the new assignment.
If you assign the radio remote control to a memory button which has already been
assigned to a radio remote control, the old assignment is also replaced by a new
assignment in this case.
The assignment of the radio remote control to a memory button is retained,
however, after reassigning the seats and exterior mirrors.
Retrieving settings of the seat and mirrors
You can retrieve the stored settings either with the memory buttons or
with the remote control*.
Retrieving settings with memory buttons
– In order to retrieve the stored setting, you have two possibilities:
– One-touch automatic memory: briefly press the desired memory button
page 69, fig. 57. The seat and exterior mirror are moved automatically into the
stored positions (this applies only if the ignition is switched on and the speed is less
than 5 km/h).
– Memory keying: Press and hold the desired memory button pressed long
enough until the seat and the exterior mirror are moved into the stored positions.
Retrieving settings with remote control
– If the driver door is closed and the ignition is switched off, briefly press the unlock
button of the radio remote control page 43 and then open the driver door.
– The seat and exterior mirrors now move automatically into the stored positions.
Retrieving setting of exterior mirror for reversing*
– Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror setting into the position page 65
before engaging the reverse gear.
The mirror returns into its initial position, after the rotary knob is moved out of the
position and put into another position or if the speed is more than 15 km/h.
Emergency Off
You can interrupt the setting operation at any time, if you operate any button of the
driver seat.
Note
If the inclination angle of the seat backrest is more than 102° in relation to the seat
cushion, the backrest remains in this position, after reaching this angle, when retrieving
the setting by briefly pressing the memory button. Once the stored angle is reached, it
is necessary to press the memory button and hold it pressed until the seat is in the
stored position.
Head restraints
Fig. 58 Head restraint: Adjust - left / remove - right
Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as
the upper part of your head.
A
B
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 70 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 71
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Adjusting the height of a head restraint
– Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push the head restraint up
or down in direction of arrow fig. 58.
– Move the head restraint downwards if required by pressing the locking button with
one hand in direction of arrow and by pressing with the other hand the head
restraint downwards.
Removing and installing a head restraint
– Pull the head restraint up out of the seat backrest as far as the stop (on the rear
head restraints fold forward the seat backrest).
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow page 70, fig. 58 and pull the
head restraint out.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough until
you hear the locking button engage.
The position of the front and rear outer head restraints is adjustable in height. The
middle rear head restraint is adjustable in two positions.
The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant. Correctly
adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the
occupants page 142, “Correct seated position”.
WARNING
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.
Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of
injury!
If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the
lower position.
Middle rear head restraint
IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the rear
seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system page 165. For vehi-
cles, which are equipped with such fixing eyes, a deviating sequence for removing the
middle head restraint must be observed.
Removing and installing the rear middle head restraint
– Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop.
– Press the locking button in the direction of arrow , press simultaneously the
locking button into the opening using a flat screwdriver with a width of
maximum 5 mm and pull out the head restraint.
– To re-insert the head restraint, push it down into the seat backrest far enough until
you hear the locking button engage.
WARNING
The head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective
protection for the occupants in the event of an accident.
Do not drive under any circumstance with removed head restraints - risk of
injury!
If the rear seats are occupied, the rear head restraint must not be in the
lower position.
A
1
A
2
A
2
Fig. 59 Rear seats: middle head
restraint
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 71 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage72
Rear seats
Folding the rear seats forwards
Fig. 60 Fold the seat cushion forwards / unlock the seat backrest
To enlarge the luggage compartment, the rear seats can be folded forwards, if neces-
sary remove the seat cushions. The rear seats can be folded forward individually on
vehicles with divided rear seats*.
Folding seats forwards
– Before folding the rear seats forwards, you must adapt the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged when the rear seats are folded
forwards.
– Pull up the seat cushion in direction of arrow and fold forwards in direction of
arrow fig. 60.
– Press the unlocking knob and fold the seat backrest forwards.
If the front seats are too far back, we recommend that you have the rear head restraints
removed before the seat backrests are folded forward. Store the removed head
restraints in such a way that they cannot be damaged or soiled. Please refer to the
guidelines page 74.
Move seats into the initial position
Move seats into the initial position
– Install the head restraint in the slightly lifted seat backrest.
– Place the rear lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim panel fig. 61.
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob
clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.
– Make sure that the red pin is covered fig. 60.
– Move the seat cushion into its original position.
WARNING
The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.
The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no
objects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden
braking - risk of injury!
Pay attention that the seat backrests are correctly interlocked. It is only then
that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its function.
Before folding the seat backrest back into the secure position, place the rear
lateral seat belt behind the edge of the side trim panel. Take suitable measures
to prevent that the seat belt is jammed between the seat backrest and the side
trim panel and is thus damaged.
A
1
A
2
A
A
Fig. 61 Lock the seat backrest
A
C
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 72 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 73
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Removing the seat cushion
You can enlarge the luggage compartment on vehicles with divided rear seats* by
removing the rear seat.
Removing
– Fold the seat cushion forwards completely.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow fig. 62 and remove the seat
cushion from its holder.
Installing
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the arrow and place it in its holder.
– Fold the seat cushion back into its original position.
Caution
For vehicles with heated rear seats* it is necessary to disconnect the plug connection
for the power supply before removing the seat cushion. For reinstalling the seat
cushion it is necessary to re-connect the plug connection.
Rear seat armrest*
– You can fold down the armrest at the loop to enhance occupant comfort
fig. 63.
Seat heaters*
Fig. 64 Dash panel: Regulator for heating the front seats / rear seats
You can electrically heat the seat backrests and the surfaces of the front seats and the
two outer rear seats.
– You can switch on and regulate the seat heating of the driver or front passenger
seat by pressing the surface of the regulator at the point at which the symbol is
located fig. 64 - left.
– You can switch on and adjust the heaters of the left or right rear seats by pressing
the regulator fig. 64 - right.
Fig. 62 Removing seat cushions
Fig. 63 Rear seats: Armrest
s43s.1.book Page 73 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage74
– With one press, you can switch the heating to highest intensity which is indicated
by the lighting up of the three warning lights in the switch.
– With repeated pressing of the switch, the intensity of the heating is down-regulated
up to the switch-off. The intensity of the heating is indicated by the number of illu-
minated warning lights in the switch.
– If you switch the heating to the highest intensity - 3rd stage, it is automatically
switched over to the 2nd stage after 10 minutes (two warning lights light up in the
switch).
WARNING
If, as an occupant, you have a subdued pain and/or temperature sensitivity, e.g.
through medication, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we
recommend not to use the seat heating. This can lead to burns on the back, the
posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal. If the seat heating is used, we
recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long
distances, so that in specific cases as mentioned above the body can recuperate
from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate
your specific condition.
Caution
You should not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points in
order to avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heating if the seats are not occupied by persons or if objects
are fastened or stored on them, for example a child seat, a bag etc. A fault of the heating
elements in the seat heating can occur.
Do not clean the seats moist page 190.
Note
The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running. This has
a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity.
If the on-board voltage drops, the seat heating is switched off automatically, in
order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine control.
Pedals
Concerning a secure depressing of the pedal, you should use only footmats from the
Škoda genuine accessories.
Operation of the pedals must not be hindered!
WARNING
Greater pedal distances may be needed when there is a fault in the brake
system.
Do not place any footmats or other additional floor coverings in the area of
the pedals in order to ensure that all the pedals can be fully depressed and are
able to return unobstructed to their initial position - risk of accident!
There must be no objects on the floor which could roll under the pedals. You
would then no longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or acceler-
ator - risk of accident!
luggage compartment
Loading the luggage compartment
Please observe the following in the interest of having good handling characteristics of
your vehicle:
– Distribute the items of luggage as evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward as possible.
– Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or the fixing net* page 75.
In the event of an accident, there is such a high kinetic energy which is produced by
small and light objects that they can cause severe injuries. The magnitude of the kinetic
energy depends on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the
object. The speed at which the vehicle is travelling is in this case the more significant
factor.
Example: In the event of a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, an unsecured object
with a weight of 4.5 kg produces an energy, which corresponds to 20 times its own
s43s.1.book Page 74 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 75
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
weight. This means that it results in a weight of approx. 90 kg. You can imagine the inju-
ries that can occur, if this “bullet” is flying through the interior compartment and hits
an occupant.
WARNING
Stow the objects in the luggage compartment and attach them to the
lashing eyes.
Loose objects in the passenger compartment can be thrown forward during
a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or
other oncoming traffic. This risk is still increased, if the objects which are flying
around are hit by a deployed airbag. In this case, the objects which are thrown
back can injure the occupants - hazard.
Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle may be affected
when transporting heavy objects as a result of the displacement of the centre of
gravity. The speed and style of driving must be adjusted accordingly.
The items carried in the luggage compartment should be stowed in such a
way that no objects are able to slip forward if there are any sudden driving or
braking manoeuvres undertaken - risk of injury!
Never drive with the boot lid fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise exhaust
gases may get into the interior of the vehicle - risk of poisoning!
On no account exceed the permissible axle loads and the permissible gross
weight of the vehicle - risk of accident!
Never transport occupants in the luggage compartment!
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged
as a result of objects sliding in this area.
Note
Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 208.
Vehicles of category N1
On vehicles of the category N1, which are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing
set which complies with the standard EN 12195 (1 - 4) must be used for fastening the
load.
Lashing eyes
Fig. 65 Luggage compartment: Lashing eyes Octavia / Combi
Eyes are located on the sides of the luggage compartment for lashing the goods to be
loaded.
You can also attach a floor fixing net* to these eyes for holding small objects.
The floor fixing net* together with the installation instruction are stowed in a container
under the floor covering of the luggage compartment behind the spare wheel.
WARNING
The load to be transported must be fixed in place in such a way that it cannot
move during the journey and when braking.
If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with
unsuitable or damaged lashing straps, injuries can occur in the event of braking
manoeuvres or accidents. In order to prevent the items of luggage being thrown
forward, always use suitable lashing straps which are firmly attached to the
lashing eyes.
s43s.1.book Page 75 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage76
Note
On vehicles in the version Octavia, the top front lashing eyes are located behind the
seat backrest page 75, fig. 65 - left.
Fixing nets - Net programme Octavia*
Fig. 66 Fixing net: Horizontal pocket / vertical pocket
Fixing examples of the fixing net as a horizontal pocket fig. 66 - left and a vertical
pocket fig. 66 - right.
The fixing net is stowed in a storage compartment behind the spare wheel under the
floor covering of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with objects
of up to 1,5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of
injury and net damage!
Caution
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.
Fixing nets - Net programme Combi*
Fig. 67 Fixing net: Vertical pocket / division of the luggage compartment
Fixing examples of the fixing net as a horizontal pocket fig. 67 - left and as a division
of the luggage compartment with the aid of the net fig. 67 - right.
The fixing net is stowed in a storage compartment behind the spare wheel under the
floor covering of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
The whole strength of the net makes it possible to load the pocket with objects
of up to 1,5 kg in weight. Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of
injury and net damage!
Caution
Do not place any objects with sharp edges in the nets - risk of net damage.
s43s.1.book Page 76 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 77
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Folding double hooks* (Octavia)
Folding double hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc. are
provided on one or both sides of the luggage compartment depending on the equip-
ment installed in the vehicle fig. 68.
An item of luggage weighing up to 5 kg can be attached to each side of the double
hook.
Folding hooks (Combi)
Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., are provided on
both sides of the luggage compartment fig. 69.
An item of luggage weighing up to 10 kg can be attached to the hook.
Fixing floor covering of the luggage compartment
Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: Fixing of the floor covering Octavia / Combi
There is a loop (Octavia) or there are hooks (Combi) located on the floor covering of
the luggage compartment. You can fix the raised floor cover with a hook to the luggage
compartment cover (Octavia) fig. 70 - left, as if one needs to reach the spare wheel
or to the frame of the boot lid (Combi) fig. 70 - right.
Luggage net* (Octavia)
The luggage net is designed for the tranportation of lighter objects.
WARNING
In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 1.5 kg).
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
Fig. 68 Luggage compartment: Folding
double hooks
Fig. 69 Luggage compartment: folding
hooks
Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: Luggage
net
s43s.1.book Page 77 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage78
No objects with sharp edges should be stowed in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.
Luggage compartment cover* (Octavia)
You can use the luggage compartment cover behind the head
restraints for storing light and soft items.
The luggage compartment cover can be removed as required if one must transport
bulky goods.
– Unhook the support straps fig. 72.
– Place the cover in the horizontal position.
– Pull the cover out of the holder horizontally to the rear.
– Install again by pushing the luggage compartment cover forwards into the holder
and hanging the support straps on the boot lid.
You can stow the removed luggage compartment cover behind the rear seat backrest.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover, the vehicle
occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle
collides with something.
Caution
Please ensure that the heating elements of the rear window heater are not damaged
as a result of objects placed in this area.
Note
Opening the tailgate also lifts up the luggage compartment cover.
Foldable luggage compartment cover (Combi)
Fig. 73 Luggage compartment: foldable luggage compartment cover / removing foldable
luggage compartment cover
Pulling out
– Pull the foldable luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow as far as the
stop into the secured position fig. 73.
Folding
– Press the cover in the handle area in direction of arrow , the cover rolls up auto-
matically.
Removing
– Have the foldable luggage compartment cover removed to transport bulky goods
by pressing on the side of the cross rod in direction of arrow and taking it out
by moving it in direction of arrow .
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 72 Removing the luggage compart-
ment cover
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 78 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 79
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the luggage compartment cover.
Divide the luggage compartment with variable loading floor*
The luggage compartment can be divided with the variable loading floor.
– Lift up the part with the holder and secure it by sliding it into the grooves
fig. 74.
Removing variable loading floor in the luggage compartment*
Fig. 75 Luggage compartment: Remove variable loading floor / remove carrier rails
The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier. You can
remove the variable loading floor if necessary.
– Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the safety eyes to the left by approx.
90° fig. 75.
– Fold together the loading floor and take it out by moving in direction of arrow.
– Unlock the carrier rails by turning the arbor-mounted fixing eyes to the right
by approx. 90°.
WARNING
Pay attention when installing the variable loading floor that the carrier rails and
the variable loading floor are correctly attached. If this is not the case, there is a
risk of injury for the occupants.
Note
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg.
Luggage net partition* (Combi)
Use the luggage net partition behind the rear seats
Fig. 76 Folding down the storage compartment cover / pulling out the luggage net partition
Pulling out
– Fold down the storage compartment cover behind the rear seats fig. 76 - left.
– Pull the luggage net partition at the bracket out of the housing in direction
of the holders .
Fig. 74 Luggage compartment: Dividing
the luggage compartment with variable
loading floor
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 79 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage80
– Insert the cross rod into one of the mounts and push the cross rod forwards.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount .
– Fold the storage compartment cover downwards.
Folding
– Fold down the storage compartment cover behind the rear seats page 79,
fig. 76.
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and take
the cross rod out of the mounts .
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the net partition can roll up slowly and
without damage into housing .
– Fold the storage compartment cover downwards.
If you wish to use the entire luggage compartment, you can remove the luggage
compartment cover page 78, fig. 73.
WARNING
First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts in
the front position!
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its
function.
Use the luggage net partition behind the front seats
Pulling out
– Fold the rear seats forwards page 72.
– Pull the luggage net partition at the bracket out of the housing fig. 77.
– Insert the cross rod into the mount first on the one side and push the cross rod
forwards.
– In the same way, fix the cross rod to the other side of the vehicle, mount .
Folding
– Pull the cross rod back slightly, first on the one side then on the other side and take
the cross rod out of the mounts fig. 77.
– Hold the cross rod in such a way that the luggage net partition can roll up slowly
and without damage into the housing .
– Fold the rear seats back into their original position.
WARNING
The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding
back the seat cushions and the seat backrests - they must be ready to use.
The seat backrests must be securely interlocked in position so that no
objects in the luggage compartment can slide forwards if there is sudden
braking - risk of injury!
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
B
A
C
Fig. 77 Pull out the luggage net parti-
tion
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
C
A
C
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 80 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 81
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Pay attention that the rear seat backrest is correctly interlocked. It is only
then that the three-point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its func-
tion.
First check for yourself that the cross road is inserted into the mounts in
the front position!
Removing and installing the luggage net partition housing
Removing
– Fold the rear seats forwards page 72.
– Open the right rear door.
– Push the luggage net partition housing fig. 78 in the direction of arrow
and take it out of the mount of the rear seats in the direction of arrow .
Installing
– Position the luggage net partition housing into the mounts in the rear seat back-
rests.
– Push the luggage net partition housing in the opposite direction of arrow as far
as the stop.
– Fold the rear seats back into their original position.
The roof rack*
Description
Pay attention to the following points if you wish to transport luggage or other items on
the roof of your vehicle:
A special roof luggage rack system was developed for the vehicle, that is why you
should only use a roof luggage rack which has been released for use by Škoda Auto.
The base carrier is the basis for a complete roof luggage rack system. Separate
additional holders are required for safety reasons for transporting luggage, bikes, surf-
boards, skis and boats.
The basic version of the roof luggage rack system and further components are
obtainable as accessories from the authorised Škoda Service Partners.
Caution
If you use other roof rack systems or if the roof bars are not properly fitted, then any
damage which may result to your car is not covered by the warranty agreements. It is
therefore essential to pay attention to the fitting instructions supplied with the roof
luggage rack system.
On models fitted with a power sliding/tilting roof, ensure that the opened
sliding/tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof.
Ensure that the opened boot lid does not collide with the roof load.
For the sake of the environment
The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption. One should
therefore take off the roof bar system after use.
Note
A roof rail is obtainable from a specialist garage if hasn't been fitted onto an estate car
at the works, which carries out the professional fitting.
WARNING (continued)
A
C
Fig. 78 Rear seats: Luggage net parti-
tion housing
A
A
A
1
A
2
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 81 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage82
Lashing points (Octavia)
Perform the assembly and the disassembly according to the attached instructions.
Note
If you have any questions, please contact a specialist garage.
The figure is not valid for an estate car.
Roof load
Distribute weight evenly over the roof luggage rack system. The maximum permissible
roof load (including roof rack system) of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total
weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded.
You cannot make full use of the permissible roof load if you use a roof luggage rack
system with a lower load carrying capacity. The load transported on the roof luggage
rack system must not exceed the weight limit which is stated in the fitting instructions.
WARNING
The items which you transport on the roof bar system must be reliably
attached - risk of accident!
You must on no account exceed the permissible roof load, the permissible
axle loads and the permissible gross weight of your vehicle - risk of accident!
Please note that the handling properties of your vehicle change when you
transport heavy or bulky items on the roof bar system as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity and the increased wind attack area - risk
of accident! You must absolutely adapt your style of driving and the speed of
the vehicle to the specific circumstances.
Cup holder
Cup holder in front centre console
You can place two cups or beverage cans into the recesses fig. 80.
WARNING
Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill - risk of scalding!
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. glass,
porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Caution
Do not open the beverages in the cup holder while driving. They may spill when
braking and while doing so damage the vehicle.
Fig. 79 Attachment points for base roof
carrier
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 80 Front centre console: Cup holder
s43s.1.book Page 82 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 83
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Cup holder in rear centre console*
– Press on the panel in the area fig. 81 - the cup holder comes out.
– Pull the cup holder out as far as the stop.
– Adjust the cup holder by moving the locking plate .
WARNING
Do not place any hot beverages into the cup holder while the car is moving.
The hot beverages may spill - risk of scalding!
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g. glass,
porcelain). You might be injured by them in the event of an accident.
Note holder
The note holder is designed e.g. for attaching a car park ticket in parking areas.
The attached note has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict
the driver's vision.
Ashtray*
Front ashtray
Fig. 83 Centre console: Front ashtray / remove front ashtray insert
Opening ashtray
– Press on the bottom part of the cover of the ashtray - refer to fig. 83.
Removing ashtray insert
– Press on the ashtray insert in the area (the insert comes out) and you can take
it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Fig. 81 Centre console at rear: Cup
holder
A
A
A
B
Fig. 82 Windscreen: Note holder
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 83 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage84
Rear ashtray - low centre console
Opening ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray cover at the lower edge and fold it open in the direction of
arrow fig. 84.
Removing ashtray
– Grasp the ashtray at the handle and pull it out in an upward direction.
Replacing ashtray
– Insert the ashtray into the console and press it in.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Rear ashtray - high centre console*
Opening ashtray
– Press on the top part of the cover of the ashtray in area fig. 85.
Removing ashtray insert
– Press the cover of the ashtray down slightly as far as the stop.
– Grasp the ashtray insert at the cover and pull it out.
Insert ashtray insert
– Insert the ashtray insert into the mount and press it in.
There is a beverage holder attached to the inner side of the ashtray cover.
WARNING
Never lay flammable objects in the ashtray basin - risk of fire!
Fig. 84 Low centre console: Rear ashtray
A
A
A
B
Fig. 85 High centre console: Rear
ashtray
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 84 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 85
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Cigarette lighter*, power sockets
Cigarette lighter
You can also use the socket on the cigarette lighter for other electrical
appliances.
Using the cigarette lighter
– Press in the button of the cigarette lighter fig. 86.
– Wait until the button jumps forward.
– Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use it.
– Insert the cigarette lighter again into the socket.
Using the socket
– Remove the cigarette lighter or the cover of the power socket.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
The 12 volt power socket can also be used to supply power to additional electrical
accessories with a power uptake up to 120 watts.
WARNING
Take care when using the cigarette lighter! Not paying proper attention or
incorrect use the cigarette lighter in an uncontrolled manner may result in
burns.
The cigarette lighter and the power socket also operates when the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key withdrawn. You should therefore never leave
children unattended in the vehicle.
Caution
Always use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket.
Note
Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain
the battery of the vehicle - risk of battery draining!
Further information page 214, “Accessories, changes and replacement of
parts”.
Power socket in the luggage compartment (Combi)
– Open the cover of the power socket fig. 87.
– Connect the plug of the electrical appliance to the socket.
You can only use the power socket for the connection of approved electrical accesso-
ries with a power uptake up to 120 watts. The vehicle battery will be discharged in the
process if the engine is stationary.
The same remarks apply here as for page 85, “Cigarette lighter*, power sockets”.
Fig. 86 Centre console: Cigarette lighter
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 87 Luggage compartment: Power
socket
s43s.1.book Page 85 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage86
Further information page 214, “Accessories, changes and replacement of parts”.
Storage compartments
Overview
You will find the following storage facilities in your vehicle:
WARNING
Please do not place anything on top of the dash panel. Such objects might
slide or fall down when driving (when accelerating or cornering) and may
distract you from concentrating on the traffic situation - risk of accident!
Ensure that when driving no objects from the centre console of from other
storage possibilities may get into the footwell of the driver. You would then no
longer be able to apply the brakes, operate the clutch or accelerator - risk of
accident!
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Opening and closing the storage compartment on the front passenger
side
– Press the handle of the lid fig. 88 - the lid folds down.
– Raise the lid and press it until the catch is heard to engage.
There is a holder for a pen and note book on the inside of the lid.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Do not place any beverages into the cup holder while driving. Spilled bever-
ages can damage the electrical system and the upholstery. Hot beverages may
result in burns.
Storage compartment on the front passenger side page 86
Storage compartment on the driver's side page 87
Storage compartment on the dash panel* page 87
Storage compartment in front centre console* page 88
Storage compartment for spectacles* page 88
Storage compartment in the front doors page 89
Storage compartment below front passenger seat* page 89
Front seat armrest with storage compartment* page 89
Rear armrest with storage compartment* page 90
Storage compartment in rear centre console* page 90
Seat backrest with opening for skis* page 91
Through-loading bag* page 91
Side compartment* page 92
Storage compartment behind the rear seats* (Combi) page 92
Clothes hooks* page 93
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 88 Dash panel: Storage compart-
ment on the front passenger side
s43s.1.book Page 86 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 87
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Cooling of storage compartment on front passenger
side*
The storage compartment is for vehicles fitted with an air-conditioning
system with a closable air supply.
– Open or close the air supply using the control dial fig. 89.
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled
air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or interior air
to flow into the storage compartment.
We recommend that you close the air supply if it is operating in the heating mode or if
you are not using the cooling system for the storage compartment.
Storage compartment on the driver's side
– The storage compartment is opened by lifting the handle and folding open in the
direction of arrow fig. 90.
WARNING
The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety
reasons.
Storage compartment on the dash panel*
– Press in the middle of the storage compartment fig. 91 - the lid folds open
Certain model versions are equipped without lid for the storage compartment.
Fig. 89 Storage compartment: Using
cooling system
Fig. 90 Dash panel: Storage compart-
ment on the driver's side
Fig. 91 Dash panel: Storage compart-
ment
s43s.1.book Page 87 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage88
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also
not be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
The pull-out storage compartment must always be kept closed when
driving for safety reasons.
Do not put any highly inflammable objects or objects which are sensitive to
heat (e.g. lighters, sprays, spectacles, carbonated drinks) in the storage
compartment.
Storage compartment in front centre console*
– Press on the bottom part of the storage compartment in the area fig. 92 - the
lid opens.
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not
be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
Storage net on the front centre console*
The storage net in the front center console fig. 93 is designed for the transport of
smaller objects.
WARNING
In the storage net you must only stow objects (up to a total weight of 0.5 kg).
Heavy objects are not secured sufficiently - risk of injury!
No objects with sharp edges should be stowed in the luggage net, because
they can damage the luggage net.
Storage compartment for spectacles*
– Press on the lid of the stowage compartment, the stowage compartment opens
downwards fig. 94.
Fig. 92 Front centre console: Storage
compartment
A
A
Fig. 93 Front centre console: Storage
net
Fig. 94 Detail of the headliner: Storage
compartment for spectacles
s43s.1.book Page 88 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 89
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting objects
and otherwise must be kept closed.
Storage compartment in the front doors
A bottle holder is located in the area of the storage compartment for the front
doors.
WARNING
Use the area fig. 95 of the storage compartment only for storing objects
which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not
impaired.
Storage compartment below front passenger seat*
The storage compartment is foreseen for storing small objects of up to 1.5 kg. in
weight.
– Tilt the lock to open the flap and pull out the flap fig. 96.
– Tilt the lock to close the flap and press flap close.
Front seat armrest with storage compartment*
Fig. 97 Armrest: Storage compartment / cooling of storage compartment
The armrest is adjustable for height and length.
Opening storage compartment
– Open the lid of the armrest in the direction of arrow fig. 97 - left.
Fig. 95 Storage compartment in the
front doors
A
B
A
A
Fig. 96 Front passenger seat: Storage
compartment
s43s.1.book Page 89 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage90
Closing storage compartment
– Open the lid up to the stop, then you can fold it downwards.
Setting height
– First of all fold the lid to the bottom and lift it in the direction of arrow into one of
the 4 fixed positions.
Adjusting in forward/back direction
– Push the lid into the desired position.
Opening air inlet
– Pull the lock in upward direction.
Closing air inlet
– Push the lock as far as the stop downwards.
On vehicles fitted with air conditioning, the storage compartment is equipped with a
lockable inlet for thermally treated (warmed-up) air.
At open air supply, air flows into the storage with a temperature which is as high as the
one out of the air outlet nozzles, depending on temperature setting.
The air inlet in the storage compartment is connected to position through adjust-
ment of the control dial for air distribution. This position causes the maximum amount
of air to flow into the storage compartment (depending on the rotary regulator posi-
tion for the fan).
You can use the storage compartment, for example, to temper drinks cans, etc.
If you do not use the air inlet in the storage compartment, the end cover should
always be kept closed.
Note
Push the lid of the armrest up to stop to the rear before operating the handbrake.
Rear seat armrest with storage compartment*
A storage compartment* is located in the armrest. You open the compartment by
pressing the button on the front side and raising the cover fig. 98.
Storage compartment in rear centre console*
The storage compartment is equipped with a removeable insert.
– Open the storage compartment by pulling on the upper edge of the storage
compartment in the direction of arrow fig. 99.
WARNING
The storage compartment is not a substitute for the ashtray and must also not
be used for such purposes - risk of fire!
A
A
A
A
Fig. 98 Armrest of rear seats:
Fig. 99 Centre console at rear: Storage
compartment
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 90 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 91
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seat backrest with opening for skis*
Fig. 100 Rear seats: Handle of lid / luggage compartment: Unlock button
After folding open the armrest and the lid, an opening in the seat backrest becomes
visible through which you can push long objects e.g. skis etc. You can fold open the
armrest and the lid from the passenger or luggage compartment.
Opening from passenger compartment
– Fold down the armrest of the rear seat at the loop page 73.
– Pull the handle up to the stop in upward direction and fold open the lid downwards
fig. 100 - left.
Opening from luggage compartment
– Push the unlock button downwards fig. 100 - right and fold the lid (with armrest)
to the front.
Closing
– Fold the lid and the armrest up to the stop in upward direction - the lid must click
into place audibly.
Ensure that the armrest is always locked into place after closing. You can recognize this
on the fact that the red field above the unlocking button of the luggage compart-
ment is not visible.
Removeable through-loading bag*
The removeable through-loading bag is solely used for transporting
skis.
Loading
– Open the boot lid.
– Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat backrest downwards page 91,
“Seat backrest with opening for skis*”.
– Place the empty through-loading bag in such a way that the end of the bag with the
zip lies in the boot.
– Push the skis into the through-loading bag from the luggage compartment .
Securing
– Tighten the strap on the free end around the skis in front of the bindings
fig. 101.
– Fold the seat backrest a little forward.
– Guide the securing strap through the opening in the seat backrest around the
upper part of the seat backrest.
– Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the locking button
clicks into place - check by pulling on the seat backrest.
– Insert the securing strap into the lock until it is heard to lock in place.
A
A
Fig. 101 Securing the removeable
through-loading bag
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 91 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage92
On vehicles fitted with a luggage net partition, guide the securing strap around the
housing when the net partition is rolled up. After fixing the luggage net partition in
place, it is not longer possible to unroll the luggage net partition.
WARNING
After placing skis into the through-loading bag, you must secure the bag
with the securing strap .
The strap must hold the skis tight.
Make sure that the strap holds the skis in front of the binding (see also
imprint on the removeable through-loading bag).
Note
The through-loading bag is foreseen for four pairs of skis. The total weight of the
skis which are transported must not exceed 17 kg.
You must put the skis and the sticks in the through-loading bag with the tips facing
the rear.
If there are several pairs of skis in the through-loading bag, ensure that the bindings
are positioned at the same height.
Carefully fold the empty (dry) through-loading bag together, place it in the luggage
compartment and secure it to prevent it slipping. The through-loading bag must never
be folded together or stowed when moist.
Side compartment*
– You can open the compartment by turning the locks in the direction of arrow.
The CD changer* is housed in this compartment.
Storage compartment behind the rear seats* (Combi)
Removing
– First remove the foldable luggage compartment cover page 78.
– Grasp the housing with both hands and remove it by pulling in direction of arrow
fig. 103.
Installing
– Push the housing up to the stop into the catch.
– Re-insert the foldable luggage compartment cover.
WARNING
Only place small and light objects up to a total weight of 3 kg into the stowage
compartment. In the event of a vehicle collision heavy objects could be thrown
out of the compartment - risk of injuries! For this reason, the front part of the
luggage compartment cover must always cover over the stowage
compartment.
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
A
Fig. 102 Luggage compartment: Side
compartment
Fig. 103 Removing the stowage
compartment
s43s.1.book Page 92 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seats and Stowage 93
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Clothes hooks*
The clothes hooks are located on the middle pillar and on the handle of the headliner
above each of the rear doors.
WARNING
Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to
the rear.
Use the hooks for hanging only light items of clothing and ensure that there
are no heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
The maximum permissable load of the hooks is 2 kg.
Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this
will interfere with the protection offered by the head airbag*.
s43s.1.book Page 93 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system94
Heating and air conditioning system
Air outlet vents
The information provided is valid for all vehicles.
Fig. 104 Air vents at the front
Fig. 105 Air vents at the rear
Open air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical thumbwheel (not when in the end position).
Close air outlet vents
– Turn the vertical wheel into the end position.
Redirecting air flow
– Swivel upward or downward the grille of the vents in order to change the direction
of the air flow using the vertically arranged thumbwheel.
– Turn the horizontal thumbwheel on the vent to the right or left in order to change
the air flow to the appropriate side.
The air outlet vents 3, 4 fig. 104 and 6 fig. 105 can be closed and opened individ-
ually.
The air outlet vents 6 are only fitted on vehicles with higher centre console.
Warmed, unwarmed or cooled air will flow out of the air outlet vents according to the
setting of the regulator of the heating or the air conditioning system* and the atmos-
pheric conditions.
Note
The air outlet vents 2 ensure in the ventilation and cooling mode for a comfortable
(no-draught) ventilation of the interior of the vehicle, also if the air outlet vents 4 are
closed.
s43s.1.book Page 94 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 95
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Heating
Using the system
The heating system delivers air into the interior of the vehicle and
warms it as required.
Fig. 106 Heating: Control elements
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial fig. 106 to the right in order to increase the temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the temperature.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch the
blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.
– If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button - recirculated air mode
.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the air flow using the air distribution control
page 94.
Rear window heater
– Press button . Further information page 59, “Rear window heater”.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)*
– Press the button in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation). Further information page 104, “Auxiliary heating (auxil-
iary heating and ventilation)*”.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order to
ensure that the heating and ventilation systems operate properly.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output
only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
Note
The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side windows.
No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the heating
comfort.
The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage
compartment.
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
1
A
C
A
2
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 95 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system96
Set heating
Recommended settings of heating controls for:
Setup
Setting of the control dial
Button
Air outlet vents 3 Air outlet vents 4
Defrosting the windscreen and
side windows
To the right up to
the stop
3
Do not switch on
Open and align with the side
window
Closing
Free windscreen and side win-
dows from mist
Desired tempera-
ture
2 or 3
Do not switch on
Open and align with the side
window
Closing
The fastest heating
To the right up to
the stop
3
briefly switched on Opening Opening
Comfortable heating
Desired tempera-
ture
2 or 3
Do not switch on Opening Closing
Fresh air mode - ventilation
To the left up to the
stop
Desired position
Do not switch on Opening Opening
A
1
A
A
A
B
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 96 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 97
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the
vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button - the warning light lights up in the button page 95, fig. 106.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button - the warning light in the button goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control
is in position page 95, fig. 106. You can also switch recirculated air mode on
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
Climatic* (semi-automatic air conditioning system)
Description
The Climatic is a combined cooling and heating system. It makes it
possible to optimally control the air temperature at any season of the
year.
Description of the Climatic
It is important for your safety and for your driving comfort that the Climatic is operating
properly.
The cooling only operates if button page 98, fig. 107 is pressed, and the
following conditions are met:
engine running,
outside temperature above approx. +2°C and
blower switch switched on (positions 1 to 4).
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the
vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this partic-
ularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system prevents the
windows misting up during the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output
only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cooling
effect .
Air at a temperature of about 5°C may flow out of the vents under certain circum-
stances when the cooling system is operating. Lengthy and uneven distribution of the
air flow out of the vents and large differences in temperature, for example when getting
out of the vehicle, can result in chills in sensitive persons.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order to
ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal and
not an indication of a leak!
WARNING
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the
windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist
and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
A
C
AC
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 97 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system98
Note
We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior
of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This
produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can
only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of
compressor).
Using the system
Fig. 107 Climatic: Control elements
Setting temperature
– Turn the control dial fig. 107 to the right in order to increase the temperature.
– Turn the control dial to the left in order to increase the temperature.
Controlling blower
– Turn the blower switch into one of the positions, 1 to 4, in order to switch the
blower on.
– Turn the blower switch into position 0 in order to switch the blower off.
– If you wish to shut off the fresh air supply, use the button - recirculated air
mode page 100.
Control for air distribution
– You can adjust the direction of the air flow using the air distribution control
page 94.
switching cooling on and off
– Press the button fig. 107. The warning light lights up in the button.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is switched off. The
warning light in the button goes out.
Rear window heater
– Press button . Further information page 59, “Rear window heater”.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
– Press the button in order to directly switch on/off the auxiliary heating
(auxiliary heating and ventilation. Further information page 104, “Auxiliary
heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)*”.
The set temperature will be automatically maintained other than when the
control dial is on the extreme right or extreme left position:
Extreme right position - full heating,
Extreme left position - full cooling,
The blower should aways be on to prevent the windows from misting up.
Note
The whole heat output will be needed to unfrost the windscreen and side windows.
No warm air will be fed to the footwell. This can lead to restriction of the heating
comfort.
The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage compart-
ment.
If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period, odours may
be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch the cooling system on at
least once a month for approximately 5 minutes at the highest blower stage - also
during the cold season of the year - in order to avoid such odours. Also open a window
for a short time.
A
A
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
4
A
C
AC
A
1
AC
A
2
A
3
s43s.1.book Page 98 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 99
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode page 100.
Set Climatic
Recommended settings of Climatic controls for the respective operating modes:
Setup
Setting of the control dial Button
Air outlet vents 3
Defrosting the windscreen and
side windows
recommended 22°C 3
Switched off Do not switch on
Open and align with the side
window
Free windscreen and side win-
dows from mist
Desired tempera-
ture
2
switched on Do not switch on
Open and align with the side
window
The fastest heating recommended 22°C 2
Switched off briefly switched on Opening
Comfortable heating
Desired tempera-
ture
2 or 3
Switched off Do not switch on Opening
the fastest cooling recommended 22°C
briefly4, then 2or
3
switched on briefly switched on Opening
optimal cooling
Desired tempera-
ture
1, 2 or 3
switched on Do not switch on open and align to the roof
Fresh air mode - ventilation
To the left up to the
stop
Desired position
Switched off Do not switch on Opening
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
1
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 99 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system100
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the
vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button page 98, fig. 107 the warning light lights up in the
button.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press again the button - the warning light in the button goes out.
The recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution control
is in position page 98, fig. 107. You can also switch recirculated air mode on
again from this setting by repeatedly pressing button .
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
Using the air conditioning system economically
The compressor on the air conditioning system uses power from the engine when in
cooling mode which will effect the fuel consumption.
It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior
has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the
heated air to escape.
The cooling system should not be switched on while travelling when the window is
open.
The desired interior temperature can also be achieved without switching in the cooling
system just by switching to fresh air mode.
For the sake of the environment
When you economize on fuel, you also reduce pollutant emissions.
Operational malfunctions
If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than +5 °C,
there is a problem in the system. The reasons for this may be:
The fuse on the air conditioning system has blown. Check the fuse, replace it if
necessary page 226.
The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the
coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 16.
If you are not able to rectify the operational problem yourself, or if the cooling capacity
decreases, switch the cooling system off. Contact a specialist garage.
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)
Description
The Climatronic system is a combination of an automatic heating, fresh
air and cooling system which provides optimal comfort for the occu-
pants of the car.
The Climatronic maintains fully automatically a convenience temperature. This is
achieved by automatically varying the temperature of the outflowing air, the blower
stages and the air distribution. The system also takes into account sunlight which elim-
inates the need to alter the settings manually. The automatic mode page 102
ensures maximum wellbeing of the occupants at all times of the year.
Description of Climatronic system
The cooling operates only if the following conditions are met:
engine running,
A
4
A
C
s43s.1.book Page 100 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 101
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
outside temperature above approx. +2°C,
switched on.
If the cooling system is switched on, the temperature and air humidity drops in the
vehicle. The wellbeing of the occupants of the car is enhanced as a result of this partic-
ularly at high outside temperatures and a high air humidity. The system prevents the
windows misting up during the cold season of the year.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat output
only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode in order to enhance the cooling
effect page 103.
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order to
ensure that the heating and cooling systems operate properly.
The AC compressor is switched off at a high coolant temperature in order to provide
cooling at a high load of the engine.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air condi-
tioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is quite normal and
not an indication of a leak!
Recommended setting for all periods of the year:
Set the desired temperature, we recommend 22°C.
Press the button page 102, fig. 108.
Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
WARNING
For your own safety and that of other road users, ensure that all the
windows are free of ice, snow and misting. Please familiarize yourself about
how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems, how to demist
and defrost the windows, as well as with the cooling mode.
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time,
as “stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your
attention and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
Note
If the cooling system has not been switched on for a lengthy period, odours may
be produced at the evaporator because of deposits. Switch the cooling system on at
least once a month for approximately 5 minutes at the highest blower stage - also
during the cold season of the year - in order to avoid such odours. Also open a window
for a short time.
We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air
mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior
of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air conditioning system. This
produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning system is operating which can
only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense (replacement of
compressor).
The used air streams out through the air removal openings in the luggage compart-
ment.
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation*, the information
of the Climatronic is also shown on the display. This function can be switched off, see
operating instructions of the radio* or the navigation system*.
Using the cooling economically page 100.
Operational problems page 100.
AC
AUTO
s43s.1.book Page 101 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system102
Overview of the control elements
The controls enable a separate setting of the temperature for the left
and right side.
Fig. 108 Climatronic: Control elements
The buttons
Defrost windscreen intensively
Air flow to the windows
Air flow to head
Air flow in the footwell
Recirculated air mode with air quality sensor
Rear window heater
Buttons / control dial
Setting of the temperature for the left side, operation of the seat heating of the left
front seat*
Automatic mode
Switching off Climatronic
Setting the blower speed
Button for direct switching on/off of auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)*
page 104
Switching on/off of the temperature setting in dual mode
Switching cooling on and off
Setting of the temperature for the right side, operation of the seat heating of the
right front seat*
Note
Below the top row of buttons is located the interior temperature sensor. Do not glue
or cover over the sensor, otherwise it could have an unfavourable effect on the
Climatronic.
Automatic mode
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant tempera-
ture and to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
Switching automatic mode on
– Set a temperature between +18 °C and +26 °C.
– Move the air outlet vents 3 and 4 page 94, fig. 104, so that the air flow is directed
slightly upwards.
– Press the button . In the right or left top corner a warning light lights up,
depending on which unit was last selected.
If the warning light in the top right corner of the button lights up, the
Climatronic operates in “HIGH” mode. The “HIGH” mode is the standard setting of the
Climatronic.
When pressing again the button , the Climatronic changes into the “LOW” mode
and the warning light in the top left corner lights up. The Climatronic uses only in this
mode the lower blower speed. However taking into account the noise level, this is
more comfortable, yet be aware that the effectiveness of the air conditioning system is
reduced particularly if the vehicle is fully occupied.
By pressing again the button , you change into the “HIGH” mode.
The automatic mode is switched off by pressing the button for the air distribution or
increasing or decreasing the blower speed. The temperature is nevertheless
regulated.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
6
A
7
A
8
AUTO
A
9
OFF
A
10
A
11
A
12
DUAL
A
13
AC
A
14
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
AUTO
s43s.1.book Page 102 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 103
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
switching cooling on and off
switching cooling on and off
–Press the button page 102, fig. 108. The warning light lights up in the button.
– When you again press the switch , the cooling system is switched off. The
warning light in the button goes out. Only the function of the ventilation remains
active when no lower temperature than the outside temperature can be reached.
Setting temperature
You can separate the interior temperature for the left and right side separately.
– You can set the temperature for both sides after switching on the ignition with the
control dial .
– If you wish to set the temperature for the right side, turn the control dial . The
warning light in the button lights up, this indicates that differing tempera-
tures for the left and right side can be set.
If the warning light in the button lights up, the temperature for both sides
cannot be set with the control dial . You can reinitiate this function by pressing the
button . The warning light in the button which indicates the possibility to set
differing temperatures for the left and right side, goes out.
You can set the interior temperature between +18°C and +26°C. The interior temper-
ature is regulated automatically within this range. If you chose a temperature lower
than +18°C, a blue symbol lights up at the start of the numerical scale. If you chose a
temperature higher than +26°C, a red symbol lights up at the end of the numerical
scale. In both limit positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating
capacity, respectively. The temperature is not controlled in this case.
Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents (in particular at the leg
area) and large differences in temperature, for example when getting out of the vehicle,
can result in chills in sensitive persons.
Recirculated air mode
In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of the vehicle
and then fed back into the interior. When the automatic air distribution
control is switched on, an air quality sensor measures the concentration
of pollutants in the drawn-in air.
Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air outside the vehicle from getting into the
vehicle, for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam. If
a considerable increase in concentration of pollutants is recognized by the air quality
sensor, when the automatic air distribution control is switched on, the air distribution
control will temporarily be switched off. If the concentration of pollutants decreases to
the normal level, the air distribution control is automatically switched off so that fresh
air can be guided into the vehicle interior.
Switching recirculated air mode on
– Press the button repeatedly until the warning light on the left side of the
button lights up.
Switch on automatic air distribution control
– Press the button repeatedly until the warning light on the right side of the
button lights up.
Switch off automatic air distribution control temporarily
– If the air quality sensor does not switch on the air distribution control automatically
when there is a nauseating smell, you can switch it on yourself by pressing the
button *. The warning light lights up in the button on the left side.
Switching recirculated air mode off
– Press the button or press the button repetitively, until the warning
lights in the button go out.
WARNING
You should not leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period of time, as
“stale” air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, divert your atten-
AC
AC
A
7
A
14
DUAL
DUAL
A
7
DUAL
AUTO
s43s.1.book Page 103 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system104
tion and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases. Switch recirculated air mode off as soon as the windows begin
misting up.
Note
If the windscreen mists up, press the button page 102, fig. 108. After
the windscreen has been demisted, press the button .
The automatic air distribution control operates only if the outside temperature is
higher than approx. 2°C.
Controlling blower
There are a total of seven blower stages available.
The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the inte-
rior temperature. You can also, however, adapt the blower stages manually to suit your
particular needs.
– Press again the button on the left side (reduce blower speed) or on the right
side (increase blower speed).
If you switch off the blower, the Climatronic is switched off.
The set blower speed is displayed above the button when the respective number
of warning lights come on.
WARNING
“Stale air” may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce atten-
tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up. The risk of having an accident
increases.
Do not switch the Climatronic system off for longer than necessary.
Switch the Climatronic system on as soon as the windows mist up.
Defrosting windscreen
Defrosting windscreen - switching on
– Press the button page 102, fig. 108.
Defrosting windscreen - switching off
– Once again press the button or the button .
The temperature control is controlled automatically. More air flows out of the air outlet
vents 1.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)*
Description and important information
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) heats or
supplies the interior of the vehicle with fresh air independent of the
engine.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating)
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) functions in connection with the Climatic or
Climatronic.
It can be used when stationary, when engine is switched off for preheating of the
vehicle as well as while driving (only during the heating phase of the engine).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) warms up the coolant during the combustion
of fuel from the vehicle tank. The coolant warms up the air, which (if the blower speed
is not set to zero) flows into the occupant compartment.
Auxiliary ventilation
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior by switching
off the engine, whereby the interior temperature is effectively decreased (e.g. with the
vehicle parked in the sun).
WARNING (continued)
A
1
AUTO
AUTO
s43s.1.book Page 104 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system 105
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms - risk of
poisoning!
The auxiliary heating must not be running during refueling - risk of fire.
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of the
vehicle. Therefore do not place the vehicle, if you wish to operate the auxiliary
heating, in such a way that the exhaust gases of the auxiliary heating can come
easily into contact with inflammable materials (e.g. dry grass) or easily inflam-
mable substances (e.g. fuel run out).
Note
If the auxiliary heating runs, the fuel consumption comes from the vehicle tank.
Therefore the auxiliary heating should not be operated, if there is very little fuel in the
tank.
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating, which is located on the underside of the
vehicle, must not be clogged and the exhaust flow must not be blocked.
If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is running, the vehicle battery discharges. If
the auxiliary heating and ventilation has been operated several times over a longer
period, the vehicle must be driven a few kilometers in order to recharge the vehicle
battery.
The auxiliary heating only switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant
temperature of approx. 50 °C.
At low outside temperatures, this can result in a formation of water vapour in the
area of the engine compartment. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
After switching off the auxiliary heating, the coolant pump runs for a short period.
The auxiliary heating and ventilation does not switch on or comes on, if the vehicle
battery indicates a low loading state.
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) does not switch on, if the following was
shown in the information display or before switching off the ignition: Please refuel!
(Please refuel!).
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of ice, snow or leaves in order
to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
So that warm air can flow into the vehicle interior after switching on the auxiliary
heating, you must maintain the temperature normally selected by you (we recom-
mend 22°C). It is recommended to put the air flow in the position .
On vehicles with DPF (diesel particle filter) the warm coolant heats up the engine.
Direct switching on/off
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) can be switched on or off at any
time directly using the button on the operating part of the Climatic fig. 109 or
on the operating part of the Climatronic.
If the auxiliary heating and ventilation is not switched off earlier, it switches off auto-
matically after the expiration of the set operating period, in the menu Running time.
Using the system
So that the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) func-
tions according to your expectations, it is necessary to carry out the
basic setting before its programming.
Basic setting
– On the information display, select from the Main menu the menu point
Aux. heating.
– In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Weekday and set the current day.
– Return to a higher level by selecting the menu point Back, i. e. in the menu
Aux. Heating.
Fig. 109 Button for direct switching
on/off of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) on the oper-
ating part of the Climatic
s43s.1.book Page 105 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Heating and air conditioning system106
– In the menu Aux. Heating select the menu point Running time and set the
desired operating period in steps of 5 minutes. The running time can be 10 to 60
minutes.
– By selecting the menu point Back, you will reach in the menu Aux. Heating.
– In the menu Aux. heating select the menu point Mode.
– In the menu Mode select the desired mode Heating for or Ventilation for.
Programming
For the programming of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) in the
menu Aux. heating there are three pre-set times:
Pre-set time 1
Pre-set time 2
Pre-set time 3
In each pre-set time, the day and the time (hour and minute) can be set for switching
on the auxiliary heating and/or ventilation.
An empty position can be found between Sunday and Monday when selecting the day.
If this empty position is selected, the activation is performed without taking into
account the day.
If you leave the pre-set menu by selecting the menu Back or do not make changes on
the display for longer than 10 seconds, the set values are stored, but the pre-set time
is not active.
Both other pre-set times can be programmed and stored in the same way.
If you select the menu Activate after setting the desired values, appears on the display
Pre-set time (weekday, hours, minute) activated! and the set pre-set time is active.
Only one programmed pre-set time can be active.
The last programmed pre-set time remains active.
After the auxiliary heating activates at the set time, it is necessary to pre-set a time
again.
Changing the active pre-set time is carried out after selecting the menu point Activate
in the menu Aux. heating by selecting a pre-set time.
The prerequisite for the correct switching on of the auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating
and ventilation) according to the programmed pre-set time is the correct setting of the
current time and the weekday page 105.
If the system is running, a warning light in the button for direct switching on/off of the
auxiliary heating lights up.
The running system deactivates after expiration of the operating period or is deacti-
vated earlier by pressing the button for direct switching on/off of the auxiliary heating
page 105.
A random pre-set time can be deactivated by selecting the menu point Deactivate in
the menu Activate.
After selecting the menu point Factory setting in the menu Aux. heating, it is possible
to return to the factory setting.
s43s.1.book Page 106 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving 107
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Starting-off and Driving
Setting steering wheel position
Fig. 110 Adjustable steering wheel: Lever below steering column
You can set the height and the forward/back position of the steering wheel to the
desired position.
– Adjust the driver seat page 11.
– Pull the lever below the steering wheel down fig. 110 - left .
– Set the steering wheel to the desired position (concerning height and forward/back
position).
– Push the lever upwards as far as the stop.
WARNING
You must not adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving!
The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel
fig. 110 - right. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
For safety reasons the lever must always be firmly pushed up to avoid the
steering wheel altering its position unintentionally when driving - risk of acci-
dent!
If you adjust the steering wheel further towards the head, you will reduce
the protection offered by the driver airbag in the event of an accident. Check
that the steering wheel is aligned to the chest.
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer
edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel
firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the
steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to the
arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.
Ignition lock
Petrol engines
- ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be locked.
- ignition switched on
- start engine
Diesel engines
- interruption of fuel supply, ignition switched off, engine off, the steering can be
locked.
- heating glow plugs on, ignition switched on
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 111 Ignition lock positions
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 107 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving108
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
- start engine
Applies to all models:
Position
To lock the steering, with the ignition key withdrawn, turn the steering wheel until the
steering locking pin is heard to engage. You should always lock the steering as a general
rule if you leave your vehicle. This acts as a deterrent against possible theft of your
vehicle .
Position
Move the steering wheel back and forward a little if the ignition key cannot, or cannot
easily be turned into this position, in order to release the steering lock.
Position
The engine is started in this position. At the same time switched on low beam or main
beam or other electrical components with major power consumption are briefly
switched off. The ignition key moves back into position when one releases the key.
The ignition key must be turned back into position each time before starting the
engine again. The starter repeat lock in the ignition lock prevents the starter being
engaged when the engine is running and thus getting damaged.
Ignition key withdrawal lock (automatic gearbox)
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector
lever is in position P.
WARNING
When driving, the ignition key must always be in the position (ignition
switched on) without the engine running. This position is indicated by the
warning lights coming on. If this is not the case, it could result in unexpected
locking of the steering wheel - risk of accident!
Only remove the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has
come to a standstill (by applying the handbrake or moving the selector lever
into the position P). The steering lock can engage immediately - risk of acci-
dent!
Always withdraw the ignition key if you are going to leave the vehicle, even
for a short time. This is particularly important if children are left in the vehicle.
The children might otherwise start the engine or switch on electrical equipment
(e.g. power windows) - risk of accident or injury!
Starting the engine
General
You can only start the engine only using an original ignition key.
Place the gearshift lever into neutral (or place the selector lever to the position P or
N in the case of an automatic gearbox) and put on the handbrake firmly before starting
the engine.
Before starting, it is necessary to depress the clutch pedal and to hold it pressed
until the engine starts. If you start the engine without depressing the clutch pedal, the
engine does not start and a message is shown in the display of the instrument cluster
to remind you of the necessity to depress the clutch pedal.
Let go of the key as soon as the engine starts otherwise there may be damage to
the starter.
The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after starting
the cold engine until oil pressure can be built up in the hydraulic valve clearance
compensation. This is quite normal and is not an operating problem.
If the engine does not start ...
You can use the battery of another vehicle as a jump-start aid page 221.
It is only possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox. The tow-starting
distance must not be more than 50 metres page 225.
WARNING
Never run the engine in non ventilated or enclosed areas. The exhaust gases
of the engine contain besides the odorless and colourless carbon monoxide a
A
3
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
2
A
1
A
2
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 108 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving 109
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
poisonous gas - hazard! Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and
death.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Caution
The starter may only be operated (ignition key position ), if the engine is not
running. If the starter is immediately operated after switching off the engine, the starter
or the engine can be damaged.
Avoid high engine revolutions, full throttle and high engine loads as long as the
engine has not yet reached its normal operating temperature - risk of damaging the
engine!
Vehicles which are fitted with an exhaust gas catalytic converter should not be tow-
started over a distance of more than 50 metres.
For the sake of the environment
Never warm up the engine when the vehicle is standing. Drive off right away. Through
this the engine reaches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emis-
sions are lower.
Petrol engines
These engines are fitted with a starter system which selects the correct fuel-air mixture
for every external air temperature.
Do not operate accelerator before and when starting engine.
Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right
awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
It is possible that the fuse on the electrical fuel pump is defect if the engine still
does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary page 226.
Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
It may be necessary, if the engine is very hot, to slightly depress the accelerator after
the engine has started.
Diesel engines
Glow plug system
Diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug system, the preglow period being
controlled automatically in line with the coolant temperature and outside tempera-
ture.
The preglow indicator light comes on after the ignition has been switched on.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
You should start the engine immediately after the glow plug warning light has
gone out.
The glow plug warning light will come on for about one second if the engine is at a
normal operating temperature or if the outside temperature is above +5°C. This means
that you can start the engine right away.
Interrupt the attempt at starting after 10 seconds if the engine does not start right
awayand wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
It is possible that the fuse on the diesel preglow system is defect if the engine still
does not start. Check the fuse and replace it if necessary page 226.
Contact the nearest specialist garage to obtain professional assistance.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has run dry
It may take longer than normal to start the engine after refuelling if the fuel tank has
run completely dry - up to one minute. This is because the fuel system must first of all
be filled while the attempting to start the engine.
Switching off the engine
– The engine can be switched off by turning the ignition key from position into
page 107, fig. 111.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary - risk of accident!
WARNING (continued)
A
3
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 109 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving110
The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater phys-
ical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if you do
not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Caution
you should not switch the engine off right away at the end of your journey after the
engine has been operated for a lengthy period at high loads but should be allowed it
to run at idling speed for about 2 minutes. This prevents any accumulation of heat
when the engine is switched off.
Note
The radiator fan may continue running for a further 10 minutes or so after the
engine and the ignition have been switched off. The coolant fan may, however, also
switch on again after some time if the coolant temperature rises because of an accu-
mulation of heat in the engine or if the engine is warm and the engine compartment is
additionally heated by strong sunlight.
This is why particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment page 197, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Shifting (manual gearbox)
Shift into reverse only when the vehicle is stationary. Depress the clutch pedal and hold
it fully depressed. Wait a moment before engaging reverse gear in order to avoid any
shift noises.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the ignition is
on.
WARNING
Never engage the reverse gear when driving - risk of accident!
Note
One should not lay the hand on the shift lever while driving the vehicle. The pres-
sure of the hand will be transferred to the gearshift forks in the gearbox. This can, over
a period of time, lead to early wear of the gearshift forks.
Depress the clutch pedal fully when changing gears, in order to avoid unnecessary
wear and damage.
Handbrake
Applying the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up fully.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 112 The shift pattern: 5-speed or 6-
speed manual gearbox
Fig. 113 Centre console: Handbrake
s43s.1.book Page 110 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving 111
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Releasing the handbrake
– Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time press in the locking
button fig. 113.
– Hold the button pressed and push the handbrake lever down fully .
The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied, provided the
ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds and the following text appears in the display* if you have inad-
vertently driven off with the handbrake applied:
Release parking brake!
The handbrake warning is activated if you drive at a speed of more than 6 km/h for
more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Please note that the handbrake must be fully released. A handbrake which
is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating which will
have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system - risk of accident! In
addition this can result in premature wear of the rear brake pads.
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The children might, for
example, release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear. The vehicle
might then move off - risk of accident!
Caution
After the car has come to a stop, always first of all apply the handbrake firmly before
then additionally engaging a gear (manual gearbox) or moving the selector lever into
position P (automatic gearbox).
Rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles behind the vehicle.
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the rear bumper and an
obstacle located behind the vehicle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The tones of
the parking aid can be adapted in the menu of the information display* page 25.
The sensors are integrated in the rear bumper.
Range of sensors
The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle (area
fig. 114). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clear-
ance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area ) - danger area.
You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds! If the vehicle is
equipped with a factory-fitted towing device*, the border of the danger area starts -
continuous tone - 5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be extended
through an installed detachable towing device.
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation system*, the distance
to the obstruction is shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a factory-fitted
towing device, the sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The driver is informed
about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in the radio* or the navigation*
display. The factory-fitted radio* or navigation system* can be set so that the play func-
tion volume decreases when activating the parking aid, see Owner's Manual radio* or
navigation system*. This improves the audibility of the parking aid.
Fig. 114 Parking aid: Detection range of
rear sensors
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 111 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving112
Activating
The parking aid is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and the igni-
tion is turned on. This is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated by removing the reverse gear.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and
it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when parking the vehicle or
carrying out similar manoeuvres.
You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no small
obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., behind your vehicle.
Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking
aid.
Note
The parking aid does not operate if you are towing a trailer (applies to models
which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after switching the ignition on and
engaging reverse gear, and there is no obstacle close to your vehicle, this indicates a
system fault. Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to operate
properly.
Front and rear parking aid*
The parking aid provides a warning of obstacles in front and behind the
vehicle.
Fig. 115 Activating the parking aid / detection range of the front sensors
The audible parking aid determines the distance between the front or rear bumper and
an obstacle with the aid of ultrasound sensors. The sensors are integrated in the front
and rear bumper. The signal tones for the front parking aid sound higher as standard
than for the rear parking aid. The tones of the parking aid can be adapted in the menu
of the information display* page 25.
Range of sensors
The distance warning begins at a distance of about 120°cm from the obstacle in front
of the vehicle (area fig. 115) and about 160 cm from the obstacle behind the
vehicle (area ). The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the
clearance is reduced.
A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx. 30 cm (area ) - danger area.
From this moment on do not continue driving! If the vehicle is equipped with a
factory-fitted towing device*, the border of the danger area starts - continuous tone -
5 cm further behind the vehicle. The vehicle can be extended through an installed
detachable towing device.
On vehicles equipped with a factory-fitted radio* or navigation system*, the distance
to the obstruction is shown graphically in the display. On vehicles with a factory-fitted
towing device, the rear sensors are deactivated when towing a trailer. The driver is
informed about this by a graphic display (vehicle towing a trailer) in the radio* or the
navigation* display. The factory-fitted radio* or navigation system* can be set so that
A
A
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 112 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving 113
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
the play function volume decreases when activating the parking aid, see Owner's
Manual radio* or navigation system*. This improves the audibility of the parking aid.
Activating
The parking aid is activated when the reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is
switched on or by pressing the button page 112, fig. 115 - left, the symbol lights
up in the button. The activation is confirmed by a brief acknowledgement signal.
Deactivating
The parking aid is deactivated after pressing the button page 112, fig. 115 - left,
or at a speed of more than 10 km/h - the symbol
in the button is no longer illumi-
nated.
WARNING
The parking aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and
it is always the driver's responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or
carrying out similar manoeuvres.
You should therefore satisfy yourself, before reversing, that there is no small
obstacle, such as a rock, thin post, trailer drawbar etc., in front or behind your
vehicle. Such an obstacle might not be within the range detected by the sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the signal of the parking aid. Thus, these objects or
people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the sensors of the parking
aid.
Note
Only the front parking aid operates if you are towing a trailer (applies only to
models which feature a factory-fitted towing device*).
If a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there
is no obstacle close to your vehicle, this indicates a system fault. The fault is confirmed
additionally when the symbol flashes in the button page 112, fig. 115 - left.
Have the fault rectified by a specialist workshop.
The sensors must be kept clean and free of ice to enable the parking aid to operate
properly.
If the parking aid is activated and the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is in
the position , warning signal indicates interruption (vehicle can no longer move).
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Introduction
The cruise control system (CCS) maintains a constant speed, more than 30 km/h (20
mph), once it has been set, without you having to depress the accelerator pedal. This
is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking
power of the engine. The cruise control system makes it possible - particularly on long
journeys - for you to rest your “accelerator foot”.
WARNING
For safety reasons, the cruise control system must not be used in dense
traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces (such as icy roads, slippery roads, loose
gravel) - risk of accident!
In order to prevent unintentional use of the cruise control system, always
switch off the system after use.
Note
Models fitted with a manual gearbox: Always depress the clutch pedal if you switch
on the cruise control system when the gearbox is in Neutral! Otherwise the engine can
rev up unintentionally.
The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving on
steep downhill sections. The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it
travels. One should shift down in good time to a lower gear or slow the vehicle down
by applying the foot brake.
It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the
cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P, N or R.
A
P
s43s.1.book Page 113 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving114
Storing a speed
The cruise control system is operated by means of the switch and the rocker button
in the left lever of the multi-functional switch.
– Press the switch fig. 116 into the position ON.
– After the desired speed has been reached, press the rocker button into the SET
position.
After you have released the rocker button out of the position SET, the speed you
have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accel-
erator.
You can increase the speed by depressing the accelerator. Releasing the accelerator
will cause the speed to drop again to the set speed.
This does not apply, however, if you drive at a speed which is more than 10 km/h higher
than the set speed for a period of longer than 5 minutes. The stored speed will be
cancelled in the memory. You then have to re-store the desired speed.
One can reduce the speed in the usual manner. The system is switched off temporarily
by actuating the brake or clutch pedal page 114.
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Changing a stored speed
You can also change the speed of the vehicle without depressing the
accelerator.
Faster
–You can increase the stored speed without depressing the accelerator, by pressing
the rocker button fig. 116 in the RES position.
– The speed of the vehicle will increase continuously if you hold the rocker button
pressed in the RES position. Once the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.
Slower
– You can decrease the stored speed by pressing the rocker button in the SET
position.
– Holding down the rocker button pressed in the SET position will cause the speed
of the vehicle to reduce continuously. Once the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, release the rocker button. The set speed is then stored in the memory.
– If you release the rocker button when the vehicle is travelling at a speed of less than
30 km/h, the speed is not stored, the memory is erased. It is then necessary to again
store the speed with the rocker button in the position SET after an increase in
speed of the vehicle to more than 30 km/hour.
Switching off the cruise control system temporarily
–You can switch off the cruise control system temporarily by depressing the brake
pedal or clutch pedal, on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox only with the
brake pedal.
– You can switch off temporarily the cruise control system, if you press the switch
in the middle position.
The set speed remains stored in the memory.
The Resumption of the stored speed is achieved by releasing the brake or clutch
pedal, on vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox only after releasing the brake pedal
and after shortly pressing the rocker button fig. 116 into the position RES.
Fig. 116 Operating lever: Rocker button
and switch of the cruise control system
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 114 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Starting-off and Driving 115
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
First ensure that it is not too high for the traffic conditions which exist at that
moment before resuming the stored speed.
Switching off the cruise control system completely
– Press the switch page 114, fig. 116 to the right into position OFF.
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 115 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox116
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox*
Information for driving with the 6-speed automatic gearbox*
Your car is equipped with a conventional 6-speed automatic gearbox.
The maximum speed is reached in the 5th gear. The 6th gear serves as an economic
driving programme, which is intended to reduce the fuel consumption. Shifting up and
down through the gears is performed automatically. You can also, however, switch the
gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it possible for you to also shift
gears manually page 120.
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. D page 118, and then release the
Shiftlock button.
– Wait a moment until the gearbox has shifted (a slight engagement nudge can be
felt).
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator .
Stop
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just for
a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the stopped
vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, however, be
allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P and
then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N
page 108.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface. When
parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then move the
selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive pressure acting
on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out
of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first necessary
to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the engine to
be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except
P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted, also not
when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.
Information for driving with the automatic gearbox DSG*
The abbreviation DSG means Direct shift gearbox (Direct shift gearbox).
Two independent clutches are needed for the power transmission between the engine
and the gearbox. These replace the torque converter of the conventional automatic
gearbox. Their shifting is matched in such a way that there are no jerks when shifting
the gear and the power transmission of the engine to the front wheels is not inter-
rupted. Shifting up and down through the gears is performed automatically. You can
also, however, switch the gearbox over into the Tiptronic mode. This mode makes it
possible for you to also shift gears manually page 120.
s43s.1.book Page 116 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox 117
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Starting-off and Driving
– Depress the brake pedal fully and keep it depressed.
– Press the Shiftlock button (button in handle of the selector lever), move the
selector lever into the desired position, e.g. in D, and then release the Shiftlock
button.
– Release the brake pedal and depress the accelerator .
Stop
– The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping just for
a short time, such as at a cross roads. It is absolutely sufficient to hold the stopped
vehicle stationary by depressing the foot brake. The engine can, however, be
allowed just to idle.
Parking
– Depress the brake pedal and hold it depressed.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Press and Shiftlock button in the selector lever, move the selector lever to P and
then release the Shiftlock button.
The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N
page 108. At temperatures below -10 °C the engine can only be started in the
selector lever position P.
It is sufficient to engage selector lever position P when parking on a flat surface. When
parking on a slope you should first apply the handbrake firmly and then move the
selector lever into position P. This is to ensure that there is no excessive pressure acting
on the lock mechanism and that it is easier to subsequently move the selector lever out
of position P.
If the selector lever position N is selected by accident while driving it is first necessary
to release pressure on the accelerator pedal and wait for idling speed of the engine to
be reached before engaging a drive position in the selector lever.
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator when changing the position of the selector
lever if the car is stationary and the engine is running - risk of accident!
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
If you are stopping at a hill (downhill section), never try to hold the car
stationary with the gear engaged by means of the “accelerator”, this means by
letting the clutch slip. This can lead to overheating of the clutch. If there is a risk
of overheating of the clutch due to overload, the clutch is opened automatically
and the vehicle rolls backward - risk of accident!
If you must stop at a slope, depress and hold the brake pedal, so that you can
prevent the vehicle from rolling back.
Caution
The double clutch on the automatic gearbox DSG is equipped with an overload
protection. If you make use of the uphill function on a vehicle which is stationary or
driving slowly uphill, it will result in an increase of thermal stress of the clutches.
An overheating of the clutches can be detected by the flashing of the selector level
indicator and the “jerk” of the clutches, finally the clutches are opened. The power
transmission from the engine to the front wheels is interrupted and as a result of this
the vehicle can no longer be driven. If the clutch opens automatically, depress the
brake pedal, wait a few seconds and only then continue driving.
s43s.1.book Page 117 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox118
Selector lever positions
Fig. 117 Selector lever / information display: Selector lever positions
The current selector lever position is indicated in the information display of the instru-
ment cluster fig. 117 - right. In the positions D and S the gear you have already
engaged will be additionally displayed on the display.
- Parklock
The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this position.
The Parklock must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary .
If you wish to move the selector lever into or out of this position, you must press the
Shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and at the same time depress the
brake pedal.
If the battery is used, the selector lever cannot be moved out of the position P.
- Reverse gear
Reverse gear must only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the engine
idling .
The brake pedal must be depressed and at the same time the Shiftlock must be
pressed, if you wish to obtain the selector lever positions R, P or N.
When the ignition is switched on and the selector lever is in position R, the reverse
lights will come on.
- Neutral
The transmission is in Neutral in this position.
The brake pedal must be depressed (if the lever is in its position for longer than 2
seconds) in order to move the selector lever out of the position N into the position D
or R, with the ignition switched on, on a vehicle travelling at less than 5 km/hour or on
a stationary vehicle.
- Position for driving forward
When the selector lever is in this position, the forward gears are shifted up and down
automatically in line with engine load, vehicle speed and the dynamic shift
programme.
You must depress the brake pedal if you wish to move into position D from N when the
vehicle is travelling at less than 5 km/hour or is stationary .
In certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountainous regions or when towing a
trailer) it may be beneficial to select the manual shift programme page 120 for a
short time in order to adapt the gearbox ratios manually to the driving situations.
- Position for sporty style of driving
Shifting up later into a higher gear makes it possible to fully exploit the power potential
of the engine. The gearbox also then shifts down at higher engine speeds as in the posi-
tion D.
The gearbox does not shift into the 6th gear in the position S, because the maximum
speed is reached with the 5th gear
11)
.
The Shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the selector
lever out of the position D into the position S.
WARNING
Never move the selector lever into position R or P when driving - risk of an
accident!
When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary, it is necessary to
hold the car with the brake pedal in all the positions of the selector lever (except
P and N) since the power transmission is never completely interrupted, also not
when the engine is idling - the vehicle creeps.
You must on no account unintentionally operate the throttle (e.g. by hand
from the engine compartment) if a drive position is engaged when the car is
A
P
A
R
A
N
11)
Not valid for vehicles with automatic gearbox DSG.
A
D
A
S
s43s.1.book Page 118 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox 119
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
stationary. The vehicle would otherwise immediately start off - also when the
handbrake is firmly applied - risk of an accident!
You must move the selector lever into position P and firmly apply the hand-
brake first before you or any other person opens the bonnet and starts working
on the engine when it is running - risk of accident! It is also essential to observe
all warnings page 197, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
With the ignition on, the selector lever is locked when it is in the positions P and N. You
must first of all depress the brake pedal in order to move the selector lever out of this
position. The warning light page 33 lights up in the instrument cluster as a
reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in the positions P and N.
A time delay element ensures that the selector lever is not blocked when rapidly
switching over the position N (e.g. from R to D). This does, for example, allow one to
seesaw out a stuck vehicle. The selector lever lock will click into place if the lever is in
the N position for more than 2 seconds without the brake pedal being pressed.
The selector lever lock is only active if the vehicle is stationary or moving at speed of
less than 5 km/hour. The lock is switched off automatically into position N when the
car is travelling at a higher speed.
Shiftlock button
The Shiftlock button in the handle of selector lever prevents certain selector lever posi-
tions being engaged inadvertently. The selector lever lock is cancelled when you press
the Shiftlock button.
Keylock - Ignition key withdrawal lock
You can only withdraw the ignition key after switching off the ignition if the selector
lever is in position P. If the ignition key is withdrawn, the selector lever is blocked in
position P.
Kickdown function
The kickdown function provides you with maximum acceleration
power.
Fully depressing the accelerator pedal allows the kickdown function to be activated in
the desired driving program. This function has precedence over the driving
programme and serves for maximum acceleration of the vehicle when exploiting the
maximum power potential of the engine without taking into account the current
selector lever position (D, S or Tiptronic). The gearbox shifts down to one or several
gears in line with the driving state and the vehicle accelerates. The gearbox does not
shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for
this gear range.
WARNING
Please note that using the kickdown function can result in the driven wheels
spinning on a smooth or slippery road surface - risk of skidding!
Dynamic shift programme
The automatic gearbox of your vehicle is controlled electronically. Shifting up and
down through the gears is performed automatically on the basis of pre-defined driving
programmes.
Adopting a moderate style of driving will cause the gearbox to select the most
economical driving programme. Shifting up into a higher gear as soon as possible and
shifting down as late as possible will have a favourable effect on your fuel consump-
tion.
Adopting a sporty style of driving with rapid movements of the accelerator pedal
combined with sharp acceleration and frequent changes in speed, exploiting the top
speed of the car or depressing the accelerator pedal (kickdown function), will cause
the gearbox to switch over to this style of driving and shift down earlier with frequent
changes in gears in comparison to the moderate style of driving.
Selecting the most appropriate driving programme for the particular style of driving is
a continuous process. Irrespective of this it is, however, possible to switch or shift down
into a dynamic shift programme by depressing the accelerator rapidly. The gearbox
shifts down into a lower gear matching the speed of the car and this allows you to
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 119 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox120
accelerate rapidly (e.g. when overtaking) without having to depress the accelerator
pedal fully into the kickdown range. The original programme will be reactivated to
match your particular style of driving once the gearbox has shifted up again.
When driving in hilly regions, the gears are selected to match uphill and downhill
sections. This avoids the gearbox frequently shifting up and down when negotiating an
uphill stretch. When driving downhill, it is possible to shift down into the Tiptronic
position, in order to exploit the engine brake torque.
Tiptronic
The Tiptronic allows the driver to also shift gears manually.
Fig. 118 Selector lever: manual shifting / information display: manual shifting
The selector lever position you have engaged is indicated in the information display of
the instrument cluster together with the engaged gear fig. 118 - right.
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– One-touch forward of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) fig. 118 .
Shifting down gears
– One-touch back of the selector lever (in the Tiptronic position) .
It is possible to switch over to manual both when the car is stationary and also when
driving.
When you accelerate, the gearbox shifts up automatically into the higher gear just
before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached.
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gearbox does not shift down until there is no
risk of the engine overrevving.
If you operate the kickdown function, the gearbox shifts into a lower gear in line with
the vehicle speed and engine speed.
Manual shifting on the multifunction steering wheel*
Switching over to manual shifting
– Push the selector lever to the right out of position D. After switching over, the
current engaged gear is indicated in the display.
Shifting up gears
– Press the right rocker switch fig. 119 for the multifunction steering wheel.
Shifting down gears
– Press the left rocker switch fig. 119 for the multifunction steering wheel.
Temporarily switching over to manual shifting
– If the selector lever is in position D or S, press the left rocker switch or the right
rocker switch for the multifunction steering wheel.
A
+
A
-
Fig. 119 Multifunction steering wheel:
manual shifting
+
-
-
+
s43s.1.book Page 120 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Automatic gearbox 121
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– If the rocker switches or are not pressed for some time, the manual shifting
switches off. You can also switch off the temporary switch over to manual shifting
by pressing the right rocker switch for more than 1 second.
Emergency programme
An emergency programme exists in the event of a fault in the system.
The gearbox operates in a corresponding emergency programme if there are func-
tional faults in the gearbox electronics. This is indicated by all of the segments in the
display lighting up or going out.
A functional fault can have the following effect:
The gearbox only shifts into certain gears.
The reverse gear R cannot be used.
The manual shift programme (Tiptronic) is switched off in the emergency mode.
If the gearbox has switched over to emergency mode, drive to the nearest
specialist garage in order to have the fault rectified.
Selector lever-emergency unlocking
In case of interruption of the power supply (e.g. flat vehicle battery, defective fuse) or
defect of the selector lever lock, the selector lever can no longer be shifted from the
position P in the normal way and the vehicle can no longer be moved. The selector
lever must be unlocked in case of emergency.
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
– Open the storage compartment in front centre console* or the front ashtray.
– Carefully pull up the front left and right cover.
– Pull up rear cover.
– Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in direction of arrow fig. 120.
– Simultaneously press the shiftlock button in the handle of the selector lever and
shift the lever into the position N (if the selector lever is shifted again into the posi-
tion P, it is once again blocked).
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Tow-starting a vehicle
It is not possible to tow-start vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox page 222.
you can use jump-start cables connected to the battery of another vehicle for starting
your car if the vehicle battery is flat page 221.
Towing a vehicle
Please pay attention to the following information if it comes necessary to tow-in your
car page 222.
-
+
+
Fig. 120 Selector lever-emergency
unlocking
s43s.1.book Page 121 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication122
Communication
Multifunction steering wheel*
Operate radio und navigation on the multifunction steering wheel
The buttons for setting the basic functions of the factory-fitted radio and navigation
system are located on the multifunction steering wheel* fig. 121.
You can of course operate the radio and navigation at the appliance. You will find a
description in the operating instructions of your radio.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are
illuminated.
The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navigation
system.
By pressing or turning the buttons, you can carry out the following functions.
Fig. 121 Multifunction steering wheel:
control buttons
s43s.1.book Page 122 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 123
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
s43s.1.book Page 123 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication124
Button Action Radio, traffic information CD / CD changer / MP3 Navigation
press briefly
Switch off/on tone / activation and deactivation of the voice control
a)
press button for a
long period of time
switch off/on*
without
function
turn upwards
Increase volume
turn downwards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Changing to the next stored radio station
Changing to the next stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report
Changing to the next title
press button for a
long time
Interruption of the traffic report fast forward
press briefly
Changing to the previously stored radio station
Changing to the previously stored traffic information
Interrupting the traffic report
Changing to the previous title
press button for a
long time
Interruption of the traffic report fast rewind
Changing the audio source
press briefly
Calling up the main menu
press button for a
long time
press briefly
Interruption of the traffic report without function
press button for a
long period of time
turn upwards
Display of the stored/accessible stations
scroll upwards
Interruption of the traffic report
Changing to the next title
without
function
turn downwards
Display of the stored/accessible stations
scroll downwards
Interruption of the traffic report
Changing to the previous title
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
4
A
5
A
5
A
6
A
6
A
6
A
6
s43s.1.book Page 124 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 125
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and
navigation system of 4x 20°W.
For the equipment sound system*, the loudspeakers are matched to a power
output of the amplifier of 4x40°W + 6x20 W.
Mobile phones and two-way radio systems
The installation of a mobile phone and two-way radio system in a vehicle should be
carried out by a specialist garage.
Škoda Auto permits the operation of mobile phones and two-way radio systems with
a professionally installed external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to
10 watts.
It is essential that you inform a specialist garage about the possibilites to assemble and
operate mobile phones and two-way radio sets which have a power output of more
than 10 W. They will inform you which technical possibilities exist for retrofitting
mobile phones.
When using a mobile phone inside the vehicle, which is not inserted into the phone
adapter, and thus has no connection to the external aerial, the electromagnetic radia-
tion can exceed the current limit value. If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile
phone, use your mobile phone exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the
vehicle drops to a minimum. This also improves the quality of the connection.
Operation of mobile phones or two-way radio systems may interfere with functioning
of the electronic systems of your vehicle. The reasons for this may be:
no external aerial,
external aerial incorrectly installed,
transmission power greater than 10 watts.
WARNING
If a mobile phone or a two-way radio system is operated in the vehicle
without using a special external aerial or an external aerial which has been
incorrectly installed, this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field
in the interior of the vehicle.
Please concentrate fully at all times on your driving!
You must not install two-way radio systems, mobile phones or mounts on
the covers of the airbags or within the immediate deployment range of airbags.
This might result in injuries to the occupants in the event of an accident.
Never leave a mobile phone on a seat, on the dash panel or in another area,
from which it can be thrown during a sudden braking manoeuver, an accident
or a collision. In this case, the occupants of the vehicle might be injured.
Note
Observe the country-specific regulations for the use of mobile phones in vehicles.
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II*
Introduction
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II is a built-in “hands-free system”, it
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel* or
the navigation system*.
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle
can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth
®
technology. The adapter*
serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the external
aerial of the vehicle.
To ensure an optimum signal transmission, always leave the telephone with the
adapter* in the telephone mount.
a)
Only valid for the navigation system Columbus.
s43s.1.book Page 125 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication126
Furthermore the volume can be changed individually during the call at any time with
the button for setting the radio* or navigation system* or with the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel*.
WARNING
Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.
Note
Please also refer to the additional instructions page 125, “Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems”.
Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised Škoda Service
Partner.
Phone Phonebook
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control. In
the phone phonebook there are 2500 free memory locations available. This phone
phonebook can be used in line with the mobile telephone.
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone book
from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can take a
few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the last update
was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the
updating has ended.
If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500, the phone book is not complete.
If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the telephone
event has ended, the updating starts anew.
Store voice recording of a contact
For each entry in the menu Phone book, you can store your own voice entry for the
voice control with Voice Tag - Record. You can also store your own voice entry using
voice control in the menu “further options”.
Connection of the mobile phone with the hands-free system
In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps must
be carried out for the connection:
– Activate the Bluetooth
®
in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile phone.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until
the control unit has ended the search.
– Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.
–Confirm the PIN (as standard 1234).
– If the hands-free system announces (as standard Skoda UHV) on the display of the
mobile phone, enter the PIN (as standard 1234) within 30 seconds and wait until
the connection is established
12)
.
– After ending the connection, confirm in the information display that a new user
profile was created.
If no more free space is available for creating a new user profile, delete an existing user
profile.
If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands-free system
within 3 minutes after switching on the ignition, switch the ignition off and then again
on. The visibility of the hands-free system is established again for 3 minutes. The visi-
bility of the Bluetooth
®
device is automatically switched off if the vehicle starts off or
if the mobile phone connects to the device.
12)
Some mobile phones have a menu, in which the authorization for establishing a Bluetooth
®
connection is performed via the input of a code. If the input for the authorization is necessary, it
must always be performed when re-establishing the Bluetooth connection.
s43s.1.book Page 126 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 127
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
During the connecting procedure, no other mobile phone may be connected with the
hands-free system.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired to the hands-free system, whereby only one
mobile phone can communicate with the hands-free system.
Connection with an already paired mobile phone
After switching on the ignition, the connection is automatically established for the
already paired mobile phone
12)
. Check on the mobile unit if the automatic connection
was established.
Disconnecting the connection
By withdrawing the ignition key.
By disconnecting the device in the information display.
By disconnecting the device in the mobile phone.
Solving connection problems
If the system announces No paired phone found, check the operating state of the
telephone:
Is the telephone switched on?
Is the PIN code entered?
Is Bluetooth
®
active?
Is the visibility of the mobile phone active?
Was the telephone already paired with the hands-free system?
WARNING
In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth
®
function of the hands-free system
must be switched off by a specialist garage!
Note
Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth
®
.
You can ask at an authorised Škoda Service Partner if your telephone is compatible
with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II.
If a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone, use your mobile phone
exclusively in the adapter so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum.
Inserting the mobile phone into the adapter ensures an optimal sending and
receiving power and offers at the same time the advantage of the battery charging.
The range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the hands-free system is restricted to
the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the
devices and mutual interferences with other devices. If your mobile phone is e.g. in a
jacket pocket, this can lead to difficulties when establishing the Bluetooth
®
connection
with the hands-free system or the data transfer.
Inserting the mobile phone with the adapter*
Only one telephone mount* is factory-fitted. An adapter for the telephone can be
purchased from the range of the Škoda original accessories.
Inserting the mobile phone with the adapter
– First of all push the adapter in the direction of arrow fig. 122 up to the stop
into the mount. Press the adapter slightly downwards, until it locks securely into
position.
– Insert the mobile phone into the adapter (as specified in manufacturer's
instructions).
Removing the mobile phone with the adapter
– Press simultaneouly the side locks of the mount and remove the mobile phone and
adapter fig. 122.
Fig. 122 Universal preparation for the
phone
A
A
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 127 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication128
Caution
Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to interruption of
the connection. When taking out the mobile phone, the connection to the factory-
fitted antenna is interrupted, this reduces the quality of the transmitting and receiving
signal. The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted.
Operating telephone calls with the aid of the adapter*.
Fig. 123 Illustration image: Single-button adapter / two-button adapter
The voice control of the telephone is activated by briefly pressing the PTT button
(button push to talk) on the adapter* fig. 123.
Aside from the PTT button, the SOS button can be found on certain adapters* on the
right fig. 123. After pressing the button for 2 seconds, the number 112 (Emergency
call) is dialed.
Note
The adapters illustrated are only prime examples.
Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel*
The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons
located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation
without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone fig. 124.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstallation
at the factory.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are
illuminated.
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering wheel
without mobile phone operation page 122.
Fig. 124 Multifunction steering wheel:
Control buttons for the telephone
s43s.1.book Page 128 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 129
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.
Operate the telephone via the information display*
The display of texts in the menu Phone is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Portuguese.
In the menu Phone you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Dial number
Call register
Voice mailbox
Bluetooth
Settings
Back
Phone book
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone
memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone. In the phone phonebook there are
2500 free memory locations available.
Dial number
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in
sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing
Button Action Operation
press briefly
Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)
Cancelation of the replayed message
turn upwards
Increase volume
turn downwards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact
press button for a long
time
Reject call, private call
press briefly
Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)
press button for a long
time
Leave the phone menu
press briefly Selection of menu point
press button for a long period
of time
To the next initial letter in the telephone book
turn upwards
The last chosen menu selection, name
turn downwards
The next menu selection, name
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 129 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication130
the handwheel. You can select the numbers 0 - 9, the symbols +, , # and the func-
tions Delete, Call, Cancel.
Call register
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:
Missed calls
Received calls
Last calls
Voice mailbox
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and
then dial the number.
Bluetooth
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:
User - the overview of the stored users
New user - Search for new telephones which are in the reception range
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the telephone unit for other devices
Media player
Active device
Paired devices
Search
Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the telephone unit (pre-set
SKODA UHV)
Settings
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Update
List
Surname
First name
Ring tone
Back
Return in the basic menu of the telephone.
Voice control
Introduction
The period, in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice commands and
carry out the voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The system gives audible feedback
and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions.
Switch on voice control (dialogue)
You can start the dialogue at any time by briefly pressing the PTT button on the
adapter* page 128, fig. 123 or on the multifunction steering wheel* page 128.
If the system does not recognise your command, it repeats the first part of the aid and
thus a new entry is possible. After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of
the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Cancel” is given and the dialogue is ended.
Switching off voice control (dialogue)
You can end the dialogue at any time by briefly pressing the PTT button on the
adapter* page 128, fig. 123 or on the multifunction steering wheel* page 128. If
the system expects a voice command, you can end the dialogue with the command
CANCEL.
Only the message just repeated can be ended by pressing the PTT button during the
message and thus it is possible to pronounce the expected command sooner.
When receiving an incoming call, the dialogue is immediately interrupted and you can
accept the call by pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel* or by
pressing the button for receiving a call directly on your telephone.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the following
factors:
Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive voice pauses.
Avoid insufficient articulation.
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing
exterior noise.
s43s.1.book Page 130 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 131
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your voice
is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously
talking occupants.
Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and
directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger
can operate the equipment.
Note
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with a navigation system Columbus, it is only
possible to operate the voice control via the navigation system. The description on
how to operate the voice control can be found in the operating instructions of your
navigation system.
Voice commands
The voice control is possible in the following languages:
Czech, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Portuguese, Dutch.
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit
After giving the command DIAL NUMBER, the system requests the entry of a tele-
phone number. The telephone number can be entered as an interconnected spoken
row of digits (complete number), in the form of order of digits (separation through a
brief voice pause) or through individually spoken digits. After each order of digits
(separation through brief voice pause) all of the digits detected up to now are repeated
by the system.
The digits 0 - 9, symbols +, , # are permitted. The system detects no continuous digit
combinations such as twenty-three, but only individually spoken digits (two, three).
Call name
– Press the PTT button.
– Give the command CALL XZY after the signal tone.
Example for calling the name from the phone book
Voice command Action
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
CALL XYZ
With this command you call up the contact from the
phone book page 131.
PHONE BOOK
After this command, for example the phone book can
be repeated, a voice entry for the contact can be
updated or deleted etc.
CALL REGISTER Lists of dialed numbers, missed calls etc.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command a phone number can be entered
which establishes a connection to the requested party.
REDIAL
After this command the system selects the last selected
number.
MUSIC
Play music from the mobile phone or another paired
device.
OTHER OPTIONS Sub-menu PHONE BOOK, CALL LISTS and SETTINGS.
SETTINGS
Selection for setting Bluetooth
®
, dialogue etc.
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
Voice command Announcement
CALL XYZ “Say home, work, mobile”
e.g. WORK “XYZ work is dialed.”
CALL XYZ WORK “XYZ work is dialed.”
Voice command Action
s43s.1.book Page 131 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication132
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II makes it possible to play back music via
Bluetooth
®
from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or notebook.
In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth
®
, it is necessary to connect the
device with the handsfree-system in the menu Phone - Bluetooth - Media player.
The operation of the music playback from the connected device can be performed via
the hands-free system with the voice control page 131 or directly via the connected
device.
Note
The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth
®
profile A2DP, see Owner's
manual of the device to be connected.
Universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl*
Introduction
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IlI is a built-in “hands-free system”, it
provides a voice operated convenience mode via the multifunction steering wheel* or
the navigation system*.
All communication between a telephone and the hands-free system of your vehicle
can only be established with the help of the Bluetooth
®
, when using HFP - Hands Free
Profile or rSAP - remote SIM Access Profile.
The following functions are included in the universal telephone preinstallation GSM III:
Phone Phonebook page 132.
Convenience mode with the multifunction steering wheel* page 134 with
display in the information display page 136.
Voice control of the telephone, including the language selection of the telephone
contacts page 137.
Internet connection page 138.
Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 139.
Display of SMS page 136.
The volume can be changed at any time with the control button of the radio* or with
the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*.
WARNING
Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time.
Note
Please also refer to the additional instructions page 125, “Mobile phones and
two-way radio systems”.
Should you have any questions, please contact an authorised Škoda Service
Partner.
Phone Phonebook
A phone phonebook is part of the mobile phone preinstallation with voice control. In
the phone phonebook there are 2000 free memory locations available. This phone
phonebook can be used in line with the mobile telephone.
After the first connection of the telephone, the system begins to load the phone book
from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit.
If the telephone book of the mobile phone contains more than 2 000 entries, the
system announces after downloading Phone book not fully loaded.
Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands-free
system, an update of the relevant phone book is performed. The updating can take a
few minutes. During this time the phone book, which was stored after the last update
was completed, is available. Newly stored telephone numbers are only shown after the
updating has ended.
If a telephone event (e.g. incoming or outgoing call, dialogue of the voice control)
occurs during the updating procedure, the updating is interrupted. After the telephone
event has ended, the updating starts anew.
s43s.1.book Page 132 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 133
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Store voice recording of a contact
For each entry in the menu Phone book, you can store your own voice entry for the
voice control with Voice Tag - Record. You can also store your own voice entry using
voice control in the menu “further options”.
Connection of the telephone with the hands-free system
In order to connect a mobile phone with the hands-free system, it is necessary to
connect the telephone to the hands-free system. Detailed information on this is
provided in the operating instructions of your mobile phone. The following steps must
be carried out for the connection.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the HFP
profile
– Activate the Bluetooth
®
in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile phone.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until
the control unit has ended the search.
– Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.
– Within 30 seconds enter in your telephone the 16 digit PIN of your control unit,
which is indicated in the information display* and confirm it according to the
instructions on the display of your telephone.
– To store a new user or to download the telephone book and the indentification
data of the SIM card into the control unit, follow the instructions in the information
display* and on the mobile phone.
Connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP
profile
– Activate the Bluetooth
®
in your telephone and the visibility of the mobile phone.
For certain mobile phones it is necessary to switch on first the rSAP function.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Select the menu Phone - Phone search in the information display and wait until
the control unit has ended the search.
– Select your mobile phone in the menu of the units found.
– Within 30 seconds enter in your telephone the 16 digit PIN of your control unit,
which is indicated in the information display* and confirm it according to the
instructions on the display of your telephone.
– If your SIM card is blocked by a PIN code, enter the PIN of the SIM card of your tele-
phone. The telephone connects to the control unit (during the first connection you
can only select in the information display* and when the vehicle is stationary, if the
PIN should be stored).
– For the first storage of a new user follow the instructions in the information display.
– To download the telephone book and the indentification data of the SIM card into
the new control unit, confirm again the command rSAP in your mobile phone.
After connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile, the
telephone deregisters from the GSM network and only the control unit ensures the
communication with the network. In the telephone only the interface for Bluetooth
®
remains active. In this case, you can only separate from the control unit, switch off the
Bluetooth
®
connection or select the number of the emergency call 112 (only valid for
some countries).
The telephone connects preferentially via the rSAP profile.
If the PIN was stored, the telephone is automatically detected and connected with the
hands-free system when the ignition is switched on the next time. Check on your
mobile phone if it was automatically connected.
Disconnecting the connection
The connection to the hands-free system is disconnected:
When removing the key from the ignition lock (during a telephone call, the connec-
tion is disconnected).
After disconnecting the connection in the telephone.
By disconnecting the connection in the information display*.
On vehicles which are fitted out with radio or navigation at the factory, it is possible to
terminate the telephone call after removing the key from the ignition lock by pressing
s43s.1.book Page 133 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication134
the icon on the touch-screen of the radio
13)
or the navigation, see operating instruc-
tions for radio or for navigation.
WARNING
Pay attention primarily to the traffic situation! As the driver you are fully
responsible for road safety. Use the telephone system only to such an extent, so
that you are in full control of your vehicle at any time - risk of accident!
In the event of air transport, the Bluetooth
®
function of the hands-free
system must be switched off by a specialist garage!
Note
In the memory of the control unit, up to three users can be stored, whereby the
hands-free system can only communicate actively with one user. In the case of mutual
connection with a fourth mobile phone, you must erase one user.
Not valid for all mobile phones which enable a communication via Bluetooth
®
.
You can ask at an authorised Škoda Service Partner if your telephone is compatible
with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl.
When connecting to the control unit, follow the instructions on your mobile phone.
The range of the Bluetooth
®
connection to the hands-free system is intended for
the vehicle interior. The range is dependent on local factors, e.g. obstacles between the
devices and interferences with other devices.
Operation of the telephone on the multifunction steering wheel*
The driver can set the basic functions of the telephone by simply operating the buttons
located on the steering wheel so that he can concentrate on the traffic situation
without being distracted as little as possible by operating the telephone fig. 125.
This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the telephone preinstallation
at the factory.
If the side lights are switched on, the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are
illuminated.
Overview of the different functions in contrast to the multifunction steering wheel
without mobile phone operation page 122.
13)
Does not apply for Radios Swing and Blues.
Fig. 125 Multifunction steering wheel:
Control buttons for the telephone
s43s.1.book Page 134 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 135
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The buttons operate the functions for the operating mode of the current telephone.
Button Action Operation
press briefly
Activation and deactivation of the voice control (Button PTT - Push to talk)
Cancelation of the replayed message
turn upwards
Increase volume
turn downwards
Decrease volume
press briefly
Accept call, end call, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of the dialed numbers, call the dialed contact
press button for a long
time
Reject call, list of the last calls, entry in the main menu of the telephone, list of dialed numbers
press briefly
Reach one level higher in the menu (according to the current position in the menu)
press button for a long
time
Leave the phone menu
press briefly
Confirm menu selection
press button for a long
period of time
turn upwards
The last chosen menu selection, name
turn downwards
The next menu selection, name
quickly turn upwards
To the previous initial letter in the telephone book
quickly turn downwards
To the next initial letter in the telephone book
A
1
A
1
A
1
A
2
A
2
A
3
A
3
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 135 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication136
Operate the telephone via the information display*
The display of texts in the menu Phone is possible in the following languages:
German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Czech.
In the menu Phone you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Dial number
Call register
Voice mailbox
Messages
14)
Bluetooth
Settings
Back
Phone book
In the menu point Phone book is the list of the loaded contacts from the telephone
memory and the SIM card of the mobile phone. In the phone phonebook there are
2000 free memory locations available.
Dial number
In the menu point Dial number, you can write any telephone number. Select in
sequence the desired digits with the aid of the handwheel and confirm it by pressing
the handwheel. You can select the numbers 0 - 9, the symbols +, *, # and the functions
Delete, Call, Back.
Call register
In the menu point Call register, you can select the following menu points:
Missed calls
Received calls
Last calls
Delete lists
Voice mailbox
In the menu Voice mailbox, it is possible to set the number of the voice mailbox and
then dial the number.
Messages
In the menu point Messages there is a list of received text messages.
Bluetooth
In the menu Bluetooth you can select the following menu points:
User - the overview of the stored users
New user - Search for users who are in the reception range
Visibility - Switching on the visibility of the hands-free system for other devices
Media player
Extras
Modem - overview of the active and paired devices for the connection to the
internet
Phone name - the possibility to change the name of the hands-free system (pre-
set SKODA UHV)
Settings
In the menu Settings you can select the following menu points:
Phone book
Update
Select memory
SIM & phone (SIM & Mobile phone)
SIM card
Mobile phone
List
Surname
First name
Own number - the possibility to suppress one's own number on the unit called
14)
Only when connecting the telephone with the hands-free system via the rSAP profile.
s43s.1.book Page 136 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 137
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Signal settings
Ring tone
Volume
Phone settings
Select operator
Automatic
Manual
Network mode
Off time
SIM mode - applies to telephones with the rSAP profile in which two SIM cards
can be inserted - there is the possibility to select which SIM card may be connected
with the hands-free system and the possibility to select the name for the SIM card.
SIM mode 1
SIM mode 2
GPRS - You can ask a network provider about the settings of the access point for an
internet connection
Switch off ph. - switching off the telephone unit (telephone remains connected)
Back
Return in the main menu of the information display.
Voice control
Introduction
The period, in which the telephone system is ready to receive voice commands and
carry out the voice commands, is called DIALOGUE. The system gives audible feedback
and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions.
The volume can be changed at any time with the control button of the radio* or the
navigation system* or with the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Switch on voice control (dialogue)
You can start the dialogue at any time by briefly pressing the PTT button on the
multifunction steering wheel* page 134.
If the system does not recognise your command, it repeats the first part of the aid and
thus a new entry is possible. After the 2nd error the system repeats the second part of
the aid. After the 3rd error the answer “Procedure cancelled” is given and the dialogue
is ended.
Switching off voice control (dialogue)
You can end the dialogue at any time by briefly pressing the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel* page 134. If the system expects a voice command, you can end
the dialogue with the command CANCEL.
Only the message just repeated can be ended by pressing the PTT button during the
message and thus it is possible to pronounce the expected command sooner.
The dialogue of the incoming call is immediately interrupted and you can accept the
call by pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel*.
Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on the following
factors:
Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive voice pauses.
Avoid insufficient articulation.
Close the doors, windows and sliding roof, in order to reduce or stop disturbing
exterior noise.
It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the tone of your voice
is louder than the increased surrounding noise.
During the dialogue avoid additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. simultaneously
talking occupants.
Do not speak, if the system makes an announcement.
The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and
directed to the driver and front passenger. Therefore the driver and the front passenger
can operate the equipment.
s43s.1.book Page 137 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication138
Note
On vehicles which are factory-fitted with a navigation system Columbus, it is only
possible to operate the voice control via the navigation system. The description on
how to operate the voice control can be found in the operating instructions of your
navigation system.
Voice commands
The voice control is possible in the following languages:
German, English, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese and Czech.
Basic voice commands for operating the telephone control unit
Further voice commands
Connection to the internet
A connection to the internet can be established via a notebook or PDA.
The hands-free system supports the GPRS, EDGE and UMTS/3G technologies.
A connection to the internet can only be established via a telephone which in turn is
connected via the rSAP profile.
The connection procedure can vary depending on the type and version of the oper-
ating system as well as the type of the device to be connected. In order to successfully
connect to the internet, appropriate knowledge of the operating system for connecting
the device is necessary.
Process of connection
– Connect the mobile phone with the hands-free system.
– Set the access point (depending on the operator, usually the “internet”) in the
menu Phone - Settings - GPRS.
– Switch on the visibility of the hands-free system for the other devices in the menu
Phone - Bluetooth - Visibility.
– Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices on the device to be connected.
– In the list of the devices found, select the hands-free system (as standard “SKODA
UHV”).
Voice command Action
HELP
After this command the system repeats all possible
commands.
CALL NAME
After this command a name can be entered which
establishes a connection to the requested partner.
DIAL NUMBER
After this command a phone number can be entered
which establishes a connection to the requested party.
REDIAL The last selected telephone number is selected.
LISTEN TO ALL THE
NAMES
The system reads the contacts in the telephone book.
READ NEWS
The system reads the messages which were received
while the telephone was connected with the hands-free
system.
SHORT DIALOGUE
Help is clearly reduced (good operating knowledge
provided).
LONG DIALOGUE Help is not reduced (suitable for beginners).
CANCEL The dialogue is ended.
Voice command Action
REPEAT
The entered digits are repeated. Then the system
requests with voice response “please proceed” the
entry of further digits or commands.
BACK
The last entered order of digits is erased. Previously
entered groups of digits are repeated. Then the system
requests with voice response “and proceed?” the entry
of further digits or commands.
DELETE All entered digits are erased.
s43s.1.book Page 138 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication 139
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– On the device to be connected, enter the password and follow any instructions
given on this device or in the information display.
– Enter the desired internet address in the internet browser. The operating system
requests the entry of the telephone number for the internet access (depending on
the operator, usually “*99#”).
Music playback via Bluetooth
®
The universal telephone preinstallation GSM IIl makes it possible to play back music via
Bluetooth
®
from the devices such as MP3 player, mobile phone or notebook.
In order to enable the music playback via Bluetooth
®
, it is necessary to connect the
device, which should be connected, with the hands-free system in the menu Phone -
Bluetooth - Media player.
The music playback process is performed on the connected device.
Note
The device to be connected must support the Bluetooth
®
profile A2DP, see Owner's
manual of the device to be connected.
Multimedia
Inputs AUX-IN* and MDI*
The input AUX-IN is located below the armrest* of the front seats and is marked with
.
The input MDI is located in the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
The inputs AUX-IN and MDI connect the external audio sources (e.g. iPod or MP3
player) and play back music from these devices via your radio* or navigation system*
installed in the factory.
The description of the operation can be found in the relevant Owner's Manual of your
radio* or your navigation*.
Note
The loudspeakers in the vehicle are matched to a power output of the radio and
navigation system of 4x 20°W.
For the equipment sound system*, the loudspeakers are matched to a power
output of the amplifier of 4x40°W + 6x20 W.
CD changer*
The CD changer for the radio and navigation system is located in the left side compart-
ment of the luggage compartment.
Loading a CD
– Touch the button and guide the CD (compact disc) into the CD-case . The
CD is automatically loaded onto the next free position in the CD-changer. The LED
in the corresponding button stops flashing.
Load CDs
– Hold the button pressed for longer than 2 seconds and guide the CDs one after
the other (maximum 6 CDs) into the CD case . The LEDs in the buttons are
no longer flashing.
Loading a CD to one definite position
– Briefly touch the button . The LEDs in the buttons light up at the memory
spaces, which are already assigned and flash in the case of free memory spaces.
Fig. 126 The CD changer
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
B
A
D
A
C
A
D
s43s.1.book Page 139 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Communication140
– Touch the desired button and guide the CD into the CD-case .
Ejecting a CD
– Briefly touch the button , in order to eject a CD. For assigned memory spaces,
now the LEDs light up in the buttons .
– Touch the corresponding button . The CD is ejected.
Ejecting all CDs
– Hold the button pressed for more than 2 seconds, in order to eject the CDs. All
CDs in the CD-changer are ejected consecutively.
Note
Always guide the CD into the CD-case with the printed side pointing upwards.
Never push the CD with force into the CD-case as the insertion is performed auto-
matically.
After loading a CD into the CD-changer, you must wait until the LED of the corre-
sponding button lights up. Then the CD-case is free to load the next CD.
If you have selected a position, on which a CD is already located, this CD will be
ejected. Take out the ejected CD and load the desired CD.
A
D
A
B
A
A
A
D
A
D
A
A
A
B
A
D
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 140 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Passive Safety 141
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Safety
Passive Safety
Basic information
Driving the safe way
Passive safety measures reduce the risk of injury in accident situations.
In this section you will find important information, tips and notes on the subject of
passive safety in your vehicle. We have combined everything here which you should
be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, child seats and safety of
children. It is therefore important, in particular, to comply with the notes and warnings
in this section for your own interest and in the interest of those travelling with you.
WARNING
This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for
the driver and his occupants. You will find further information on safety, which
concerns you and those travelling with you, in the following chapters of this
Owner's Manual.
The complete on-board literature should always be in the vehicle. This
applies in particular, if you rent out or sell the vehicle.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment is part of the occupant protection and it can
reduce the risk of injuries in accident situations.
“Do not put at risk” your safety and the safety of those travelling with you . In the event
of an accident, the safety equipment can reduce the risk of injuries. The following list
contains part of the safety equipment in your vehicle:
Three-point seat belts for all the seats,
belt force limiter for front and outer rear seats*,
belt tensioner for front seats,
seat belt height adjuster for front seats,
front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger*,
side airbags*,
head airbags*,
anchoring points for child seat using the “ISOFIX” system,
anchoring points for child seat using the “Top Tether” system,
head restraint adjustable for height,
adjustable steering column.
The specified safety equipment works together, in order to optimally protect you and
those travelling with you in accident situations. The safety equipment does not protect
you or the people travelling with you, if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect
seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used.
For this reason you will be provided with information on why this equipment is very
important, how it protects you and the occupants, what should be observed when
using the equipment and how you and the people travelling with you can make full use
of the existing safety equipment. This Owner's Manual contains important warning
notes, which you and those travelling with you should pay attention to in order to
reduce a risk of injury.
Safety concerns everybody!
Before setting off
The driver is always fully responsible for his occupants and for the oper-
ating safety of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please pay atten-
tion to the following points before setting off:
Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning properly.
Inspect the tyre inflation pressure.
s43s.1.book Page 141 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Passive Safety142
Ensure that all the windows offer a good visibility to the outside.
Safely attach the items of luggage page 74, “Loading the luggage compartment”.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedal.
Adjust the mirror, the front seat and the head restraint to match your body size.
Point out to your occupants that the head restraints must be adjusted to match
their body size.
Protect the children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts
page 159, “Transporting children safely”.
Adopt the correct seated position page 142, “Correct seated position”. Also
inform your occupants to adopt the correct seated position.
Fasten the seat belt correctly. Also inform your occupants to properly fasten the
seat belts page 147, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
What influences the driving safety?
The driving safety is primarily determined by the style of driving and the
personal behaviour of all the occupants.
The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants. If your driving safety is
effected, you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk. Please refer to the
following guidelines.
Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, e.g. by your occu-
pants or mobile phone calls.
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, e.g. through medication, alcohol,
drugs.
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Adjust the driving speed at all times to the road condition as well as to the traffic
and weather conditions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys - at the latest every two hours.
Correct seated position
Correct seated position for the driver
Correct seated position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed
driving.
Fig. 127 The correct distance of the driver from the steering wheel
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we
recommend the following setting:
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel and your
chest is at least 25 cm fig. 127 - left.
Position the driver seat in the forward/back direction so that you are able to fully
press the pedals with your legs at a slight angle.
Adjust the seat backrest so that you are able to reach the highest point of the
steering wheel with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head fig. 127 - right.
Fasten the seat belt correctly page 147, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
Manual driver seat adjustment page 11, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical driver seat adjustment page 68, “Adjusting front seats electrically*”.
s43s.1.book Page 142 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Passive Safety 143
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
The driver must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the steering wheel
page 142, fig. 127 left. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean
that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the outer
edge in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position. Never hold the steering wheel
firmly in the 12 o'clock position or in another way (e.g. in the middle of the
steering wheel or at the inner steering wheel edge). In such cases, injuries to the
arms, the hands and the head can occur when the driver airbag is deployed.
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk
of injury!
Ensure that there are no objects in the footwell as any objects may get
behind the pedals during a driving or braking manoeuvre. You would then no
longer be able to operate the clutch, to brake or accelerate.
Correct seated position for the front passenger
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the
dash panel so that the airbag offers him the greatest possible safety it is
deployed.
For the safety of the front passenger and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
accident, we recommend the following setting:
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible to the rear.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same
level as the upper part of your head page 142, fig. 127 - right.
Fasten the seat belt correctly page 147, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactivated page 157,
“Deactivating an airbag”.
Manual front passenger adjustment page 11, “Adjusting the front seats”.
Electrical front passenger seat adjustment page 68, “Adjusting front seats electri-
cally*”.
WARNING
The front seats and the head restraints must always be adjusted to match
the body size of the seat occupant as well as the seat belts must always be
correctly fastened in order to provide an optimal protection for you and your
occupants.
The front passenger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash
panel. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag
system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is being driven -
never place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surfaces of the seats. You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes
necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an airbag is
deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated posi-
tion!
The seat backrests must not be angled too far back when driving otherwise
this will affect proper operation of the seat belts and of the airbag system - risk
of injury!
Correct seated position for the occupants on the rear seats
Occupants on the rear seats must sit upright, keep the feet in the foot-
well and must have their seat belts correctly fastened.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident,
the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following:
Adjust the head restraints so that the top edge of the head restraints is at the same
level as the upper part of your head page 142, fig. 127 - on the right.
Fasten the seat belt correctly page 147, “How are seat belts correctly fastened?”.
If you are transporting page 159, “Transporting children safely” children in the
vehicle, please use a suitable child restraint system.
s43s.1.book Page 143 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Passive Safety144
WARNING
The head restraints must always be adjusted to match the body size, in order
to offer an optimal protection for you and your occupants.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven - never
put your feet out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats. You will be
exposed to increased risk of injury if it becomes necessary to apply the brake or
in the event of an accident. If an airbag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries
when adopting an incorrect seated position!
If the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright, the risk of injury is
increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt.
Examples of an incorrect seated position
An incorrect seated position can lead to severe injuries or death for the
occupants.
Seat belts offer their optimum protection only if the webbing of the seat belts is prop-
erly routed. Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of
the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the
seat belt. The driver is fully responsible for himself and the occupants, in particular for
the children. Do not permit an occupant to adopt an incorrect seated position when
the car is moving.
The following list contains the examples of seated positions which are dangerous for
the occupants. This list is not complete, however we would like you to get interested in
this subject.
Therefore, while the car is moving never:
stand up in the vehicle,
stand up on the seats,
kneel onto the seats,
tilt the seat backrest fully to the back,
lean against the dash panel,
lie on the rear seats,
only sit on the front area of the seat,
sit to the side,
lean out of the window,
put the feet out of the window,
put the feet on the dash panel,
put the feet on the seat upholstery,
occupy the footwell,
have the seat belt not fastened,
occupy the luggage compartment.
WARNING
If the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position, he is exposed to life-
threatening injuries, in case he is hit by a deployed airbag.
Before setting off, please adopt the correct seated position and do not
change this seated position while the car is moving. Also advise your occupants
to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this seated position
while the car is moving.
s43s.1.book Page 144 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seat belts 145
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Seat belts
Why seat belts?
It is a proven fact that seat belts offer good protection in accidents fig. 128. Thus
wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most countries.
Seat belts which have been correctly fastened and adjusted hold the occupants of the
car in the correct seated position fig. 128. The belts reduce the kinetic energy
(energy of motion) to a considerable extent. They also prevent uncontrolled move-
ments which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt,
profit to a major extent from the fact that the kinetic energy is optimally absorbed by
the belts. The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas-
ures, such as the airbag system, also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy. The
energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury.
Accident statistics prove that seat belts which are fastened and properly adjusted
reduce the risk of an injury and enhance the chance of survival in a major accident
page 145.
It is important that you pay attention to safety measures, particularly when trans-
porting children in the vehicle page 159, “What you should know about trans-
porting children!”.
WARNING
Fasten your seat belt each time before setting off, also when driving in town!
This also applies to the people seated at the rear - risk of injury!
Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt. This is the only way of
ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 147.
It is important for the belt webbing to be properly routed if the seat belts are
to offer the maximum protection. You can see a description of how safety belts
should be fitted properly on the next pages.
Note
Please comply with any differing legal requirements when using the seat belts.
The physical principle of a frontal collision
Fig. 129 The driver is catapulted forward if not wearing a belt / The rear seat occupant is cata-
pulted forward if not wearing a belt
The physical principle of a frontal accident can be explained quite simply:
Motion energy, so-called kinetic energy, is produced as soon as the vehicle is moving,
both for the vehicle and its occupants. The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends
essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the
vehicle and the occupants. The greater the speed and weight increase, the greater the
amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident.
Fig. 128 Driver wearing seat belt
s43s.1.book Page 145 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seat belts146
The speed of the vehicle is, nevertheless, the most important factor. Doubling the
speed of the vehicle from 25 km/h up to 50 km/hour increases the kinetic energy four
times.
The common opinion that it is possible to support your body in a minor accident with
your hands, is incorrect. Even in a collision at only a low speed, the forces acting on the
body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body.
Even if you only drive at a speed within the range from 30 km/hour to 50 km/hour, the
forces which are produced on your body in the event of an accident can easily exceed
10.000 N (Newton). This equals a weight of one tonne (1 000 kg).
In the event of a frontal collision, occupants of the vehicle not wearing a seat belt, are
thrown forward and strike in an uncontrolled way parts of the interior of the vehicle,
such as steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen, page 145, fig. 129 - left. The occu-
pants of a vehicle who have not fastened their seat belts may even be thrown out of
the vehicle. This can result in fatal injuries.
It is also important that rear seat occupants fasten their seat belts as they will otherwise
be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident
A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself
but also for those seated at the front page 145, fig. 129 - right.
Important safety information regarding the use of seat
belts
The correct use of the seat belts considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted,
or chafe against any sharp edges.
It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are
to offer their maximum protection page 147.
No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt
together.
The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you
are correctly seated page 142, “Correct seated position”.
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, keys etc.) as this may be a cause of injuries.
Bulky, loose clothing (e.g. a winter coat over a jacket) does not allow you to
be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts.
It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts (e.g. for
shortening the belts for smaller persons).
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect
and the risk of injury increases.
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may
impair proper operation of the inertia reel page 191, “Seat belts”.
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked by paper or similar objects
otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly.
Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition. If you
find seat belts which have damage to the seat belt webbing, seat belt connec-
tions, to the inertia reels or to the lock, the relevant safety belt must be replaced
by a specialist garage.
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not make an
attempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and
were therefore stretched, must be replaced - this is best done by a specialist
garage. The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspected. The
anchorage points for the belts should also be checked.
In certain countries it is possible to use seat belts which differ in terms of
their operation from the seat belts which are described on the pages which
follow.
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 146 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seat belts 147
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
How are seat belts correctly fastened?
Fastening three-point seat belts
Fasten your seat belt before starting!
Fig. 130 Routing of webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt
– Correctly adjust the front seat and the head restraint before fastening your seat belt
page 70.
– Slowly pull the belt webbing at the tongue of the lock over your chest and pelvis
.
– Insert the tongue of the lock into the seat belt buckle belonging to the seat until it
is heard to lock in place.
– Pull on the belt to check that it has also reliably engaged in the lock.
Each three-point seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel. This inertia reel offers you
complete freedom of movement if the belt is unreeled slowly. If the brakes are applied
suddenly, the inertia reel will block. It also blocks the belts when the car accelerates,
when driving uphill and when cornering.
Expectant mothers must also wear the seat belt .
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across your neck but must
run approximately over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the
chest. The lap part of the belt must run across the hip and must never be routed
across the stomach. It must always fit snugly fig. 130 - left. Adjust the belt
webbing as required.
The lap part of the belt should be positioned as low as possible at the pelvis
of an expectant mother in order to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower
abdomen fig. 130 - right.
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
Only insert the lock tongue into the lock which is the correct one for your
seat. This will affect the protection which the belt offers and increase the risk of
an injury.
Seat belt height adjuster
The seat belt height adjuster makes it possible for you to adapt the routing of the three-
point seat belt in the area of the shoulder to match your body size.
– Move the height adjuster in the desired direction up or down fig. 131.
– Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly
locked in place.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 131 Front seat: Seat belt height
adjuster
s43s.1.book Page 147 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seat belts148
WARNING
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is
positioned approximately across the middle of your shoulder - on no account
across your neck.
Note
It is also possible to adapt the routing of the belt webbing at the front seats by adjusting
the height of the seat.
Taking seat belts off
– Press the red button in the belt lock fig. 132. The spring force causes the tongue
of the lock to jump out.
– Guide the belt back with your hand to enable the inertia reel to wind up the belt
webbing more easily.
A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to
get hold of.
Three-point safety belt for the middle rear seat
Your car is equipped as standard with the three-point seat belt in the middle rear seat.
It is used in the same way as the three-point seat belts on the left and right (at front and
rear).
WARNING
The three-point safety belt for the rear middle seat can only fulfil its function
reliably when the backrests are correctly locked into position page 72.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the
belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat belts, in addition
to the protection afforded by the airbag system.
The three-point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision
of a certain severity. The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not
fastened.
The belt tensioner is deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity. A
powder charge is ignited in the inertia reels during deployment. The belt webbing is
pulled into the inertia reels by a mechanical system and the belt is tensioned.
The belt tensioners are not activated in case of minor frontal and rear-end collisions,
in the case of vehicle rollover or accidents, through which no long delays are incurred
to the vehicle. In the case of a side collision, only the belt tensioner of the front seat on
the side on which the collision takes place is deployed.
WARNING
Any work on the system including removal and installation of system
components because of other repair work, must only be carried out by a
specialist garage.
The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single accident.
If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace the
entire system.
The Owner's Manual must also be handed over to the new owner if the
vehicle is sold.
Note
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an indica-
tion of a fire in the vehicle.
Fig. 132 Releasing lock tongue from
belt lock
s43s.1.book Page 148 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Seat belts 149
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
It is essential to pay attention to relevant safety regulations if the vehicle or indi-
vidual parts of the system are scrapped. Specialist garages are familiar with these regu-
lations and will be able to provide you with detailed information in this respect.
When disposing of vehicle or parts of the system, it is important to comply with the
national legal requirements.
s43s.1.book Page 149 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system150
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
General information on the airbag system
The front airbag system is complementary to the three-point seat belts and offers addi-
tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and passenger in the event
of a frontal collision.
In the case of a violent side crash, the side* and head airbags* reduce the risk of inju-
ries to the occupants on the side of the collision .
The airbag system is only functional after the ignition has been switched on.
The operational readiness of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
indicator light comes on for a few seconds each time the ignition is switched on.
The airbag system (according to vehicle equipment) consists of:
an electronic control unit,
front airbag for the driver and the front seat passenger*,
side airbags*,
head airbags*,
an airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster,
a front passenger airbag switch* page 157,
an indicator light for a switched off front seat passenger airbag* in the middle of
the dash panel page 157.
A fault in the airbag system exists if:
the airbag indicator light does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
the warning light does not go out after about 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
the airbag indicator light goes out and comes on again after the ignition is switched
on,
the airbag indicator light comes on or flickers when driving,
an airbag indicator light showing a switched-off front passenger airbag* in the
middle of the dash panel flashes.
WARNING
To enable the occupants of a vehicle to be protected with the greatest
possible effect when the airbag is deployed, the front seats must be
page 142, “Correct seated position” correctly adjusted to match the body
size of the occupant.
If you do not fasten the seat belts when driving, lean too far forward or
adopt an incorrect seated position, you are exposing yourself to increased risk
of injury in the event of an accident.
Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialist garage if a fault
exists. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in the event of
an accident.
No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
It is prohibited to manipulate individual parts of the airbag system as this
might result in the airbag being deployed.
The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one acci-
dent. The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been deployed.
The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life.
If you sell your car, please hand over the complete vehicle documentation to
the new owener. Please note that the documents relating to the possibility of
deactivating the front passenger airbag are also part of the vehicle documents!
If the vehicle or individual parts of the airbag system are scrapped, it is
essential to observe the relevant safety precautions. The authorised Škoda
Service Partners are familiar with these regulations.
When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system, it is important to
comply with the national legal requirements.
s43s.1.book Page 150 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system 151
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
When are the airbags deployed?
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and front passenger airbag
are deployed in the event of a violent frontal collision.
In the case of a violent side collision, the side airbag* on the side of the vehicle at
which the collision occurs, is deployed together with the relevant head airbag*.
In special cases, the front as well as the relevant side and head airbags may be
deployed together.
The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions, in the
case of rear-end collisions and vehicle rollover.
Deployment factors
It is not possible to state globally which deployment conditions apply to the airbag
system in every situation as the circumstances which exist in the case of accidents vary
greatly. An important role in this case is played by factors such as the type of object
against which the vehicle impacts (hard, soft), the angle of impact, the relative speed
during the accident etc.
A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs
during a collision. The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the
relevant restraint system. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured
during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the
control unit, the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe
damage to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The airbags are not deployed if:
ignition off,
a minor frontal collision,
a minor side collision,
a rear-end collision,
Rollover of the vehicle.
Note
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed:
The interior lighting comes on (if the switch for the interior light is in the door
contact position),
The hazard warning light is switched on,
All the doors are unlocked,
the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
Front airbags
Description of the front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belt!
Fig. 133 Driver airbag in the steering wheel / front passenger airbag in the dash panel
The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel fig. 133 - left. The front
airbag for the front passenger* is housed in the dash panel above the storage compart-
ment fig. 133 - right. The installation positions are each marked with the “AIRBAG”
logo.
The front airbag system, in combination with three-point safety belts, offers additional
protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger in the event of
a frontal collision of major severity page 152.
The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt, but is part of the complete passive
vehicle safety concept. Please note that an airbag can only offer you optimal
protection in combination with a seat belt which is fastened.
s43s.1.book Page 151 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system152
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to also
hold the driver and front passenger in a correct seated position in the event of a frontal
collision so as to enable the front airbags to offer the maximum protection.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by
law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection page 145, “Why seat
belts?”.
Note
The dash panel must be replaced after the front passenger airbag has been
deployed.
Function of the front airbags
Risk of injury to the head and chest area is reduced by fully inflated
airbags.
The airbag system is designed in such a way that the driver and the front passenger
airbag* are deployed in the event of a frontal collision of major severity.
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are deployed together.
If the airbags are deployed, the airbags are filled with a propellant gas and inflated in
front of the driver and front passenger fig. 134. The airbags inflate in fractions of a
second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the
event of an accident. The forward movement of the driver and of the front passenger
is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury
to head and chest is thus reduced.
The specially developed airbag allows the gas to flow out of the inflated airbag in a
controlled manner (depending on the load of the particular car occupant) in order to
cushion head and chest areas. The airbag then deflates subsequently to such an extent,
after an accident, to again provide a clear view forward.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered, which can lead to injuries if the
sitting position or seated position is not correct page 152.
Important safety information regarding the front airbag system
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a
proper restraint system. If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident, the
child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries!
For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of
at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel fig. 135. Not main-
taining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able
to properly protect you - hazard! The front seats and the head restraints must
always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant.
It is essential to always switch off page 157, “Deactivating an airbag” the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
Fig. 134 Inflated airbags
Fig. 135 Safe distance to
steering wheel
s43s.1.book Page 152 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system 153
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries
if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the
appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
There must not by any further persons, animals or objects positioned
between the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag.
The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash panel
on the passenger side must not be stuck onto, covered or modified in any other
way. These parts should only be cleaned with a dry cloth or a cloth moistened
with water. No objects such as cup holders, mobile phone mounts, etc. may be
attached to the covers of the airbag modules or be located within the imme-
diate area.
No modifications of any kind may be made to parts of the airbag system.
Any work on the airbag system including installing and removing system
components because of other repair work (e.g. removing the steering wheel)
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Never carry out changes on the front bumper or on the body.
Never place any objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module
in the dash panel.
Side airbags*
Description of side airbags
The side airbag together with the head airbag offers enhanced occu-
pant protection in the event of a side collision.
The front side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front
seats fig. 136.
The side airbag system in combination with the three-point seat belts, offers additional
protection for the upper area of the body (chest, stomach and pelvis) of the occupants
of the vehicle in the event of severe side collisions page 154.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to also
hold the occupents of the front or rear exterior seats in a correct seated position in the
event of a side collision so as to enable the side airbag to offer the maximum protec-
tion.
You should therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by
law, but also for safety reasons and for your own protection.
Each time the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag* and the front belt tensioner
on the side of the car on which the collision occures, are automatically deployed at the
same time in order to provide the occupant with enhanced protection.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 136 Installation position of side
airbag in driver seat
s43s.1.book Page 153 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system154
Function of the side airbags
Risk of injury to the upper part of the body is reduced by fully inflated
side airbags.
When the side airbags are deployed, the head airbag* and the belt tensioner are also
automatically deployed on the relevant side fig. 137.
If an airbag is deployed, the airbag is filled with gas. The airbags inflate in fractions of a
second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the
event of an accident.
A grey white, non harmful gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly
normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle.
The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and
the risk of injury to the entire upper body (chest, stomach and pelvis) is reduced on the
side facing the door.
Important safety information on the side airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
It is essential to always switch off page 157, “Deactivating an airbag” the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries
if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the
appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side
airbag. You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident. This applies
in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child
safety seat page 161, “Child safety and side airbag*”.
If children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling, they may be
exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This can result
in serious injuries page 159, “What you should know about transporting
children!”.
There must not be any further persons, animals as well as objects posi-
tioned between the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag. No
accessories, such as a can holder, should be attached to the doors.
The airbag control unit operates together with the pressure sensors, which
are attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried
out at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional installa-
tion of loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the
operation of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags will not function properly, if
the sensors cannot measure the increasing air pressure inside the doors,
because the air can escape through large, non-sealed openings in the door
panel.
Never drive with removed inner door panels.
Never drive, if parts of the inner door panel have been removed and the
remaining openings have not been properly sealed.
Never drive, if the loudspeakers in the doors have been removed, only if
the loudspeaker openings have been properly sealed.
Always make sure that the openings are covered or filled, if additional
loudspeakers or other equipment parts are installed in the inner door
panels.
Fig. 137 Inflated side airbag
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 154 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system 155
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Always work with an authorised Škoda dealer or have it carried out by a
competent specialist workshop.
Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
Ensure that there are no excessive forces, such as violent knocks, kicks etc.,
impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged.
The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case!
Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passenger
seats must only be of the type expressly authorised by Škoda Auto. In view of
the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of non-
approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the protective
function of the side airbag.
Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag module
must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage.
The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage, cracks
or deep scratches. It is not permissible to use force in order to open the
modules.
Any work on the side airbag system including removing and installing
system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing seats) must
only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Head airbags*
Description of the head airbags
The head airbag together with the side airbag offers enhanced occu-
pant protection in the event of a side collision.
The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the
car fig. 138. The installation positions are each marked with the “AIRBAG” logo.
The head airbag together with the three-point seat belts and the side airbags, offers
additional protection for the head and neck area of the occupants in the event of a side
collision of major severity page 156.
Apart from their normal protective function, a further task of the seat belts is to also
hold the driver and the occupants in a correct seated position in the event of a side
collision so as to enable the head airbags to offer the maximum protection. You should
therefore always fasten the seat belts, not only because this is required by law, but also
for safety reasons and for your own protection page 145, “Why seat belts?”.
Together with other elements (such as cross bars in the seats, stable vehicle structure)
the head airbags are the consequent further development of occupant protection in
the case of side collisions.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 138 Installation position of the
head airbags
s43s.1.book Page 155 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system156
Function of the head airbags
The risk of injury to the head and neck area is reduced in the event of a
side collision by fully inflated head airbags.
In the case of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant
side airbag fig. 139 and the belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the acci-
dent occurs.
If the system is deployed, the airbags are filled with propellant gas and extend over the
entire area of the side window including the door pillar fig. 139.
The protection offered by the head airbags is thus available simultaneously both to the
front occupants of the car seated on the side on which the accident occurs, as well as
to the rear occupants. Any impact of the head against parts of the interior or objects
outside of the car, is cushioned by the inflated head airbag. The reduction in any
impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any movements of the head addi-
tionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area. The head airbag also offers addi-
tional protection in the case of an offset impact by covering the front door pillar.
In certain accident situations, the front, side and head airbag are simultaneously
deployed.
The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to
offer that additional protection in the event of an accident. A grey white, non harmful
gas is released when airbag is inflated. This is perfectly normal and is not an indication
of a fire in the vehicle.
Important safety information on the head airbag
Correct use of the airbag system considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
It is essential to always switch off page 157, “Deactivating an airbag” the
front passenger airbag when attaching a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel). If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries
if the front passenger airbag is deployed. In certain countries national legal
provisions also require that the side or head passenger airbags be deactivated.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the
appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head airbags
which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly.
Only hang light items of clothing on the clothes hooks to the vehicle. Never
leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing.
In addition, it is not permitted to use clothes hangers for hanging up items of
clothing.
The airbag control unit operates together with the sensors, which are
attached in the front doors. For this reason no adjustments must be carried out
at the doors as well as at the door panels (for example additional installation of
loudspeakers). Resulting damages can have a negative affect on the operation
of the airbag system. All work on the front doors and their panels must only be
carried out by a specialist garage.
There must not be any other persons (e.g. children) or animals between the
car occupant and the deployment area of the head airbag. In addition, none of
the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driving, or
extend their arms and hands out of the window.
The sun visors must not be swivelled to the side windows into the deploy-
ment area of the head airbags if any objects, such as ball-point pens etc. are
attached to them. This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head
airbag is deployed.
Installing impermissible accessories in the area of the head airbags may
considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it
Fig. 139 Inflated head airbag
s43s.1.book Page 156 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system 157
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
being deployed. When the deployed head airbag is inflated, parts of the acces-
sories fitted may in certain circumstances be thrown into the interior of the car
and cause injuries to the occupants page 214, “Accessories, changes and
replacement of parts”.
Any work on the head airbag system including installing and removing
system components because of other repair work (e.g. removing headliner)
must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Deactivating an airbag
Deactivating airbags
If any airbags have been deactivated, switch them on again as soon as
possible so that they are able to again provide their proper protection.
There is the technical means installed within your vehicle to switch off the front, side*
or head* airbag (take out of commission).
This is why you should have the deactivation of the airbags carried out by a specialist
garage.
On vehicles equipped with the switch for deactivation of the airbags, you can deacti-
vate the front passenger airbag by means of this switch page 157.
Deactivation of airbags is envisaged only for particular instances, such as if:
you must in exceptional cases use a child seat on the front passenger seat where
the child has its back to the direction of travel of the vehicle (in some countries this
must be in the direction of travel due to other legal regulations applying) page 159,
“Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats”,
you are not able to maintain the distance of at least 25 cm between middle of
steering wheel and chest, despite the driver seat being correctly adjusted,
special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a
physical disability,
you have installed other seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags).
Monitoring the airbag system
The functionality of the airbag system is also monitored electronically when one airbag
has been switched off.
If the airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment:
The warning light for the airbag system lights up for 4 seconds after switching on
the ignition and then flashes for 12 seconds afterwards in 2 second intervals.
The following situation applies if the airbag has been switched off using the
switch for the airbag* in the storage compartment:
the airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on for about 4 seconds
each time the ignition is switched on,
if the airbags are switched off, this is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by
the lighting up of the indicator light   fig. 140 - right.
Note
Your authorised Škoda Service Partner will be able to advise you whether national
legislation in your country allows airbags in your vehicle to be deactivated, and which
ones.
Switch for the front passenger airbag*
Fig. 140 Storage compartment: Switch for the front passenger airbag / indicator light for a
switched off front seat passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is deactivated with the switch.
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 157 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Airbag system158
Deactivating an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position (OFF) fig. 140.
– Check whether the indicator light   in the middle of the dash panel lights
up when the ignition is switched on fig. 140 - right.
Switching on an airbag
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turn the slot of the airbag switch using the key in the position (ON) fig. 140.
– Check whether the airbag indicator light   in the middle of the dash panel
lights up when the ignition is switched on fig. 140 - right.
The airbag should only be switched off under exceptional circumstances page 157.
Indicator light   (airbag switched off)
The airbag indicator light is located in the middle of the dash panel fig. 140 - right.
If the front passenger airbag is switched off, the warning light comes on about 4
seconds after the ignition is switched on.
There is a system fault present in the airbag switch off if the indicator light
flashes. Please have the car inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switched
off.
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for the airbag deactivation.
If the warning light   (airbag switched off) flashes:
Front passenger airbag is not deployed in the event of an accident!
It is also important to have the system inspected without delay by a
specialist garage.
A
2
A
1
s43s.1.book Page 158 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely 159
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Transporting children safely
What you should know about transporting children!
An introduction to the subject
Accident statistics have revealed that children are generally more safely
transported on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat.
Children younger than 12 years of age should normally travel on the rear seat of the
vehicle (take note of any national legal provisions which differ from this). They should
be secured there by means of a child restraint system or by using the existing seat belts
depending on their age, body size and weight. The child seat should be mounted
behind the front passenger seat for safety reasons.
The physical principle of an accident does, of course, also apply to children
page 145, “The physical principle of a frontal collision”. They differ from adults in
that their muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed. Thus chil-
dren are exposed to increased risk of injury.
Children should be transported by using special child safety seats in order to reduce
this risk of injury.
Use only child safety seats which are officially approved and are suitable for children
and which comply with the ECE-R 44 standard, which classifies child safety seats into
5 groups page 161. Child restraint systems which have been tested for conformity
to ECE-R 44 standard have a non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and
below this the test number) attached to the seat.
We recommend that you use child safety seats from the Škoda genuine accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in Škoda vehicles. They fulfil
the ECE-R 44 standard.
WARNING
Always comply with legal provisions and instructions from the relevant child
safety seat manufacturer when installing and using the child seat page 159.
Note
Any varying national legal regulations take priority over the information provided in
these instructions for use, or stated in this chapter.
Important safety information regarding the use of child safety seats
Correct use of child safety seats considerably reduces the risk of injury!
WARNING
All the occupants of the car - in particular children - must wear a seat belt
when the car is moving.
Children, who are less than 1.50 m in height and who weigh less than 36 kg,
must not use a normal seat belt without a child restraint system otherwise this
may result in injuries to the stomach and neck areas. Comply with the national
legal requirements.
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
You can transport a child safely in a suitable child safety seat page 161,
“Child seat”!
Only one child may be fastened with a seat belt into a child safety seat.
Never leave the child sitting unattended in the seat.
Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life-threatening tempera-
tures in the vehicle.
Never allow your child to be transported in a vehicle without the use of a
suitable restraint system.
Children should also never stand up in a vehicle or kneel on the seats when
the vehicle is moving. In the event of an accident the child will be thrown
through the vehicle and may as a result suffer fatal injuries, and also injure
other occupants.
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle
is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front
s43s.1.book Page 159 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely160
passenger seat if the airbag system deploys in the event of an accident. This can
result in severe or even fatal injuries.
It is important that the belt webbing is properly routed if the seat belts are
to offer their maximum protection page 147, “How are seat belts correctly
fastened?”. Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manu-
facturer of the child safety seat regarding correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor
accidents.
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly. One
should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fittings.
It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when attaching
a child safety seat to the front passenger seat where the child is seated with its
back facing in direction of travel page 157. If this is not done, there is a risk of
the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is
deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also require that the
side and head airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat
Child safety seats should always be attached to the rear seats.
We recommend, for safety reasons, that you always mount a child restraint systems on
the rear seats whenever possible. If you still decide, however, to use a child safety seat
on the front passenger seat then you must pay attention to the following warnings in
connection with the use of the airbag system on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Warning - particular hazard! Never use a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of
travel. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front
passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries,
in the event of it being deployed.
This is also clearly stated on the sticker which is located on the centre
column of the body on the front passenger side fig. 141. The sticker is visible
upon opening the front passenger door. For some countries, the sticker is also
affixed to the sun visor of the front passenger.
It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag when a child
safety seat is nevertheless attached to the front passenger seat where the child
is seated with its back facing in direction of travel page 157, “Deactivating an
airbag”. If this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even
fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed. When transporting a
child on the front passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national
regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
If the front passenger airbag has been switched off by a specialist garage
using the vehicle system tester, the side airbag and the head passenger airbag*
remain switched on. In certain countries national legal provisions require that
besides the front passenger airbag also the side or head passenger airbags are
deactivated. Please comply with any differing national legal regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
If a child safety seat in which the child faces in the direction of travel is used
on the front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be moved back fully.
For vehicles with height adjustable front passenger seat, the seat must be put in
the highest position.
If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed. Have the airbag (or airbags) deactivated if necessary page 157,
“Deactivating an airbag”.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 141 Sticker on the centre column of
the body on the front passenger side.
s43s.1.book Page 160 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely 161
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety and side airbag*
Children must never be seated in the deployment area of the side
airbags and head airbags.
Fig. 142 Seated position of an unprotected child at risk from side airbag / Child properly
protected by safety seat
In the event of a side collision, the side airbags offer the vehicle occupants enhanced
protection.
The side airbags are inflated in fractions of a second in order to be able to provide this
protection page 154, “Function of the side airbags”.
An airbag inflating develops such a strong force that an occupant who has not adopted
an upright seated position may suffer injuries from the airbag or as a result of objects
which are located within the deployment area of the side airbag.
This applies particularly to children if they are not transported in accordance
with legal requirements.
The child is protected when seated in a child safety seat matching its age. Adequate
room is available between the child and the deployment area of the side airbag and
head airbag. The airbag offers optimal protection.
WARNING
It is essential to always switch off page 157 the front passenger airbag
when attaching a child safety seat on the front passenger seat where the child is
seated with its back facing in direction of travel (in some countries also when
the child is facing the direction of travel). If this is not done, there is a risk of the
child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is
deployed. In certain countries national legal provisions also require that the
side and head airbags be deactivated. When transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, please comply with the appropriate national regulations
regarding the use of child safety seats.
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the
side airbag - risk of injury!
Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbag - risk
of injury!
Child seat
Classification of child seats into groups
Only child safety seats which have an official approval and are suitable
for the child, may be used.
ECE-R 44 standard applies to child safety seats. ECE-R means: Economic Commission
for Europe - Regulation.
Child safety seats which have been tested for conformity to ECE-R 44 standard have a
non-detachable test seal (a large E within a circle and below this the test number)
attached to the seat.
Child safety seats are classified in 5 groups:
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 161 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely162
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
Use of child safety seats
An overview of the usefulness of child seats on each of the seats according to the ECE-
R44 standard:
Universal category - seat is suitable for all approved types of child safety seats.
The seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the “ISOFIX*”system.
The divided rear seat - seat can be fitted with fixing eyes for the system “Top
Te t her *” page 165.
Child seats of group 0/0+
The optimal solution for babies of up to about 9 months old weighing up to 10 kg or
babies up to about 18 months old weighing up to 13 kg is a child safety seat which can
be adjusted into the reclining position fig. 143.
In view of the fact that such child seats are installed that the child is seated with its back
facing the direction of travel, they must not be used on the front passenger
seat page 160, “Use of child safety seats on the front passenger seat”.
WARNING
It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags) when
attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel):
in a specialist garage
or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* page 157,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
In certain countries national legal provisions require that besides the front
airbag also the side or head airbags are deactivated. Please comply with any
differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
Group Weight
0 0 - 10 kg page 162
0+ up to 13 kg page 162
1 9 - 18 kg page 163
2 15 - 25 kg page 163
3 22 - 36 kg page 164
Child seat
of the group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seat
outside
Rear seat
middle
0
0+
1
2 and 3
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
U
A
+
A
T
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
U
A
+
A
T
Fig. 143 Child seats of group 0/0+
s43s.1.book Page 162 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely 163
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 1
Child seats in Group 1 are for babies and small children up to 4 years of age with a
weight of between 9 and 18 kilograms. It is best for children in the lower range of this
group, to use a child seat which allows the child to sit with its back to the direction of
travel. It is best for children in the upper range of the Group 0+, to use a child seat
which allows the child to sit fig. 144 in the direction of travel.
Child safety seats in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel,
must not be used on the front passenger seat page 160, “Use of child safety seats on
the front passenger seat”.
WARNING
It is essential to always switch off the front passenger airbag (airbags) when
attaching in exceptional circumstances a child safety seat on the front
passenger seat where the child is seated with its back facing in direction of
travel (in some countries also when the child is facing the direction of travel):
in a specialist garage
or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* page 157,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
In certain countries national legal provisions require that besides the front
airbag also the side or head airbags are deactivated. Please comply with any
differing national legal regulations regarding the use of child safety seats.
If this is not done, a child seated on the front passenger seat may suffer
severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag or airbags are
deployed.
You should have the front passenger airbag (or airbags) reactivated just as
soon as you no longer use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat.
Child safety seats in Group 2
For children up to about 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg the optimal
solution is a child safety seat in combination with the three-point seat belt fig. 145.
WARNING
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats. If
required, the airbag has to be deactivated:
in a specialist garage
or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* page 157,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 144 Child seat with padded table in
Group 1 installed on rear seat bench
facing the direction of travel
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 145 Child seat in Group 2 installed
on the rear seat facing the direction of
travel
s43s.1.book Page 163 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely164
The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle
of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run
across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits
snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if
necessary.
Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Child safety seats in Group 3
For children of about 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg and of a height of
less than 150 cm, the optimal solution is a child safety seat (seat bolster) in combina-
tion with the three-point seat belt fig. 146.
Children of more than 150 cm in height may use the seat belts fitted to the vehicle
without a seat bolster.
WARNING
When transporting a child on the front passenger seat, please comply with
the appropriate national regulations regarding the use of child safety seats. If
required, the airbag has to be deactivated:
in a specialist garage
or by using the switch for the front passenger airbag* page 157,
“Switch for the front passenger airbag*”.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must run approximately across the middle
of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest. It must on no account run
across the neck. The lap part of the seat belt must run across the pelvis and fits
snugly; it must not run over the belly. Tighten the belt webbing over your hip if
necessary.
Please comply with any differing national legal regulations regarding the
use of child safety seats.
Attaching a child seat using the “ISOFIX” system
Fig. 147 Locking eyes (ISOFIX system) / the ISOFIX child seat is pushed into the mounting
funnels
There are two fixing eyes* between the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the front
passenger seat for fixing the “ISOFIX” system child seat in place. The locking eyes on
the rear outside seats are located below the upholstery. The places are marked with
signs with the logo “ISOFIX” fig. 147 - left.
Install child seat
– Open the zip fasteners between the seat cushion and the seat backrest of the rear
exterior seat.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 146 Child seat in Group 3 installed
on the rear seat facing the direction of
travel
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 164 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely 165
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Insert the mounting funnels onto the locking eyes between the seat back-
rest and the seat cushion fig. 147.
– Push the notched arms of the child seat into the locking eyes in direction of arrow
, until they are heard to lock in place fig. 147.
– Pull on both sides of the child seat!
One can mount a child safety seat using the “ISOFIX” system quickly, easily and reliably.
Please pay close attention to instructions from the manufacturer of the child safety
seat when installing and removing the seat.
Child seats fitted with the “ISOFIX” system can only be mounted and fixed in a vehicle
fitted with an “ISOFIX” system when these child seats have been released for this type
of vehicle according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
You can obtain child seats with the “ISOFIX” attachment system from specialist garages
who will also installed it as well.
Complete installation instructions are enclosed with the child safety seat.
WARNING
The locking eyes have just been developed for child safety seats which use
the “ISOFIX” system. You should therefore never attach other child safety seats,
seat belts or objects to the locking eyes - hazard!
Ask an authorised Škoda Service Partner whether a child seat which you
bought for another vehicle is recommended for use in a Škoda before using an
“ISOFIX” system.
Certain child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system can be attached with
standard three-point seat belts. Please pay close attention to instructions from
the manufacturer of the child safety seat when installing and removing the seat.
Note
Child seats which use the “ISOFIX” system are currently available for children
weighing from 9 up to 18 kg. This corresponds to an age range of from 9 months to 4
years.
The child seats can also be fitted with the “Top Tether” system page 165.
Attaching child seat using the “Top Tether” system
IIn certain countries national legal provisions also require the equipment of the rear
seat with fixing eyes for child seat using the “Top Tether” system fig. 148.
Always perform the installation and removal of the child seat using the “Top Tether”
system as stated in the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat.
WARNING
Attach the child seats with the “Top Tether” system only to the points
provided for this purpose fig. 148.
On no account should you equip your vehicle, e.g. mount screws or other
anchorage points.
Pay attention to the important safety information regarding the use of child
seats.
Note
Store the remaining part of the belt for the “Top Tether” system in a textile pocket,
which is located at the child seat.
A
A
A
B
A
1
Fig. 148 Rear seat: Top Tether
s43s.1.book Page 165 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Transporting children safely166
s43s.1.book Page 166 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology 167
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving Tips
Intelligent Technology
Electronic stability programme (ESP)*
General
The ESP aids you in maintaining control of your vehicle in situations in which the
vehicle is driving at its dynamic limits, such as entering a curve fast. The risk of skidding
is reduced and your vehicle thus offers greater driving stability depending on the
conditions of the road surface. The system operates at all speeds.
The following systems are integrated into the electronic stability programme:
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL),
Traction control system (TCS),
active driver-steering recommendation (DSR),
Antilock brake system (ABS),
Brake Assist,
Uphill Start Assist
The ESP system cannot be switched off, only the TCS system can be switched off by
pressing the button fig. 149, the warning light lights up.
Operating principle
The ESP switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The ESP control unit processes data from the individual systems. It also proc-
esses additional measurement data which are supplied by highly sensitive sensors: the
rotational velocity of the vehicle about its vertical axis, the lateral acceleration of the
vehicle, the braking pressure and the steering angle.
The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering
angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behav-
iour of the vehicle. If differences exist, such as the vehicle beginning to skid, the ESP will
automatically brake the appropriate wheel.
The car is stabilised again by the forces which take effect when the wheel is braked.
Intervention into the brake system takes place primarily on the outer front wheel of a
vehicle which tends to oversteer (tendency for the rear of the vehicle to break away)
while occurs this is on the inner rear wheel of a vehicle which tends to understeer
(tendency to shift out of the curve). This braking control cycle is accompanied by
noises.
During an intervention of the system, the warning light flashes in the instrument
cluster page 32.
The ESP operates in combination with the ABS page 171, “Antilock brake system
(ABS)”. If there is a fault in the ABS system, the ESP also does not operate.
The ESP warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the
ESP page 32.
WARNING
It is also not possible for the ESP to overcome the physical limits of the vehicle.
Even if a vehicle fitted with ESP you should still always adapt your style of
driving to the condition of the road surface and the traffic situation. This partic-
ularly applies when driving on slippery and wet roads. The increased safety
Fig. 149 ESP switch
s43s.1.book Page 167 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology168
offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an acci-
dent!
Note
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-free
operation of the ESP. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an unde-
sirable reduction in the engine output.
Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combina-
tion of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ESP page 214, “Accesso-
ries, changes and replacement of parts”.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDL)*
The electronic differential lock prevents an individual wheel from slip-
ping.
Models fitted with ESP are equipped with electronic differential lock (EDL).
General
The EDL makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate
and climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The EDL is activated automatically, that is without any action on the part of the driver.
It monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS sensors. Should
only one drive wheel begin spinning on a slippery surface there will be an appreciable
difference in the speed of the driven wheels. The EDL function brakes the slipping
wheel and the differential transmits a greater driving force to the other driven wheel.
This control process is also accompanied by noises.
Overheating of the brakes
The EDL switches off automatically if unusually severe stresses exist in order to avoid
excessive heat generation in the disc brake on the wheel which is being braked. The
vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not
fitted with EDL.
The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down.
XDL function (only for Octavia RS)
The XDL function is an extension to the electronic differential lock. The XDL function
does not respond to traction, but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast
cornering. An active brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from
spinning. Thus, the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to follow the desired
track.
WARNING
Carefully depress the accelerator when accelerating on uniformly slippery
road surfaces, such as ice and snow. The driven wheels might still spin despite
the EDL and affect the stability of the vehicle - risk of an accident!
You should always adapt your style of driving to the condition of road
surface and to the traffic situation even when your vehicle is fitted with EDL.
The increased safety offered must not tempt you to take greater risks than
otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
If the ABS or ESP warning light comes on, this may also indicate a fault in the EDL.
Please have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible by a specialist garage.
Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combina-
tion of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the EDL page 214, “Accesso-
ries, changes and replacement of parts”.
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 168 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology 169
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning
when accelerating.
General
The TCS makes it much easier, and sometimes at all possible, to start off, accelerate and
climb a steep hill when the conditions of the road surface are unfavourable.
Operating principle
The TCS switches on automatically when the engine is started and then conducts a
self-test. The system monitors the speeds of the driven wheels with the aid of the ABS
sensors. If the wheels are spinning, the force transmitted to the road surface is auto-
matically adapted by reducing the engine speed. The system operates at all speeds.
The TCS operates in combination with the ABS page 171, “Antilock brake system
(ABS)”. The TCS will not function if a fault exists in the ABS system.
The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the
TCS page 32.
During an intervention of the system, the TCS warning light flashes in the instru-
ment cluster page 32.
Switching off
You can switch the TCS off and on again as you wish by pressing the button fig. 150.
The TCS warning light lights up in the instrument cluster when the system is switched
off page 32.
The TCS should normally always be switched on. It may be good practice in certain
exceptional cases, such as when you wish to have wheel slip, to switch off the system.
Examples:
when driving with snow chains,
when driving in deep snow or on a loose surface,
when it is necessary to rock a vehicle when it has become stuck.
then you should switch on the TCS again.
WARNING
You should always adjust your style of driving to the conditions of the road
surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety offered must not tempt
you to take greater risks than otherwise - risk of an accident!
Note
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres in order to achieve problem-free
operation of the TCS. Differing rolling circumferences of the tyres can lead to an unde-
sirable reduction in the engine output.
Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combina-
tion of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the TCS page 214, “Accesso-
ries, changes and replacement of parts”.
Active driver-steering recommendation (DSR)*
Vehicles with ESP are equipped with active driver-steering recommendation (DSR).
This function indicates to the driver in critical situations a steering recommendation in
order to stabilise the vehicle. The active driver-steering recommendation is activated,
for example, on the right and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road
surfaces.
WARNING
Even with this function the vehicle cannot steer itself! The driver is furthermore
responsible for the steering of the vehicle!
Fig. 150 TCS switch
s43s.1.book Page 169 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology170
Brakes
What has a negative effect on braking efficiency?
Wear-and-tear
Wear-and-tear to the brake pads is greatly dependent on the operating conditions of
the vehicle and your style of driving. Particularly if you drive a great deal in towns and
over short distances or if you adopt a sporty style of driving, it may be necessary to
have the thickness of the brake pads inspected at a specialist garage between the
service inspections.
Wet roads or road salt
There may be a certain delay before the brakes take full effect under certain conditions
such as when driving through water, during heavy rain showers or after the vehicle has
been washed in an automatic vehicle wash, since the brake discs and brake pads may
be moist or even have a coating of ice on them in winter. You should dry the brakes as
soon as possible by applying and releasing the brakes several times.
There also may be a certain delay before the full braking efficiency is available when
driving on roads which have been treated with road salt if you have not used the brakes
for some considerable time beforehand. The layer of salt on the brake discs and brake
pads must first be rubbed off when you apply the brakes.
Corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been
parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system.
We recommend cleaning the brake discs by firmly applying the brakes at a fairly high
speed if you do not make much use of the braking system or if surface corrosion is
present .
Faults in the brake surface
If you notice that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake
pedal can be depressed further, it is possible that a brake circuit of the dual-circuit
brake system has failed. Drive, in such cases, to the nearest specialist garage without
delay in order to have the problem rectified. Drive at a reduced speed while on your
way to the dealer and adapt your style of driving to the higher brake pedal pressure
required.
Low brake fluid level
An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system. The level
of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 34, “Brake system ”.
WARNING
Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs
if the traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeop-
ardy.
When retrospectively mounting a front spoiler, solid wheel hubs etc. one
must ensure that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced other-
wise the braking system could run too hot.
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking effi-
ciency until approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run
in” before they develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compen-
sate for this slightly reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the
brake pedal. This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a
future date.
Caution
Never allow the brakes to rub by applying slight pressure if you do not wish to brake
the vehicle. This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking
distance and excessive wear.
Before negotiating a steep downhill section, please reduce your speed, shift down
into the next lower gear (manual gearbox) or select a lower driving stage (automatic
gearbox). This enables you to make full use of the braking power of the vehicle and
reduces the strain on the brakes. Any additional braking should be done intermittently,
not continuously.
Note
The brake light flashes automatically in case of an emergency braking at speeds greater
than 60 km/h or with the intervention of the ABS, which lasts longer than 1.5 seconds.
After the speed was reduced below 10 km/h or the vehicle was stopped, the brake light
stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on. The hazard warning
light system is switched off automatically after accelerating or driving off again.
s43s.1.book Page 170 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology 171
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Brake booster
The brake booster boosts the pressure which you generate with the brake pedal. The
necessary pressure is only generated when the engine is running.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary.
The brake booster only operates when the engine is running. Greater phys-
ical effort for braking is required when engine is switched off. Because if you do
not stop as normal, this can cause an accident and severe injuries.
Antilock brake system (ABS)
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking.
General
The ABS contributes significantly to enhancing the active safety of your vehicle.
Compared to a vehicle not fitted with the ABS brake system, you are able to retain
optimal steering ability even during a full brake application on a slippery road surface
because the wheels do not lock up.
You must not expect, however, that the braking distance will be shorter under all
circumstances as a result of the ABS. The braking distance for example on gravel and
fresh snow, when you should anyway be driving slowly and cautiously, will be longer.
Operating principle
The brake pressure will be reduced on a wheel which is rotating at a speed which is too
low for the speed of the vehicle and tending to lock. This control cycle is noticeable
from a pulsating movement of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises.
This is consciously intended to provide the driver with the information that the wheels
are tending to lock (ABS control range). You must always keep the brake pedal
depressed to enable the ABS to optimally control the brake application in this braking
range. Never interrupt the application of the brakes!
WARNING
The ABS can also not overcome the physical limits of your vehicle. Please do
not forget this, particularly when driving on icy or wet road surfaces. If the ABS
is operating within the control range, adapt your speed immediately to the
conditions of the road surface and the traffic situation. The increased safety
offered by the ABS must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise -
risk of an accident!
The normal braking system is still fully functional if there is an ABS fault.
Visit a specialist garage as quickly as possible and adjust your style of driving to
take account of the ABS fault in the meantime since you will not know the extent
of the fault and in how far the braking efficiency is affected.
Note
A warning light comes on if a fault occurs in the ABS system page 33.
Changes to vehicle (e.g. on engine, on the brakes, on chassis or another combina-
tion of tyres and wheels) can influence the function of the ABS page 214, “Accesso-
ries, changes and replacement of parts”.
Brake Assist*
During a severe brake application (e.g. if a hazard exists), the Brake Assist increases the
braking force and thus makes it possible to rapidly produce the pressure required in
the brake system.
The majority of drivers do apply the brakes in good time in dangerous situations, but
do not depress the brake pedal with sufficient pressure. Consequently, it is not possible
for the vehicle to achieve its maximum deceleration and the vehicle covers a greater
distance than necessary.
The Brake Assist is activated by the very quick operation of the brake pedal. In such
cases, a much greater braking pressure exists than during a normal brake application.
This makes it possible, even with a relatively low resistance of the brake pedal, to
produce an adequate pressure in the brake system in the shortest possible time, which
is required for maximum deceleration of the vehicle. You must apply the brake pedal
firmly and hold it in this position in order to achieve the shortest possible braking
distance.
s43s.1.book Page 171 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology172
The Brake Assist is able to help you achieve a shorter braking distance in emergency
situations by rapidly producing the pressure required in the brake system. It fully
exploits the attributes of the ABS. After you release the brake pedal, the function of the
Brake Assist is automatically switched off and the brakes operate in the normal way.
The Brake Assist is part of the ESP system. If a fault occurs in the ESP, the Brake Assist
function is also not available. Further information on the ESP page 167.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is also not able to overcome the physical limits of your
vehicle in terms of the braking distance required.
Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situ-
ation.
The increased safety offered by the Brake Assist must not tempt you to take
a greater safety risk than otherwise.
Uphill Start Assist*
The uphill start assist makes it easier to start off on steep hills. The system assists a start
off by holding the brake pressure produced by the brake pedal actuation for approx. 2
seconds after releasing the brake pedal. The driver can therefore move his foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and start off on the slope, without having to
actuate the handbrake. The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the
accelerator pedal. If the vehicle does not start off within 2 seconds, it starts to roll back.
The uphill start assist is active as of a 5 % slope, if the driver door is closed. It is always
active on slopes when in forward or reverse start off. When driving downhill, it is
inactive.
Electromechanical power steering
The power steering enables you to steer the vehicle with less physical force.
With the electromechanical power steering, the steering assist is automatically
adapted to the speed and to the steering angle.
It is still possible to fully steer the vehicle if the power steering fails or if the engine is
not running (vehicle being towed in). The only difference is that greater physical effort
is required.
If there is a fault in the power steering, the warning light or lights up in the instru-
ment cluster page 30.
WARNING
Contact your specialist garage if the power steering is defective.
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure monitoring system compares with the aid of the ABS sensors the
speed and also the rolling circumference of the individual wheels. If the rolling circum-
ference of a wheel is changed, the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster
page 33 and an audible signal sounds. The rolling circumference of the tyre can
change if:
the tyre inflation pressure is too low,
the structure of the tyre is damaged,
the vehicle is loaded on one side,
the wheels of an axle are loaded heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or when driving
uphill or downhill),
snow chains are mounted,
the temporary spare wheel is mounted,
Fig. 151 Button for setting the tyre
inflation pressure control value
s43s.1.book Page 172 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology 173
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
one wheel per axle was changed.
Basic setting of the system
After changing the tyre inflation pressures, after changing one or several wheels, the
position of a wheel on the vehicle (e.g. exchanging the wheels between the axles) or
when the warning light lights up while driving, a basic setting of the system must be
carried out as follows.
Inflate all tyres to the specified inflation pressure page 208.
Switch on the ignition.
Press button page 172, fig. 151 for more than 2 seconds. While pressing
the button, the warning light lights up. At the same time the memory of the system
is erased and the new calibration is started, which is confirmed with an audible signal
and then the warning light goes out.
If the warning light does not go out after the basic setting, there is a fault in the
system. Have the vehicle inspected by your nearest specialist garage.
Warning light lights up
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least one wheel is insufficiently inflated in comparison
to the stored basic value, the warning light lights up.
Warning light flashes
If the warning light flashes, there is a system fault. Have the vehicle inspected by your
nearest specialist garage.
WARNING
When the warning light lights up, immediately reduce the speed and
avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres. Please stop the vehicle without
delay at the nearest possible stop and inspect the tyres and their inflation pres-
sures.
The driver is responsible for the correct tyre inflation pressures. For this
reason, the tyre inflation pressures must be checked regularly.
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.
The tyre pressure monitoring system does not take away the responsibility
from the driver for the correct tyre inflation pressure.
Note
The tyre pressure monitoring system:
does not replace the regular tyre inflation pressure control, because the system
cannot detect an even pressure loss,
cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss, e.g. in case of sudden
tyre damage. In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill without sudden
steering movements and without sharp braking.
In order to ensure a proper functioning of the tyre inflation pressure-control
system, it is necessary to carry out the basic setting again every 10 000 km or 1x a
year.
Diesel particle filter* (diesel engine)
In the diesel particle filter the resulting soot particles are collected and
burnt during the combustion of diesel fuel.
Code 7GG, 7MB or 7MG on the vehicle data sticker, see fig. 152, indicates that your
vehicle is equipped with a diesel particle filter. The vehicle data sticker is located on
the floor of the luggage compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The diesel particle filter filters the soot particles completely from the exhaust. The soot
is collected in the diesel particle filter and burnt regularly. To assist this procedure, we
recommend not to drive regularly over short distances.

Fig. 152 Vehicle data sticker
s43s.1.book Page 173 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Intelligent Technology174
If the diesel particle filter is clogged or there is a fault, it is indicated by the warning light
.
WARNING
The diesel particle filter achieves very high temperatures. Therefore do not
park at points where the hot filter comes into direct contact with dry grass or
other combustible materials - risk of fire!
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might
ignite - risk of fire.
Note
When using diesel fuel with high sulphur content the life of the diesel particle filter
is clearly reduced. A specialist garage will be able to tell you which countries use only
diesel fuel with high sulphur content.
s43s.1.book Page 174 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment 175
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving and the Environment
The first 1 500 kilometres and then afterwards
A new engine
The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres.
Up to 1 000 kilometres
– Do not drive faster than 3/4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use, that is 3/4 of
the maximum permissible engine speed.
– Do not use full throttle.
– Avoid high engine revolutions.
– Do not tow a trailer.
From 1 000 up to 1 500 kilometres
– Increase the power output of the engine gradually up to the full speed of the gear
engaged, that is up to the maximum permissible engine revolutions.
During the first operating hours the engine has higher internal friction than later until
all of the moving parts have harmonized. The driving style which you adopt during the
first approx.1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the success of running in your
vehicle.
You should not drive at unnecessarily high engine revolutions even after the
running-in period is complete. The maximum permissible engine speed is marked by
the beginning of the red zone on the scale of the revolutions counter. Shift up into the
next higher gear on a vehicle fitted with manual gearbox before the red zone is
reached. Extremely high engine revolutions are automatically governed, by the way.
For a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox the converse situation also applies: Do not
drive at engine revolutions which are too low. Shift down as soon as the engine is no
longer running smoothly.
Caution
All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal
operating temperature. Never rev up an engine which is cold, neither when the vehicle
is stationary nor when driving in individual gears.
For the sake of the environment
Not driving at unnecessarily high engine revolutions and shifting to a higher gear as
early as possible are ways to minimise fuel consumption and operating noise levels
and protects the environment.
New tyres
New tyres have to be “run in” since they do not offer optimal grip at first. You should
take account of this fact for the first 500 kilometres and drive particularly carefully.
New brake pads
Allow for the fact that new brake pads do not achieve their full braking efficiency until
approximately 200 kilometres. New brake pads must be first “run in” before they
develop their optimal friction force. You can, however, compensate for this slightly
reduced braking force by increasing the pressure on the brake pedal.
This guideline also applies to any new brake pads installed at a future date.
During the running-in period, you should avoid excessive stresses on the brakes. This
includes, for example, violent braking, particularly from very high speeds, and also
when crossing mountain passes.
s43s.1.book Page 175 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment176
Catalytic converter
Proper operation of the emission control system (catalytic converter) is
of major significance for driving your vehicle in an environmentally
conscious way.
Please refer to the following guidelines:
– For vehicles with petrol engine only refuel with unleaded petrol page 192,
“Grades of petrol”.
– Never run the fuel tank completely empty.
– Do not switch off the ignition while you are driving the vehicle.
– Do not pour too much oil into the engine page 199, “Replenishing engine oil”.
– Do not tow-start the vehicle over a distance of more than 50 metres page 222,
“Tow-starting and towing vehicle”.
If you drive your vehicle in a country in which unleaded petrol is not available, you
must have the catalytic converter replaced later when driving the vehicle into a country
in which use of a catalytic converter is mandatory.
WARNING
In view of the high temperatures which may be produced in the catalytic
converter, one should always park a vehicle in such a way that the catalytic
converter cannot come into contact with easily flammable materials below the
vehicle - a risk of fire!
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents
for the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat shields. Such substances
might ignite when driving - risk of fire!
Caution
On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely
empty. An irregular fuel supply can result in poor ignition or misfiring. Unburnt fuel
may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic converter.
Filling the tank even only once with leaded petrol will result in the catalytic
converter being destroyed.
If you detect misfiring, a drop in performance or irregular engine running when
driving, reduce your speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected by the nearest
specialist garage. The symptoms described may be caused by a fault in the ignition
system. Unburnt fuel may get into the exhaust system and damage the catalytic
converter.
For the sake of the environment
Even if the exhaust system is operating properly, a sulphur-like exhaust odour may be
produced under certain operating conditions of the engine. This depends on the
sulphur content of the fuel. It is often sufficient to refuel with unleaded premium-grade
petrol of a different brand or at a different filling station.
Driving in an economical and environmentally
conscious manner
General
Your personal style of driving is a major factor.
Your fuel consumption, any pollution of the environmental and the wear-and-tear to
the engine, brakes and tyres, depend essentially on three factors:
your personal style of driving,
the conditions under which your vehicle is operated,
technical aspects.
You can easily improve your fuel economy by 10 - 15 percent by driving in an econom-
ical way with foresight. This section is intended to provide you with a number of tips on
how to protect the environment and at the same time save money.
The fuel consumption can naturally also be influenced by factors which are beyond the
driver's control. It is, for example, normal for the fuel consumption to increase in
winter and under worsened conditions such as poor road conditions, towing a trailer,
etc.
The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle
have already been built into the vehicle at the works. Special attention has been given
to minimising negative effects on the environment. It is necessary to take note of the
s43s.1.book Page 176 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment 177
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and
to maintain their effectiveness.
The optimal engine speed should be obtained when accelerating, in order to avoid a
high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle.
Looking ahead when driving
A vehicle's highest fuel consumption occurs it accelerates.
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily. If you drive with forsight you will not
need to brake so often and will also then not have to accelerate so much. Let your
vehicle coast to a stop, for example, if this is possible, when you see that the next set of
traffic lights is at red.
Shifting gears and saving energy
Shifting up early saves on fuel.
Manual gearbox
– Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear.
– Always shift up into the next higher gear at approx. 2 000 to 2 500 revs.
Automatic gearbox
– Depress the accelerator pedal slowly. Do not depress it beyond the kickdown
position, however.
An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early. You will consume
more fuel if you drive at unnecessarily high revolutions in any given gear.
The fig. 153 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle in the
relevant gears. Fuel consumption in 1st gear is the highest, while that in 5th or 6th gear
is the lowest.
Only depress the accelerator pedal slowly if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic
gearbox in order to automatically select an economic driving programme. You will
achieve good fuel economy by shifting up early and shifting down late.
Note
Also use the information supplied by the multi-functional indicator* page 19.
Avoiding full throttle
Driving more slowly means saving fuel.
Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel consumption but
also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle.
You should avoid exploiting the top speed of your vehicle wherever possible. Fuel
consumption, pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase disproportionally at
high speeds.
The fig. 154 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle. You
will cut your fuel consumption by half if you only make use three-quarters of the
possible top speed of your vehicle.
Fig. 153 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km. and speed in km/h.
Fig. 154 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km. and speed in km/h.
s43s.1.book Page 177 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment178
Reducing idling
Idling also costs fuel.
It is worthwhile switching off the engine in a traffic jam or when waiting at a level
crossing or at traffic lights with a lengthy red phase. Even after just 30 - 40 seconds you
will have saved more fuel than that is needed when you start the engine up again.
If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach its normal operating
temperature. Wear-and-tear and pollutant emissions, though, are particularly high in
the warming-up phase. This is why you should drive off right after starting the engine.
Do avoid high engine revolutions at this time, however.
Regular servicing
A poorly tuned engine consumes an unnecessarily high amount of fuel.
Having your vehicle serviced regularly at a specialist garge enables you to satisfy one
of the requirements for economical motoring even before you set off on your journey.
Keeping your vehicle properly serviced not only has a positive effect on the safety of
your vehicle and maintaining its value, but also saves on fuel.
A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10% higher than
normal.
The foreseen maintenance work should be undertaken exactly according to the
Service schedule by a specialist garage.
Also check the oil level after refueling. Oil consumption is dependent to a consider-
able extent on the load and speed of the engine. Oil consumption could be as high as
0.5 litres/1 000 km depending on your style of driving.
It is quite normal that a new engine has a higher oil consumption at first, and reaches
its lowest level only after a certain running in time. It is therefore not possible to
correctly assess the oil consumption of a new vehicle until after you have driven about
5 000 km.
For the sake of the environment
You can achieve additional improvements in your fuel economy by using high-
lubricity oils.
Check the ground below your vehicle at regular intervals to detect any leakages in
good time. Please have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garge if you find any
stains caused by oil or other fluids on the floor.
Avoid driving short distances
Short distances result in an above-average high fuel consumption.
– Avoid driving a distance of no more than 4 km if the engine is cold.
The engine and catalytic converter must first have reached their optimal operating
temperature in order to effectively reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emissions.
The cold engine vehicle consumes approx. 15 - 20 litres/100 km of fuel immediately
after starting. Fuel consumption drops to 10 litres/100 km after just 1 kilometre. The
engine reaches its operating temperature (outside temperature and engine
dependent) only after about 4 to 10 kilometres and the fuel consumption then stabi-
lizes. You should therefore avoid driving short distances whenever possible.
An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature. The
fig. 155 shows the different fuel consumptions for the same distance, on the one
hand at +20°C and on the other hand at -10°C. Your vehicle has a higher fuel
consumption in winter than in summer.
Fig. 155 Fuel consumption in litres/100
km at different temperatures
s43s.1.book Page 178 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment 179
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Checking tyre inflation pressures
Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel.
Always ensure that your tyres are inflated to the correct pressure at all times. The rolling
resistance will be increased if the tyre filling pressure is too low. This will not only
increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen.
Always check the inflation pressure of the tyres when cold.
Do not drive with winter tyres all year round for this costs about 10 % more fuel.
Winter tyres are also louder.
No unnecessary ballast
Transporting ballast costs fuel.
The fact that every kilogram of extra weight increases your fuel consumption means
that it is worth taking a look in the luggage compartment to avoid transporting any
unnecessary ballast.
It is particularly in town traffic, when one is accelerating quite often, that the vehicle
weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption. A rule of thumb here
is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an increase in fuel consump-
tion of about 1 litre/100 kilometres.
You may frequently also leave a roof rack fitted on just out of convenience, although
you no longer need it. The increased aerodynamic drag of your vehicle causes it to use
about 10% more fuel than normal at a speed of 100 - 120 km/h, even when you are not
carrying a load on the roof.
Saving electricity
Generating electricity costs fuel.
– Switch off electrical components as soon as you no longer need them.
When the engine is running, the alternator generates and supplies electrical power.
The greater the load on the alternator as a result of having a large number of electrical
components switched on, the more fuel will be consumed for operating the
alternator.
Keeping a log of your fuel consumption
If you really wish to keep a close check on your fuel consumption, it is best to enter
the figures in a logbook. This does not take much time but is a very worthwhile exer-
cise. It enables you to detect any change (positive and negative) at an early stage and
to take any appropriate action.
If you find that your fuel consumption is too high, you should reflect on how, where
and in what conditions you have driven the vehicle since you last refuelled.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection has played a major role in the design, selection of materials
and manufacture of your new Škoda. Particular emphasis has been paid to a number
of aspects, including:
Design measures
Joints designed to be easily detached.
Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system.
Improved purity of different classes of materials.
Identification of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation°260.
Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO
2
.
Minimum fuel leakage during accidents.
Reduced noise.
Choice of materials
Extensive use of recyclable material.
Air conditioning filled with CFC-free refrigerant.
No cadmium.
No asbestos.
Reduction in the “vaporisation” of plastics.
Manufacture
Solvent-free cavity protection.
s43s.1.book Page 179 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment180
Solvent-free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant
to the customer.
The use of solvent-free adhesives.
No CFCs used in the production process.
Without use of mercury.
Use of water-soluble paints.
Trade-in and recycling of old cars
Škoda Auto meets the requirements of the brand and its products regarding environ-
ment and ressource protection. All new Škoda vehicles can be utilized up to 95% and
always
15)
be returned. In a lot of countries sufficient trade-in networks have been
created, where you can trade-in your vehicle. After you trade-in your vehicle, you will
receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula-
tions.
Vehicles with special built-on types
Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the
vehicle user, in order to hand over later to the old car user. This ensures the recycling
in accordance with environmental regulations.
Note
Detailed information about the trade-in and recycling of old cars is available from a
Škoda Service Partner.
Motoring abroad
General
Other circumstances may exist abroad.
It is also possible, in certain countries, that the Škoda Service Partner network is limited
or has not been established yet. This is the reason why obtaining certain spare parts
may be somewhat complicated and specialist garage personnel may only be able to
make limited repairs. Škoda Auto in the Czech Republic and relevant importers are
happy to provide information about technical aspects of the vehicle, required mainte-
nance work and possibilities for getting repairs done.
Unleaded petrol
A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol
page 176. The automobile associations can provide you with information regarding
the locations of filling stations which offer unleaded petrol.
Headlight
The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically. It illuminates the side of the
road on which you are driving to a greater extent. If you drive abroad on the other side
of the road, you will dazzle oncoming traffic.
In order to prevent the dazzling of oncoming traffic, it is necessary that an adjustment
of the headlights is carried out by your authorised Škoda Service Partner.
The adaptation of the headlights with Xenon lights* (applies only to vehicles which are
designed for driving on the left and on the right) is performed in the menu Setup
Lights & Vision & Travel mode in the main menu of the information display*
page 22.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
When driving on poor roads and lanes or when driving over kerbstones, steep ramps
etc., you must pay particular attention to ensuring that any low-slung parts of the
vehicle, such as spoiler and exhaust, do not touch the ground and get damaged.
This particularly applies to models with a lowered suspension (sport suspension) and
also when your vehicle is fully laden.
15)
Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements.
s43s.1.book Page 180 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Driving and the Environment 181
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Driving through bodies of water on roads
In order to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving through bodies of water (e.g.
flooded roads), observe the following:
Determine the depth of the water when driving through bodies of water. The water
can reach at the maximum the web on the lower sill of the vehicle fig. 156.
Drive no more than at walking speed. At a higher speed, a water wave can form in
front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the air induction system of
the engine or into other parts of the vehicle.
Never let the vehicle stand in the water, never drive backwards and do not switch
off the engine.
WARNING
Driving through water, mud, sludge etc. can reduce the braking power and
extend the braking distance - risk of accident!
Avoid sudden and severe braking manoeuvres immediately after driving
through bodies of water.
After driving through bodies of water, the brakes must be cleaned and dried
as soon as possible by intermittent braking. Only apply the brakes for the
purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit
this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
Caution
When driving through bodies of water, parts of the vehicle such as the engine,
gearbox, catalytic converter, chassis or electrics can be severely damaged.
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permissible
water level for your vehicle.
Potholes, mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impos-
sible to drive through the body of water.
Do not drive through salt water. The salt can lead to corrosion. Immediately rinse
all the parts of the vehicle, which came into contact with the salt water, with fresh
water.
Note
After driving through a body of water, we recommend that the vehicle is checked by a
specialist garage.
Fig. 156 Crossing bodies of water
s43s.1.book Page 181 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Towing a trailer182
Towing a trailer
Towing a trailer
Technical requirements
The towing device must satisfy certain technical requirements.
Your vehicle is designed primarily for transporting persons and luggage. It can,
however, also be used for towing a trailer - provided certain technical equipment is
fitted.
If your vehicle has already been supplied with a factory-fitted towing device then
everything that is necessary for towing a trailer in technical terms, and in terms of the
law, has already been taken into account.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power socket for the electrical connection between
the vehicle and trailer. If the trailer which you wish to tow has a 7-pin connector, you
can use a suitable adapter
16)
from Škoda original accessories.
This work must be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications if
a towing device is retrofitted.
Authorised Škoda Service Partners are familiar with details relating to retrofitting a
towing device and for any necessary modifications to the cooling system.
WARNING
We recommend that you have the towing device from Škoda original accesso-
ries installed by an authorised Škoda Service Partner. He is familiar with all the
relevant details relating to retrofitting such equipment. There is a risk of an
accident if the towing device is not properly fitted!
General Maintenance
There are a number of points to pay attention to when towing a trailer.
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must on no account be exceeded.
You can negotiate appropriately steeper inclines and descents if you do not make full
use of the permissible trailer load.
The trailer loads specified only apply for altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean sea
level. The fact that the engine power output drops with increasing height due to a
lowering of air pressure and thus the ability to climb, means that the towed weight
must be reduced by 10% for every further increase of 1 000 metres in height above sea
level. The towed weight is the weight of the (laden) vehicle and the (laden) trailer
together. One should take this into account before driving up to higher altitudes.
The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing device
are merely test data for the towing device The data relating to your vehicle, which
is often less than this test data, can be found in your vehicle registration docu-
ments.
Distribution of the load
Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that any heavy items are located as close
as possible to the axle. Secure the items to prevent them slipping.
Tyre inflation pressure
Select the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for that of “fully laden”, page 208.
The inflation pressure of the tyres fitted to the trailer adjust in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
Exterior mirrors
You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic
behind the trailer with the standard rear-view mirrors. Both exterior mirrors should be
attached to folding arms. Adjust the mirrors so that they provide you with an adequate
field of view to the rear.
16)
In some countries the adapter is supplied with the towing device.
s43s.1.book Page 182 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Towing a trailer 183
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Headlights
Before starting off with a hitched trailer, also check the setting of the headlights. Alter
the setting as necessary with the aid of the headlight beam adjuster page 56.
Detachable ball head
The ball rod is detachable on vehicles which feature a factory-fitted towing device. It is
stowed together with separate fitting instructions in the spare wheel well in the luggage
compartment of the vehicle.
Further information on the towing device page 184.
Note
We recommend that you also have your vehicle inspected between service inter-
vals if you tow a trailer frequently.
The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be put on when coupling and decou-
pling the trailer.
Driving Tips
Particular caution is required when towing a trailer.
– Do not, as far as possible, drive with your vehicle unladen and the trailer laden.
– Do not make full use of the legal maximum speeds. This applies in particular to
downhill sections.
– Apply the brakes in good time.
– Keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if the outside temperature is high.
Distribution of weight
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is
laden. Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combina-
tion.
Driving speed
Do not drive faster than 80 km/hour for safety reasons. This also applies for countries
in which higher speeds are allowed.
The fact that the driving stability of the vehicle + trailer combination reduces with
increasing speed means that the legally allowed speed should not be used when there
are unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions, particularly near accident black
spots.
You must always reduce your speed immediately as soon as you detect even just the
slightest swaying of the trailer. On no account attempt to stop the trailer from
“swaying” by accelerating.
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply the
brakes gently at first and then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the
trailer wheels locking. Shift down gears in good time before negotiating a downhill
section to allow the engine to also act as a brake.
Engine overheating
Please keep a check on the coolant temperature gauge if you have to negotiate a
lengthy slope in a low gear at a high engine speed when the outside temperature is
very high page 16, “Coolant temperature gauge”.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves into the right-hand area or even
the red area of the scale, reduce your speed immediately. Stop and switch off the
engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster begins flashing. Wait a few
minutes and check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle page 201,
“Inspecting the coolant level”.
Please refer to the following guidelines page 31, “Coolant temperature/coolant
level ”.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating.
Any increase in the cooling effect of the coolant fan through shifting down a gear and
increasing the engine speed is not possible since the fan speed is independent of the
engine speed. One should also not drop a gear for this reason when towing a trailer as
long as the engine can manage the slope without any drop in speed.
s43s.1.book Page 183 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Towing a trailer184
Detachable towing device*
The detachable ball head of the towing device is stowed in a box for the car tool kit in
the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.
An instruction for correct installation and removal of the ball head of the towing device
is supplied with the ball head.
Inspect the ball head to ensure that it is properly locked each time before setting off.
The inspection is performed by turning the closed locking lever downwards. If the
locking lever can only be turned around a small angle (approx. 5°), the locking mecha-
nism is O.K. After the inspection pull the locking lever back again to its stop. The towing
device must not be used, if it does not wish to close or the locking lever turns slightly
in the closed position.
WARNING
Do not use any aids or tools for installing or removing the ball head. This might
result in damage to the locking mechanism to the extent that the safety of the
towing device is no longer assured - risk of an accident.
Note
Do not carry out any modifications or repairs to the ball head or to any other
components on the towing device.
Contact a specialist garage if you encounter any problems using the device.
Never unlock the ball head with a trailer coupled to it.
You should take off the ball head if you drive without towing a trailer. Inspect
whether the end cover properly seals off the mounting shaft.
Remove the ball head beforehand if you wish to clean your vehicle using a steam
jet. Ensure that the end cover properly seals the mounting shaft.
It is recommended to wear gloves when installing and removing.
Fig. 157 Detachable ball head
s43s.1.book Page 184 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 185
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
General Maintenance
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle
General
Proper care retains the value of your vehicle.
Regular and proper care retains the value of your vehicle. It may also be one of the
requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage and
paint defects on the bodywork.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by your
Škoda dealer. Please follow the instructions for use on the package.
WARNING
Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the
instructions.
Always store care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children - risk
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
Always select environmentally-friendly products when purchasing vehicle care
products.
Do not dispose of the packages with residues of care products in domestic waste.
Care of the exterior of vehicle
Washing the vehicle
Frequent washing protects your vehicle.
The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is
frequent washing and wax treatment. How often you should wash your vehicle
depends on a wide range of factors, such as:
Frequency of use,
The parking situation (garage, below trees etc.),
Season of the year,
Weather conditions,
Environmental influences.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, tree sap, road and industrial dust, tar, soot
particles, road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of
your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive effect can be. High temperatures,
such as those caused by intensive sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
It may therefore be necessary, in certain circumstances, to wash the car once a week.
It may also be sufficient, however, to wash the car once a month followed by appro-
priate wax treatment.
It is essential to also thoroughly wash the underside of your vehicle at the end of the
winter road salting and gritting period.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system can
affect the braking efficiency - risk of accident!
Automatic vehicle wash systems
The paintwork of the vehicle is sufficiently resistant that the vehicle can be washed
normally in automatic vehicle wash plants without any problem. The actual stress to
which the paintwork is subjected, however, depends greatly on the design of the
vehicle wash system, the filtering of the water and the type of washing and care prod-
ucts used. If the paintwork of your vehicle appears mat after being washed or even has
scratches, point this out to the operator of the vehicle wash plant. Use a different
vehicle wash plant, if necessary.
s43s.1.book Page 185 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle186
There are no particular points to note before washing your vehicle in an automatic
vehicle wash system other than the usual precautionary measures (closing the
windows and the sliding/tilting roof etc.).
If you have any particular attached parts fitted to your car - such as spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial - it is best to first of all consult the operator of the car
wash plant.
It is important to degrease the lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers after passing
through the automatic vehicle wash system.
Washing vehicle by hand
It is important to first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse it off as thoroughly
as possible before washing your vehicle by hand.
One should then clean the vehicle using a soft washing sponge, washing glove or a
washing brush and only slight pressure. Work from the top to the bottom - beginning
with the roof. Only place slight pressure on the vehicle paintwork during cleaning Only
use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt.
Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Clean wheels, door sills and similar parts last. Use a second sponge for such areas.
Rinse off the vehicle well after giving it a wash and dry it off using a chamois leather.
WARNING
The ignition should always be switched off when you wash your vehicle -
risk of accident!
Protect your hands and arms from sharp-edged metal parts when you are
cleaning the underfloor, the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims -
risk of cuts.
Caution
Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight - risk of paint damage.
Ensure that the jet of water is not aimed directly at the locking cylinders or at the
door and panel joints if you spray your vehicle in winter down with a hose - risk of
freezing.
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning products
- risk of damage to the surface of paintwork.
For the sake of the environment
Only wash your vehicle at washing bays specifically reserved for this purpose. This
ensures that no water which may be contaminated by oil flows into the sewage system.
It is not even permitted to wash your vehicle in certain areas except at such specific
washing bays.
Washing with a high-pressure cleaner
When you wash your vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, it is essential to comply with
the instructions for use of the cleaning equipment. This applies in particular to the
pressure used and to the spraying distance. Maintain a sufficiently large distance to
soft materials such as rubber hoses or insulation material.
On no account use circular spray nozzles or so-called dirt cutters!
WARNING
It is particularly important that you do not clean tyres with circular spray jets.
Visible but also invisible damage to tyres may occur even at a relatively large
spraying distance and if sprayed only for a short time - risk of accident!
Caution
The water containing wax must be no hotter than 60°C, otherwise the vehicle can be
damaged.
Wax treatment
Good wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful envi-
ronmental influences and minor mechanical damage.
The vehicle must be treated with a high-quality hard wax polish at the latest, when no
more drops form on the clean paintwork.
s43s.1.book Page 186 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 187
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
A new layer of a high-quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean bodywork
after it has dried thoroughly. Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recom-
mend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax.
Caution
Never apply wax to the windows.
Polishing
Polishing is only necessary if the paintwork of your vehicle has become unattractive
and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservers.
You must treat the paintwork with a wax preserver if the polish you use does not
contain any preserving elements page 186.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by your
Škoda dealer.
Caution
You must not treat mat painted parts or plastic with polishing products or hard wax.
Do not polish the paintwork of the vehicle in a dusty environment, otherwise the
paintwork can be scratched.
Chrome parts
First clean the chrome parts with a damp clotch and then polish them with a soft, dry
cloth. If it does not prove to be adequate, use a chrome care product from Škoda orig-
inal accessories.
Caution
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment, otherwise they can be
scratched.
Paint damage
Slight damage to paintwork such as scratches, scuffs or traces of chip damage must be
touched up immediately with paint (Škoda painting pen) before any corrosion can
result. You can of course have this work carried out by authorised Škoda Service Part-
ners.
The authorised Škoda Service Partners have a range of matching touch-up pens or
spray cans available in the colour of your vehicle.
The paint number of the original paintwork of your vehicle is indicated on the vehicle
data sticker page 237.
Any corrosion which has already have formed must be removed thoroughly. Apply a
corrosion protection primer and then the paint to the affected point. You can of
course have this work carried out by authorised Škoda Service Partners.
Plastic parts
External plastic parts are cleaned by normal washing. Plastic parts and synthetic
leather can also be treated with special solvent-free plastic cleaning agents if a
damp cloth is not sufficient. Paint care products are not suitable for plastic parts.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Windows
Only use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. You should not move the ice scraper forward and backward but in one direc-
tion on the window which you are cleaning in order to avoid any damage to the surface
of the glass.
You can best remove residues of rubber, oil, grease, wax or silicone by using a special
window cleaner or a special silicone remover.
You should also clean the windows regularly from the inside.
s43s.1.book Page 187 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle188
Do not use window leathers which you have used to polish the vehicle body to dry off
the windows. Residues of preservatives in the window leather can dirty the window
and reduce visibility.
Do not affix any stickers over the inside of the rear window to avoid damage to the
heating elements of the rear window heater.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by your
Škoda dealer.
Caution
Never remove snow or ice from the glass parts with warm or hot water - risk of forma-
tion of cracks in the glass!
The headlight lenses
Please do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products for cleaning
the front headlights - risk of damage to the plastic lenses. Please use soap and clean
warm water.
Caution
Never wipe the headlights dry and do not use any sharp objects for cleaning the plastic
lenses, this may result in damage to the protective paintwork and consequently in
formation of cracks on the headlight lenses, e.g through effect of chemical products.
Door and window seals
The rubber seals on the doors, boot lid, bonnet and windows remain supple and last
longer if you treat them from time to time with a rubber care product (e.g. with a spray
with silicone-free oil). You also avoid premature wear of the seals and prevent leakages
in this way. It is also easier to open the doors. Rubber seals which are well cared for also
do not stick together in cold winter weather.
Locking cylinder
We recommend that you use the spray from Škoda original accessories with regreasing
and anticorrosive effect for de-icing locking cylinders.
Note
When washing your vehicle, ensure that as little water as possible gets into the locking
cylinders.
Wheels
Steel wheels
You should also thoroughly wash the wheels and wheel trims when giving your vehicle
its regular wash. This prevents any brake dust, dirt and road salt from sticking to the
wheel hubs. You can remove stubborn brake abrasion adhering to the wheels with an
industrial cleaner. Touch up any damage to the paintwork on the wheels before rust is
able to form.
Light alloy wheels
Regular care of light alloy wheels is necessary in order to retain their decorative
appearance over long periods. It is particularly important to remove regularly any road
salt and brake abrasion from light alloy wheels, otherwise the light metal will suffer.
Wash thoroughly and then treat the wheels with a protective product for light alloy
wheels which does not contain any acidic components. We recommend to apply a
hard wax layer onto the wheel hubs every three months. You must not use any prod-
ucts which cause abrasion when treating the wheel hubs. Any damage to the paint
layer on the wheel hubs must be touched up immediately.
We recommend using a preservative from Škoda genuine accessories offered by your
Škoda dealer.
WARNING
One should remember when cleaning the wheels that moisture, ice and road
salt may adversely affect braking efficiency - risk of an accident!
Note
Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance. This may show
itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which,
in certain circumstances, can cause premature wear of the steering. This means it is
necessary to remove the dirt.
s43s.1.book Page 188 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 189
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Underbody protection
The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and mechanical
influences.
One cannot, however, completely rule out damage to the protective layer when
driving so we recommend that you inspect the protective layer on the underside of
your vehicle and on the chassis at certain intervals - this is best done at the beginning
and end of the winter - and to touch up any damaged areas.
The authorised Škoda Service Partners have suitable spray products available as well
as the necessary equipment and are familiar with the instructions for use. It is therefore
best to have such touch-up work or additional corrosion protection measures carried
out by an authorised Škoda Service Partner.
WARNING
Never use additional underbody protection or corrosion-protection agents for
the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, diesel particle filter or heat shields.
When the engine reaches its operating temperature, these substances might
ignite - risk of fire!
Protection of hollow spaces
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by
a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
This wax protection does not require to be inspected or re-treated. Please remove any
small amount of wax which flows out of the cavities at high temperatures with a plastic
scraper and clean the spot using petroleum cleaner.
WARNING
Safety and environmental protection regulations should observed when using
petroleum cleaner to remove wax - a risk of fire!
Engine compartment
Good corrosion protection is very important, particularly in winter when one often
drives over its salt-strewn roads. One should therefore clean the whole engine
compartment before and after the salt spreading period and treat with preservative in
order to prevent the salt from being destructive.
The authorised Škoda Service Partners have the cleaning agents and preservatives
recommended by the manufacturer and also the required equipment.
WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given in the chapter before working
on the engine compartment page 197, “Working in the engine compart-
ment”.
Let the engine cool down before cleaning the engine compartment.
Caution
Engine cleaning may be only be undertaken when the ignition is off.
It is recommended to cover the generator before washing the engine compart-
ment.
For the sake of the environment
The dirty water produced by washing the engine has washed away petrol, and residues
of grease and oil and should therefore be cleaned by an oil separator. This is why
engine washing should only be undertaken in a specialist garage or at a fueling station
(when these are fitted with the required equipment).
Care of the interior of vehicle
Plastic parts, artificial leather and cloths
You can clean plastic parts and artificial leather with a moist cloth. You should only
treat such parts with special solvent-free plastic cleaning and care products it does
prove to be adequate.
s43s.1.book Page 189 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle190
Upholstery cloth and cloth trim on the doors, luggage compartment cover, headliner
etc. are best treated with special cleaning products, using if necessary a dry foam and
a soft sponge or brush.
We recommend using a cleaning product from Škoda genuine accessories offered by
your Škoda dealer.
Caution
Solvent-free cleaners attack the material and can damage it.
Fabric covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean the seat covers moist as this may result in damage to the seat heating
system.
Clean such covers using special agents, for example dry foam.
Natural leather
Natural leather requires quite particular care and attention.
Leather should be treated from time to time according the following guidelines
depending on how much it is used.
Normal cleaning
– Clean soiled areas of the leather with slightly moistened cotton or woollen cloth.
Severe soiling
– Clean severely soiled areas with a cloth dipped in a mild soapy solution (2 spoon-
fuls of natural soap to 1 litre of water).
– Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point and that no water gets
into the stitching of the seams.
– Dry off the leather with a soft, dry cloth.
Removing stains
– Remove fresh stains which are water-based (e.g. coffee, tea, juices, blood etc.)
with an absorbent cloth or household paper or use the cleaner from the care set
for a stain which has already dried in.
– Remove fresh stains on a fat base (e.g. butter, mayonnaise, chocolate etc.) with an
absorbent cloth or household cleaning paper or with the cleaner from the care set
if the stain has not yet penetrated into the surface.
– Use a grease dissolver for grease stains which have dried in.
–Eliminate special stains (e.g. ball-point pens, felt pen, nail varnish, dispersion
paint, shoe cream etc.) with a special stain remover suitable for leather.
Leather care
– Treat the leather every six months with the leather care product available from an
authorised Škoda Service Partner.
– Apply only a small amount of the care product.
– Dry the leather off with a soft cloth
It is best to consult an authorised Škoda Service Partner if you have any questions
regarding cleaning and care of the leather interior in your vehicle.
Caution
You must on no account treat the leather with solvents (e.g. gasoline, turpentine),
floor wax, shoe cream or such like.
Avoid leaving your vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight in order to avoid
bleaching the leather. If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods,
protect the leather from the direct rays of the sun by covering it over.
Sharp-edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners, rivets, sharp-edged
belts may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface.
Note
Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect regularly and each
time after cleaning the leather. The cream nourishes the leather, allows it to breathe
and keeps it supple and also provides moisture. It also creates surface protection.
s43s.1.book Page 190 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Taking care of your vehicle and cleaning the vehicle 191
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Clean the leather every 2 to 3 months, remove fresh soiling each time this occurs.
Remove fresh stains such as those from ball-point pens, ink, lipstick, shoe cream
etc., as quickly as possible.
Care also for the leather dye. Refreshen areas which have lost their colour with a
special coloured leather cream as required.
The leather is a natural material with specific properties. During the use of the
vehicle, minor optical changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers (e. g wrin-
kles or creases as a result of the stress of the covers).
Seat belts
– Keep the seat belts clean!
– Wash seat belts which have become soiled using a mild soapy solution.
– Inspect the seat belts regularly to ensure they are in good condition.
Belt webbing which has become severely soiled may prevent the inertia reel from
reeling up the belt properly.
WARNING
The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning.
Never clean the seat belts chemically as dry cleaning may destroy the fabric.
The seat belts must also not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive
liquids (such as acids etc.).
Seat belts which have damage to the webbing, the connections, the inertia
reel or the lock should be replaced by an authorised Škoda Service Partner.
Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being reeled up.
s43s.1.book Page 191 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuel192
Fuel
Petrol
Grades of petrol
Your vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol, which complies with the
standard EN 228. The individual grades of petrol are distinguished by their octane
number (RON). On the inside of the fuel filler flap, you will find the information
regarding the RON required by your engine page 195, fig. 159 - right.
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol 95/91 RON
Use unleaded petrol 95 RON. You can also use unleaded petrol 91 RON, but this leads
to a slight loss in performance.
If, in case of necessity, the vehicle must be refuelled with petrol of a lower octane
number than the one prescribed, you must continue driving at medium engine speeds
and low engine load. Driving at high engine speeds or a high engine load can severely
damage the engine! Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane
number.
Prescribed fuel - unleaded petrol min. 95 RON
Use unleaded petrol 95 RON.
In case of necessity, you can refuel with petrol 91 RON if petrol 95 RON is not avail-
able. You must continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load.
Driving at high engine speeds or a high engine load can severely damage the engine!
Refuel as soon as possible with petrol of the prescribed octane number.
Even in case of necessity, you must not use petrol of a lower octane number than 91,
otherwise the engine can be severely damaged!
You can find further information on refuelling page 195, “Refuelling”.
Unleaded petrol with higher octane number
You can make unlimited use of unleaded petrol which has a higher octane number
than the one prescribed.
On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 does not result in a noticeable power increase or a
lower fuel consumption.
On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 does not result in a power increase or a lower fuel
consumption.
Caution
All Škoda vehicles with petrol engines are equipped with a catalytic converter and
must be only driven with unleaded petrol. Filling the tank even only once with leaded
petrol will result in the catalytic converter being destroyed!
Only use unleaded petrol which complies with the standard EN 228.
If you use petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed, the engine
can be severely damaged!
Biofuel Ethanol E85*
Ethanol E85*
Only valid for vehicles with 1.6/75°kW MultiFuel engine.
Biofuel Ethanol E85 consists of 85% bioethanol and 15% unleaded petrol complying
with the standard (DIN) EN°228.
Biofuel Ethanol E85 in accordance with the standard (DIN) EN 228 can be mixed in any
desired ratio with unleaded petrol, see Owner's Manual.
Drive the vehicle for at least 5 minutes without interruption, if biofuel Ethanol E85 has
been refuelled, so that the engine control unit can determine the share of the biofuel
in the fuel. During this period do not drive at top speed of your vehicle or high engine
speeds and not at full throttle. During this process decrease the idling speed.
s43s.1.book Page 192 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuel 193
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and fuel
may leak out.
Caution
Even inadvertently filling the fuel tank with another biofuel such as Ethanol°E85
can result in damage to the fuel system.
If you park the car for a lengthy period, fill with petrol complying with (DIN) EN°228,
because Ethanol E85 can contain low quantities of impurities, which can lead to corro-
sion.
For the sake of the environment
If you use Ethanol E85, the CO
2
emission of your vehicle is lowered up to 5%.
Note
When operating with Ethanol E85, the fuel consumption increases by approx 33%,
as a lower quantity of energy is contained in the bioethanol than in unleaded petrol.
Biofuel Ethanol E85 contains only a low quantity of additives in contrast to
unleaded petrol. Therefore we recommend to fill up the tank with unleaded petrol
complying with EN 228 every 15 000 km (e.g. before the oil change) and run it empty,
so that the engine remains clean. Make sure not to use the whole content of the tank
page 195, “Refuelling”.
The interval of 15 000 km applies for the oil change.
Operation in winter
If you use biofuel Ethanol E85 at very low temperatures, it is necessary to preheat the
engine before an engine start.
The power socket for the engine preheating is located in the front bumper next to the
fog light fig. 158.
If an engine preheating is not possible at outside temperatures lower than -10 °C, the
share of unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 must be as high as possible. Thus the
cold start property of the engine is clearly improved.
If there is biofuel Ethanol E85 in the tank and the engine is not preheated, it can lead at
temperatures below -15°C to very poor or no starting of the engine.
For the sake of the environment
The use of engine preheating at temperatures below -10°C has a positive effect on the
fuel consumption and thus on the environment.
The outside temperature Duration of engine preheating
lower than -10 °C we recommend up to 1 hour
lower than -15 °C at least 1 hour
lower than -25 °C at least 2 hour
Fig. 158 MultiFuel - power socket
s43s.1.book Page 193 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuel194
Note
An extension cable used for connecting to the electrical network is located in the
luggage compartment.
Diesel
Diesel fuel
Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel, which complies with the standard
EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria).
Fuel additives
You must not use fuel additives, so-called “flow improvers” (petrol and similar prod-
ucts) in diesel fuel.
You can find information on refuelling page 195, “Refuelling”.
Caution
Therefore, your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel which complies with
the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard ÖNORM C 1590 in
Austria). Filling the tank even only once with diesel fuel which does not comply with
the standard, can result in damage to the engine parts, the lubrication system, the fuel
and exhaust system.
If by mistake you have refuelled with a different fuel other than the diesel fuel
which complies to the above mentioned standards (e.g. petrol), do not start the engine
or switch on the ignition! This can result in severe engine damage! Contact a specialist
garage and have the fuel system of the engine cleaned.
Water which has collected in the fuel filter can result in engine problems.
Your vehicle is not adapted for use of biofuel (RME), therefore this fuel must not be
refuelled and driven. The use of biofuel (RME) can lead to damage to the engine or the
fuel system.
Operation in winter
Winter-grade diesel fuel
A different grade of diesel fuel is available at filling stations in winter than during the
summer. Using “summer-grade diesel fuel” at temperatures below 0°C can result in
operational problems because the diesel becomes viscous as a result of paraffin sepa-
ration.
It is therefore the case that the standard EN 590 (standard DIN 51628 in Germany,
standard ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria) is the diesel fuel class prescribed for certain
periods of the year which can also be purchased at the corresponding time during the
year. “Winter-grade diesel fuel” will still operate properly even at a temperature of -
20°C.
It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels avail-
able have a different temperature characteristic. The authorised Škoda Service Part-
ners and filling stations in the country concerned will be able to provide you with infor-
mation regarding the diesel fuels available.
Prewarming fuel
The vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter prewarming system. This secures operation of a
vehicle using diesel fuel down to an environmental temperature of -25°C.
Caution
It is not permitted to add the various fuel additives on the market, including petrol, to
diesel fuel in order to improve its flow properties.
s43s.1.book Page 194 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuel 195
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Refuelling
Fig. 159 Right rear side of the vehicle: Open fuel filler flap / fuel filler flap with cap unscrewed
The filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked* with the central locking.
Opening the fuel filler cap
– Press in the middle of the left area of the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow
fig. 159.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be unlocked to the left using the
vehicle key (only valid for vehicles which do not have automatic unlocking of the
fuel filler flap).
– Unscrew the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and place the fuel filler cap from above
on the fuel filler flap fig. 159 - right.
Closing fuel filler cap
– Screw on the fuel filler cap by turning it to the right until it is heard to click.
– The fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube must be locked to the right using the vehicle
key (only valid for vehicles which do not have automatic locking of the fuel filler
flap).
– Close the fuel filler flap until it locks.
The correct grade of fuel for your vehicle as well as the tyre size and inflation pressures
are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap. Further information on
fuel page 192.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 55°litres or 60 litres
17)
.
WARNING
Pay attention to any legal requirements if you do carry a spare canister in the
vehicle. We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for
safety reasons. The canister can be damaged in the event of an accident and fuel
may leak out.
Caution
Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system (auxiliary
heating and ventilation) *.
Remove any fuel which has spilled onto the paintwork of your vehicle immediately
- risk of paint damage!
On vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter, never let the fuel tank run completely
empty. An irregular supply of fuel to the engine can result in misfiring and unburnt fuel
may get into the exhaust system, which may result in overheating and damage to the
catalytic converter.
Make sure that the valve is not pressed into the filler tube when inserting the pump
nozzle into the filler tube. Otherwise you are unintentionally filling up the volume,
which in case of heat can cause an expansion of the fuel. This can lead to an overflow
of fuel or damage to parts of the fuel reservoir.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time,
provided the nozzle has been operated properly. Do not continue refuelling - other-
wise the expansion volume is filled up.
A
1
17)
Valid for Octavia Combi 4x4 and Octavia Scout.
s43s.1.book Page 195 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing196
Inspecting and replenishing
Engine compartment
Bonnet remote release
Bonnet remote release
– Pull the unlocking lever below the dash panel on the driver's side fig. 160.
The bonnet jumps out of its lock as a result of the spring force. A locking lever appears
at the same time in the radiator grille.
Opening and closing the bonnet.
Fig. 161 Radiator grille: Locking lever / securing the bonnet with the bonnet support
Opening the bonnet
– Unlock the bonnet fig. 160.
– Ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the
windscreen before opening the bonnet otherwise damage could occur to the
paintwork.
– Pulling on the locking lever in direction of arrow fig. 161 will unlock the
bonnet.
– Grip with the hand under the radiator grille and lift up the bonnet.
– Take the bonnet support out of its holder and set it in the opening designed for
it.
Closing the bonnet
– Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support. Press the bonnet support
into the holder designed to hold it.
– Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of about 20 cm into the lock - bonnet do
not press down on it!
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the
engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam or
coolant has stopped escaping.
For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed when
driving. One should therefore check that the lock has in fact engaged properly
after closing the bonnet.
Stop your vehicle immediately while driving if you notice that the lock is not
properly engaged and close the bonnet properly - risk of an accident!
Caution
Never open the bonnet using the locking lever - danger of causing damage.
Fig. 160 Bonnet release lever
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 196 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 197
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Working in the engine compartment
Particular care is required when carrying out any work in the engine
compartment!
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and fire when working in the engine
compartment, e.g. inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids. For this
reason, it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and
with the general applicable rules of safety. The engine compartment of your car
is a hazardous area .
WARNING
Never open the bonnet if you see that steam or coolant is flowing out of the
engine compartment - risk of scalding! Wait long enough until the steam or
coolant has stopped escaping.
Switch off the engine and pull out the ignition key.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, move the gearshift lever into
Neutral, or if it is fitted with automatic gearbox, move the selector lever into
position P.
Allow the engine to cool down.
Keep children clear of the engine compartment.
Never spill oil and other fluids over the hot engine. Such fluids (e.g. the anti-
freeze contained in the coolant) may ignite!
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system - particularly on the battery.
Never place your hand into the radiator fan as long as the engine is still
warm. The fan might suddenly start running!
Never open the cap of the coolant expansion bottle as long as the engine is
still warm. The cooling system is pressurized!
Cover over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir with a large cloth
when opening it as protection for your face, hands and arms from hot steam or
hot coolant.
Do not let objects, such as e.g cleaning cloth or tools lie in the engine
compartment.
If you wish to work under the vehicle, you must secure the vehicle from
rolling away and support it with suitable supporting blocks; the lifting jack* is
not sufficient for this - risk of injury!
In cases where it be necessary to carry out inspection work when the engine
is running there is an additional risk from rotating parts (e.g. the V-ribbed belt,
alternator, radiator fan) and from the high-voltage ignition system. Please
observe in addition the following:
Never touch the electrical cables of the ignition system.
Absolutely avoid any jewellery, loose items of clothing or long hair from
getting into the rotating parts of the engine - Hazard! Therefore remove any
jewellery beforehand, tie up your hair and wear tight fitting clothing.
Please also comply with the warning instructions stated below when
carrying out any essential work on the fuel system or on the electrical system:
Always separate the car battery from the electrical system.
Do not smoke.
Never carry out any work close to naked flames.
Always keep a working fire extinguisher at hand.
Caution
When replenishing fluids in the engine, always ensure that the fluids are on no account
mixed up. This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage!
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 197 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing198
Overview of the engine compartment
The main inspection points
Fig. 162 Petrol engine 1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI
Coolant expansion bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil filler opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery (below a cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel
engines is practically identical.
Engine oil
Check engine oil level
The dipstick indicates the level of oil in the engine.
Checking the oil level
– Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet in “Working in the engine compartment” on page 197.
– Wait a few minutes and pull out the oil dipstick.
– Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again fully.
– Then withdraw the dipstick again and read off the oil level.
Oil level within range
–You must not top up the oil.
Oil level within range
–You may top up the oil. It is possible that the oil level may then be within range
after doing this.
Oil level within range
–You must top up the oil page 199. It is sufficient, once this is done, to keep the
oil level within range .
A
1
201
A
2
207
A
3
199
A
4
198
A
5
202
A
6
203
Fig. 163 Dipstick
A
A
A
B
A
A
A
C
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 198 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 199
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
It is normal for the engine to consume oil. The oil consumption may be as much as 0.5
l/1 000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you
operate your vehicle. The oil consumption may be slightly higher than this during the
first 5 000 kilometres.
One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals, preferably every time after
the fuel tank is filled or after driving for long stretches.
We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range - but not above this, if
the engine has been operating at high loads, for example during a lengthy motorway
trip during the summer months, towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass.
The warning light in the instrument cluster* will indicate page 30, “Engine oil pres-
sure ” whether the oil level is too low. In this case, check the oil level as soon as
possible. Top up with an appropriate quantity of oil.
Caution
The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range . Danger of damaging
the catalytic converter.
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with oil. Switch the engine off and obtain professional
assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe engine damage.
Note
Engine oil specifications page 237, “Technical Data”.
Replenishing engine oil
– Inspecting the engine oil level page 198.
– Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening.
– Pour in a suitable grade of oil in portions of 0.5 litres page 240, “Engine oil spec-
ifications”.
– Inspect the oil level page 198.
– Carefully screw on the cap of the filler opening and push the dipstick in fully.
WARNING
Avoid dripping oil onto hot parts of the engine when topping up will oil - a
risk of fire!
Read and observe the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
For the sake of the environment
The oil level must on no account extend beyond the range page 198. Oil will
otherwise be drawn in through the crankcase ventilation and may pass through the
exhaust system to atmosphere. The oil may combust in the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals stated in the Service schedule or
according to the service interval indicator page 17, “Service Interval Display”.
WARNING
Only carry out the engine oil change, if you have the required professional
knowledge!
Read and observe the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
First of all, let the engine cool down, wear an eye protection and gloves - risk
of caustic burns due to hot oil.
Caution
You must not pour any additives into the engine oil - risk of engine damage! Damage,
which results from such product, are excluded from the warranty.
For the sake of the environment
You must on no account pour oil into the ground or into the sewage system.
A
A
A
A
A
A
s43s.1.book Page 199 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing200
In view of the problems involved in properly disposing of old oil, the necessary
special tools and the knowledge required for such work, we recommend that you have
the oil and oil filter change carried out by an authorised Škoda Service Partner.
Note
After your skin has come in contact with the oil, you must thoroughly wash your skin.
Cooling system
Coolant
The job of the coolant is to cool the engine.
The cooling system does not require any maintenance under normal operating condi-
tions. The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive of 40 %.
This mixture not only provides antifreeze protection down to -25°C but also protects
the cooling and heating system from corrosion. It also prevents the formation of scale
and significantly increases the boiling point of the coolant.
You must therefore not reduce the concentration of antifreeze agent in the coolant by
adding water, also not during the summer months or in countries with a warm climate.
The concentration of coolant additive in the coolant must be at least 40%.
You can increase the amount of antifreeze in the coolant if a higher concentration of
antifreeze is necessary for climatic reasons but only up to 60% (antifreeze protection
down to approx. -40°C). The antifreeze protection tails off above that concentration.
Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate (e.g. Sweden, Norway, Finland) are
already factory-filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about
-35°C. In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50%.
Coolant
The cooling system is factory-filled with coolant (purple in colour), which complies
with the specification TL-VW 774 G.
We recommend that you use the same coolant additive - G13 (purple in colour) - for
topping up the system.
Please contact an authorised Škoda Service Partner if you have any questions
regarding the coolant or if you wish to fill up with a different coolant.
An authorised Škoda Service Partner can also supply you with the correct coolant addi-
tives.
Coolant capacity
Caution
Other coolant additives may cause operational problems which, in particular,
involves significantly reducing the anticorrosion effect.
Any faults or problems resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant
and, as a consequence of this, result in major engine damage.
Petrol engines Content
1.2/77 kW TSI - EU5 7,7
1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4 7,1
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5 7,7
1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2 7,4
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU4)
8,6
2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5 8,6
Diesel engines Content
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5 8,4
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3 8,4
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4 8,4
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5 8,4
2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5 8,4
s43s.1.book Page 200 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 201
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
On vehicles which are fitted with an independent auxiliary heating and ventilation, the
volume of the coolant is greater by approx. 1 ltr.
Inspecting the coolant level
The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment on the right.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet page 196.
– Check the level of coolant in the coolant expansion bottle fig. 164. The coolant
level when the engine is cold must lie between the (MIN) and (MAX) mark-
ings. The level may also rise slightly above the (MAX) marking when the engine
is warm.
If the coolant level in the reservoir is too low, this is indicated by the warning light in
the instrument cluster page 31, “Coolant temperature/coolant level ”. We never-
theless recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to
time.
Loss of coolant
A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system. You should
not merely top up the coolant in the reservoir. It is also important to have the cooling
system inspected without delay by a specialist garage.
Losses can only occur through the pressure relief in the cap of the coolant expansion
bottle which is completely free of leaks if the coolant boils as a result of overheating
and is forced out of the cooling system.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
One should contact a specialist garage as soon as possible if the source of overheating
itself cannot be determined and removed, since there may be grave damage to the
engine.
Replenishing the coolant
– Switch the engine off.
– Allow the engine to cool down.
– Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion reservoir fig. 164 and
unscrew the cap carefully by turning it to the left .
–Top up the coolant.
– Screw the cap tight until it is heard to lock.
The coolant which you use for replenishing the system, must comply with one specific
specification page 200. Do not use an alternative additive if the coolant additive
G13 is not available in exceptional cases. Just top up the system with water and as soon
as possible arrange adjustment to correct the mixing ratio of water and coolant addi-
tive again by a specialist garage.
Only use fresh coolant for topping up the system.
Do not fill up over the “MAX” marking! Excess coolant which is heated up is forced out
of the cooling system through the pressure relief valve in the cap of the coolant
compensation bottle.
Wait until the engine has cooled down for a system which has suffered a major loss of
coolant before pouring in coolant. This is necessary to avoid engine damage.
Fig. 164 Engine compartment: Coolant
expansion bottle
A
b
A
a
A
a
s43s.1.book Page 201 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing202
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized! Do not open the cap of the coolant
expansion bottle if the engine is still hot - risk of scalding!
The coolant additive and thus all of the coolant is harmful to your health.
Avoid contact with the coolant. Coolant vapours are also harmful to the health.
It is important, therefore, to always safely store any coolant additive in its orig-
inal container out of the reach of children - risk of poisoning!
If any splashes of coolant get into your eyes, rinse out your eyes immedi-
ately with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
You should also consult a doctor without delay if you have inadvertently
swallowed coolant.
Caution
Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible under the
conditions prevailing to top up with coolant. Switch the engine off and obtain
professional assistance from a specialist garage, otherwise it could lead to severe
engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Do not re-use coolant if it is necessary to drain the coolant in the system. It should be
collected and disposed of in compliance with environmental protection regulations.
Radiator fan
The radiator fan may switch on suddenly.
The radiator fan is driven by an electric motor and controlled according to the coolant
temperature.
The radiator fan may continue running for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
switched off - even if the ignition is also off. It may also switch on suddenly after a
certain time, if
the coolant temperature has risen because of an accumulation of heat or
the warm engine compartment is heated up additionally by strong sunlight.
WARNING
You must therefore be aware when working in the engine compartment that the
fan may switch on suddenly - risk of injury!
Brake fluid
Inspecting the brake fluid level
The brake fluid reservoir is located on the left of the engine compartment. The brake
fluid reservoir on right-hand steering models is positioned on the other side of the
engine compartment.
– Switch the engine off.
– Open the bonnet page 196.
– Inspect the brake fluid level in the reservoir fig. 165. The level must be between
the “MIN” and “MAX” markings.
A slight drop in the fluid level results when driving due to normal wear-and-tear and
automatic adjustment of the brake pads, and is perfectly normal.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the fluid level
drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the “MIN” marking. If the
brake fluid level is too low, this is indicated by the warning light page 34, “Brake
system ” lighting up in the instrument cluster. In this case stop immediately and do
not drive any further! Obtain professional assistance.
Fig. 165 Engine compartment: Brake
fluid reservoir
s43s.1.book Page 202 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 203
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
If the fluid level has dropped below the MIN marking, do not drive any
further - risk of accident! Obtain professional assistance.
Replacing brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. This causes the fluid to absorb moisture from the
surrounding air over a period of time. Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the
cause of corrosion in the brake system. The water content also lowers the boiling point
of the brake fluid.
One may only use new genuine brake fluid from Škoda Auto. The brake fluid must
comply with one of the following standards or specifications:
VW 50114
FMVSS 116 DOT4
DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4
We recommend that you have the brake fluid replaced by an authorised Škoda
Service Partner as part of an Inspection Service.
WARNING
Using old brake fluid can result in severe stress on the brakes because of the
formation of vapour bubbles in the brake system. This greatly impairs the
braking efficiency and thus also the safety of your vehicle.
Caution
Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle.
For the sake of the environment
In view of the problems involved with proper disposal of brake fluid, the special tools
and the professional knowledge required, you should have the brake fluid replaced by
a Škoda Service Partner.
Battery
Working on the battery
Fig. 166 Engine compartment: Polyester cover of the vehicle battery / plastic cover of the
vehicle battery
The battery is located in the engine compartment in a polyester cover fig. 166 - left,
or in a plastic cover* fig. 166 - right.
– Open the battery cover in direction of arrow fig. 166 or press the interlock
on the side of the battery cover, fold the cover up and remove the battery.
– The installation of the battery cover takes place in the reverse order.
The edge of the polyester battery cover fig. 166 - left is inserted between the battery
and the side wall of the battery cover when working on the battery.
Removal and installation of the battery is not recommended since it can, under certain
circumstances, lead to major damage. Contact a specialist garage.
There is a risk of injuries, scalding, accidents and burns when carrying out any work on
the battery and on the electrical system. For this reason, it is essential to comply with
the warning instructions stated below and with the general applicable rules of
safety.
WARNING
The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must, therefore, be handled with
the greatest of care. Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection
when handling batteries. Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 203 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing204
lead to conjunctivitis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs. Battery
acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds after contact with the
skin which take a long time to heal. Repeated contact with diluted acids causes
skin diseases (inflammations, ulcers, slin cracks). Acids coming into contact
with water are diluted accompanied by significant development of heat.
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings. Protect the eyes with safety glasses or a shield! There is
the danger of suffering blindness! If any battery electrolyte gets into your eye,
rinse out your eye immediately with clear water for several minutes. Contact a
doctor without delay.
Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as
possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water. Contact a doctor
immediately if you swallow battery electrolyte.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
Hydrogen is released when you charge a battery and a highly explosive gas
mixture is produced. An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during
unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on.
Bridging of the poles will create a short circuit (e.g. through metal objects,
cables). Possible consequences of a short circuit: Melting of lead struts, explo-
sion and burning of the battery, jets of acid spurting out.
It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light, to smoke or to carry out
any activities which produce sparks. Avoid creating sparks when working with
cables and electrical devices. Strong sparking represents a risk of injury.
Before carrying out any work on the electrical system, switch off the engine,
the ignition as well as all electrical components and disconnect the negative
cable (-) on the battery. If you wish to replace a bulb it is sufficient to switch off
the appropriate light.
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns! Replace a frozen battery.
Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk
of explosion and caustic burns!
Never use a battery which is damaged - risk of explosion! Immediately
replace a damaged battery.
Caution
You must only disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched off, otherwise the
electrical system (electronic components) of the vehicle may be damaged. When
disconnecting the battery from the electrical system of the vehicle, first disconnect the
negative terminal (-) of the battery. Then disconnect the positive terminal (+).
When reconnecting the battery, first connect the positive terminal (+) and only
then the negative terminal (-) of the battery. You must on no account connect the
cables wrongly - risk of a cable fire.
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the vehicle body other-
wise damage could occur to the paintwork.
Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the battery housing
from the effects of ultra-violet light.
For the sake of the environment
A removed battery is a special type of waste which is harmful to the environment -
contact your specialist garage regarding disposing of the battery.
Note
Please also refer to the guidelines page 206, also after connecting the battery.
Battery with a two-tone indicator
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 167 The battery: Show
s43s.1.book Page 204 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 205
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
An indicator for the electrolyte level, the so-called magic eye page 204, fig. 167, is
located on the top of the battery. The indicator changes its colour in line with the elec-
trolyte level in the battery.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully knock on
the indicator before carrying out the check.
Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must be
replaced.
Batteries, which are more than 5 years old, must be replaced. We recommend you
have the battery checked or replaced by a specialist garage.
Caution
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will discharge
because certain electrical components consume electricity (e.g. control units) also in
idle state. You can prevent the discharging of the battery by disconnecting the negative
terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low charging current. Please
also refer to the notes when working on the battery in “Working on the battery”
on page 203.
Note
Batteries with two-tone indicator, which are mounted as of factory, are marked
with a code which always begins with 5K0. The exact marking can be e.g.
5K0 915 105 D.
Replacement batteries with two-tone indicator, which were obtained from Škoda
original parts, are marked with the code 000 915 105 Dx, whereby “x” stands for a vari-
able. The exact marking can be e.g. 000 915 105 DB.
Battery with a three-tone indicator
An indicator for the electrolyte level and the charge state, the so-called magic eye
page 204, fig. 167, is located on the top of the battery. The indicator changes its
colour in line with the charge state of and the electrolyte level in the battery.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully knock on
the indicator before carrying out the check.
Green colour - the battery is adequately charged.
Dark colour - the battery has to be charged.
Colourless or yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must be
replaced.
Batteries, which are more than 5 years old, must be replaced. We recommend you
have the battery checked or replaced by a specialist garage.
Caution
If the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks, the battery will discharge
because certain electrical components consume electricity (e.g. control units) also in
idle state. You can prevent the discharging of the battery by disconnecting the negative
terminal or charging the battery constantly with a very low charging current. Please
also refer to the notes when working on the battery in “Working on the battery”
on page 203.
Note
Batteries with three-tone indicator, which are mounted as of factory, are marked
with a code which always begins with 1J0, 7N0 or 3B0. The exact marking can be e.g.
1J0 915 105 AC.
Replacement batteries with three-tone indicator, which were obtained from Škoda
original parts, are marked with the code 000 915 105 Ax, whereby “x” stands for a vari-
able. The exact marking can be e.g. 000 915 105 AB.
Inspecting the electrolyte level
The battery is practically maintenance-free under normal operating conditions. We
do, however, recommend that you have the electrolyte level inspected from time to
time by a Škoda Service Partner when outside temperatures are high or when driving
on long trips. You should also have the electrolyte level page 206 checked each time
the battery is charged.
The electrolyte level of the battery will also be checked as part of the Inspection
Service.
s43s.1.book Page 205 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing206
Operation in winter
The battery has to provide greater amounts of electricity during the winter. It also has
only part of the initial power output at low temperatures that it has at normal temper-
atures.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C.
We therefore recommend that you have the battery checked by a Škoda Service
Partner before the start of the winter and recharged if necessary.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic burns.
Replace a frozen battery.
Charging the battery
A properly charged battery is essential for reliably starting the engine.
– Read the warning notes in “Working on the battery” on page 203 and .
– Switch the ignition and all electrical components off.
– Only for “quick-charging”: Disconnect both battery cables (first of all “negative”,
then “positive”).
– Carefully attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals (red =
“positive”, black = “negative”).
– You can now plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch
on the charger.
– When charging is completed: switch the charger off and unplug the mains cable
from the power socket.
– Only then should you disconnect the terminal clamps of the charger.
– Reconnect the cables to the battery (first of all “positive”, then “negative”).
It is not normally necessary to disconnect the cables of the battery if you recharge the
battery using low amperages (as for example from a mini-charger). Please also refer
to the instructions from the charger manufacturer.
A charging current of 0.1 of the total battery capacity (or lower) is that which should be
used until full charging is achieved.
It is, however, necessary to disconnect both cables before charging the battery with
high amperages, so-called “quick-charging”.
“Quick-charging” a battery is dangerous in “Working on the battery” on
page 203. It requires a special charger and appropriate knowledge. We therefore
recommend that you have your battery quick-charged only by your Škoda Service
Partner.
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C . We
recommend that you no longer use a battery which has thawed out because the casing
of the battery may be cracked through the formation of ice and this would allow
battery electrolyte to flow out.
The vent plugs of the battery should not be opened for charging.
WARNING
Never charge a frozen or thawed battery - risk of explosion and caustic
burns. Replace a frozen battery.
Never charge a battery which has a too low electrolyte level - risk of explo-
sion and caustic burns.
Disconnecting and reconnecting the battery
On disconnecting and reconnecting the battery the following functions are initially
deactivated or are no longer able to operate fault-free.
Operation Operating measure
Electrical power window (operational faults) page 48
Enter radio code number see Radio Operating Instructions
Set hours page 18
Data in the multi-functional indicator* are
deleted.
page 19
s43s.1.book Page 206 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Inspecting and replenishing 207
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
We recommend having the vehicle checked by a Škoda Service Partner to ensure full
functionality of all electrical systems.
Replacing the battery
You should only replace a battery with a new battery of the same capacity, voltage (12
V), amperage and of the same size. Škoda Service Partners have a range of suitable
batteries available.
We recommend that you only have an old battery disposed of by your Škoda Service
Partner since it does require special disposal.
For the sake of the environment
Batteries contain poisonous substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be
disposed of in accordance with local environmental protection regulations and on no
account as domestic waste.
In view of the problems involved with its proper disposal, we recommend having
the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
Windshield washer system
The windshield washer reservoir contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear
window and for the headlamp cleaning system*. The reservoir is located at the front
right of the engine compartment fig. 168.
The filling level of the container is about 3 litres and about 5.5 litres on vehicles which
have a headlight washing system.
Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and headlights. We
therefore recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner
from Škoda genuine accessories (in winter additionally with antifreeze) which is
capable of removing stubborn dirt. Follow the instructions for use on the packaging
when using screen cleaning products.
You should always add antifreeze to the cleaning water in winter even if your vehicle is
fitted with heated windscreen washer nozzles*.
It is also possible in exceptional cases to use methylated spirits when no screen cleaner
with antifreeze is available. The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more
than 15 %. Please note, however, that the antifreeze protection at this concentration is
only adequate down to -5°C.
WARNING
Read and observe the warning notes page 197, “Working in the engine
compartment” before working in the engine compartment.
Caution
On no account should you add radiator antifreeze or other additives to the wind-
screen washer fluid.
If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system, you should only add
cleaning products which do not attack the polycarbonate coating of the headlights to
the windscreen washer fluid. Please contact your Škoda Service Partner, who will tell
you which cleaning agent you can use.
Fig. 168 Engine compartment: Wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir
s43s.1.book Page 207 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres208
Wheels and Tyres
Wheels
General information
New tyres do not offer optimal grip at first and should therefore be run in for about
500 km at a moderate speed and an appropriately cautious style of driving. You will
also profit from longer tyre life.
The tread depth of new tyres may differ because of design features and the config-
uration of the tread (depending on the type of tyre and the manufacturer).
Drive over curbs on the side of the road and other such obstacles slowly and,
where possible, at a right angle in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims.
Inspect your tyres from time to time for damage (punctures, cuts, splits and
bulges). Remove foreign bodies from the tyre profile.
Damage to tyres and wheels is frequently not visible. Unusual vibrations or pulling
of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage. Please reduce your speed
immediately and stop if you suspect that a wheel is damaged. Inspect the tyres for
signs of damage (bulges, splits, etc.). If no visible damage is present, please drive at an
appropriately slow speed and carefully to the nearest specialist garage in order to have
your vehicle inspected.
Also protect your tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuel.
Immediately replace any dust caps of the valves which have got lost.
Mark wheels before removing them so that their previous direction of running can
be maintained when mounted them again.
Always store wheels or tyres which been removed in a cool, dry and, where
possible, dark place. Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. This
indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres are fitted
on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal proper-
ties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Further information concerning the use of unidirectional tyres page 212.
WARNING
New tyres during the first 500 km do not offer optimal grip and should
therefore be run appropriately - risk of accident!
Never drive with damaged tyres - risk of accident!
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Tyre life
The life of your tyres very much depends on the following points:
Tyre pressure
The working life of tyres will be shortened considerably if the tyres are insufficiently or
over-inflated and this will have an adverse effect on the handling of your vehicle.
Correctly inflated tyres are of particular importance when travelling at high speeds. It
is therefore good to check the pressure at least once a month and also before setting
off on a long trip. Please do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyres.
The tyre inflation pressures for summer tyres are indicated on the inside of the fuel
filler flap fig. 169. The inflation pressures for winter tyres are 20 kPa (0.2 bar) higher
than those for summer tyres page 212.
Fig. 169 An opened fuel filler flap with a
tyre size and tyre inflation pressure table
s43s.1.book Page 208 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres 209
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre size 205/50 R17, which are intended to
be used with snow chains, is identical to the tyre inflation pressure for tyres of the tyre
size 225/45 R17, see page 208, fig. 169.
The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all
times.
The tyre inflation pressure of the emergency spare wheel R 18 is 420 kPa (4.2 bar).
Always check the inflation pressure of tyres when cold. Do not reduce the higher pres-
sure of warm tyres. Adapt the inflation pressure of the tyres accordingly if your vehicle
is carrying a significantly higher payload.
Driving style
Fast cornering, sharp acceleration and braking (squealing tyres) increase wear-and-
tear on your tyres.
Balancing wheels
The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced. There are a wide range of influences when
driving which may result in an imbalance and which makes themselves felt through
vibration in the steering.
You should have the wheels rebalanced since any imbalance increases wear-and-tear
on the steering, the suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a
new tyre is fitted and each time a tyre is repaired.
Wheel alignment errors
Incorrect wheel alignment at the front and rear will not only increase wear-and-tear on
the tyres but will also has an adverse effect on vehicle safety. Contact your specialist
garage if you notice any unusual tyre wear.
WARNING
If the inflation pressure is too low, the tyre must perform a greater flexing
work. At higher speeds the tyre will warm up as a result of this. This can result
in tread separation and even a tyre blowout.
Immediately replace the damaged rims or tyres.
Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional
cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.
For the sake of the environment
Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption.
Wear indicators
The base of the tread of the original tyres has wear indicators 1.6 mm high, installed at
right angles to the direction of travel. These wear indicators are located at 6 - 8 points
depending on the make and are evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre
fig. 170. Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters “TWI”, triangular
symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators.
A remaining tread of just 1.6 mm, measured in the grooves of the tread next to the wear
indicators, means that your tyres have reached their legally permissible minimum
tread depth.
WARNING
You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the
wear indicators have been worn down. The legally permissible minimum tread
depth should be observed.
Worn tyres do not provide the necessary adhesion to the road surface at
high speeds on wet roads. One could experience “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled
movements of the vehicle - “swimming” on a wet road surface).
Fig. 170 Tyre tread with wear indicators
s43s.1.book Page 209 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres210
Changing wheels around
If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres, we recommend changing the
front wheels around with the rear wheels as shown in the diagram fig. 171. You will
then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres.
It may be advantageous to swap the tyres over “crosswise” when certain types of wear
characteristic arise on the running surface of the tyres (but not in the case of unidirec-
tional tyres). The co-workers of the authorised Škoda Service Partners are extensively
familiar with the combination possibilites.
We recommend that you change the wheels around every 10 000 km in order to
achieve even wear on all wheels and to obtain optimal tyre life.
New tyres and wheels
Tyres and wheel rims are important design elements. One should therefore use the
tyres and wheel rims which have been released for use by Škoda Auto. They are exactly
matched to the vehicle type and therefore contribute significantly to good road
holding and safe driving characteristics .
Only fit radial tyres of the same type on all 4 wheels, size (rolling circumference) and, if
possible, the same tread pattern on one axle.
The authorised Škoda Service Partners have access to the most current information
about which tyres we have released for use on your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any work relating to tyres or wheels carried out by an
authorised Škoda Service Partner. The authorised Škoda Service Partners have all of
the necessary special tools and replacement parts available plus the required specialist
knowledge and are also in a position to properly dispose of the old tyres. A large
number of authorised Škoda Service Partners also have an attractive range of tyres and
wheels available.
The tyre/wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indicated in
your vehicle documents. Approval and licensing may differ according to the legislation
prevailing in individual countries.
Proper knowledge of the tyre data makes it easier for you to select the correct type of
tyre. Tyres do, for example, have the following inscription on their walls:
195 / 65 R 15 91 T
What this means is:
The following speed restrictions apply to tyres.
Fig. 171 Changing wheels around
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre - R adial
15 Diameter of wheel in inches
91 Load index
T Speed symbol
Speed symbol Permissible maximum speed
S 180 km/h
T 190 km/h
U 200 km/h
H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
W 270 km/h
Y 300 km/h
s43s.1.book Page 210 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres 211
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
The date of manufacture is also stated on the tyre wall (possibly only on the inside of
wheel):
DOT ... 20 09...
means, for example, that the tyre was manufactured in the 20th week of the year 2009.
Any spare wheel which differs from the tyres fitted to the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres or
low-profile tyres) should only be used for a short time in the event of a puncture and
when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving. It should be replaced as
quickly as possible by a normal wheel.
WARNING
Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have been approved for your
model of Škoda Auto vehicle. Failure to observe this instruction will adversely
affect the road safety of your vehicle - risk of accident! Approval and licencing
of your vehicle on public roads may also become void as a result.
You must on no account drive at a higher speed than is permissible for your
tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and loss of control over
your vehicle.
Tyres which are 6 years old or more should only be fitted in exceptional
cases and when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.
Never fit tyres which have already been used without having adequate
knowledge of their previous history. Tyres age even if they have not been used
at all or only very little. A spare tyre must only be used in exceptional cases and
only then when adopting an appropriately cautious style of driving.
Do not, where possible, replace individual tyres but at least replace them on
both wheels of a given axle at the same time. Always fit the tyres with the
deeper tread depth to the front wheels.
For the sake of the environment
Old tyres must be disposed of in conformity with the appropriate regulations.
Note
It is not normally possible to fit wheels from other models of cars for technical reasons.
This may also apply in certain circumstances to the wheels of the same type of
vehicle.
Wheel bolts
Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. Each time you
fit other wheels - e.g. light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres - you must therefore
also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of spherical cap. This
is essential to ensure that the wheels are tightly fitted and that the brake system oper-
ates properly.
If you retrofit wheel trims (or have this done), please also ensure that an adequate
flow of air remains assured for cooling the brake system.
The authorised Škoda Service Partners are instructed in the technical possibilities
which exist regarding converting or retrofitting tyres, wheels and wheel trims.
WARNING
In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts, the wheel can loosen when
the car is moving - risk of accident!
The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily. However, they must
never be treated with grease or oil.
If the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque, the rim can
lossen when the car is moving - risk of accident! A tightening torque which is
too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent
deformation of the contact surfaces on the rims.
Caution
The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light alloy wheels is
120 Nm.
s43s.1.book Page 211 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres212
Winter tyres
The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry
roads if you fit winter tyres. Summer tyres do not offer the same grip on ice, snow and
at temperatures below 7 °C because of their construction (width, rubber blend, tread
pattern). This particularly applies to vehicles which are equipped with low-profile
tyres or high-speed tyres (code index H or V on wall of tyre).
Winter tyres must be mounted on all four wheels to obtain the best handling charac-
teristics.
You must only fit those types of winter tyre which are approved for your vehicle. The
permissible sizes of winter tyres are stated in your vehicle documents. Approvals may
differ because of national legislation.
Please remember that the tyres should be inflated to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) more than is the
case for summer tyres page 208.
Winter tyres no longer offer the same winter performance once the tyre tread has
worn down to a depth of about 4 mm.
Ageing also causes winter tyres to lose most of their winter performance properties -
even in cases where the remaining tread depth is still clearly more than 4 mm.
Speed restrictions apply to winter tyres as well as to summer tyres page 210,
.
You can fit winter tyres of a lower speed category to your vehicle provided that you also
do not drive faster than the permissible maximum speed for such tyres, even if the
possible maximum speed of your vehicle is higher. The corresponding tyre category
can damage the tyres when exceeding the permissible maximum speed.
Please pay attention to the notes if you decide to fit winter tyres page 208.
You can also fit so-called “all-year tyres” instead of winter tyres.
Please contact your specialist garage if there are any points which are not clear who will
be able to provide you with information regarding the maximum speed for your tyres.
WARNING
You must on no account drive your car at more than the permissible maximum
speed for your winter tyres - risk of an accident resulting from tyre damage and
loss of control over your car.
For the sake of the environment
Fit your summer tyres on again in good time since summer tyres offer you better grip
and handling on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as ar temperatures below
7 °C - the braking distance is shorter, there is less tyre noise, tyre wear is reduced and
fuel consumption is reduced.
Note
Please observe the various differing legal requirements regarding tyres.
Unidirectional tyres*
The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre. This
indicates the direction of rotation of the tyre, and it is essential that the tyres are fitted
on to run in this direction. Only then are the tyres able to provide the optimal proper-
ties in terms of grip, low noise, wear-and-tear and aquaplaning.
Should it be necessary to fit on a spare wheel in exceptional cases with a tyre not dedi-
cated to the running direction or in opposite running direction, please adopt a
cautious style of driving as the tyre is no longer able to provide optimal grip and
handling in such a situation. This particularly important on wet roads. Please refer to
the notes page 217, “Spare wheel*”.
You should have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible and restore the correct
direction of rotation on all tyres.
Snow chains
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels.
When driving on wintry roads, snow chains improve not only traction, but also the
braking performance.
For technical reasons, it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the following
wheel/tyre combinations.
s43s.1.book Page 212 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Wheels and Tyres 213
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Remove the full wheel trims if you wish to fit snow chains to the wheels.
Observe the national legal requirements relating to the maximum vehicle speed with
snow chains.
WARNING
Please pay attention to the information in the supplied fitting instructions of
the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution
You must take the chains off as soon as you drive on roads which are free of snow. They
adversely affect the handling of your vehicle, damage the tyres and are rapidly
destroyed.
Note
We recommend that you use snow chains from the Škoda genuine accessories.
Wheel size Depth (D) Tyre size
6J x 15
a)
a)
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 15 mm.
47 mm 195/65
6.5J x 15
a)
50 mm 195/65
6J x 16
a)
50 mm 205/55
6J x 17
b)
b)
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
45 mm 205/50
s43s.1.book Page 213 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts214
Accessories, changes and replacement of parts
Accessories and replacement parts
Škoda vehicles have been built according to the latest discoveries in safety engi-
neering. Thus one should not change the condition in which the vehicle was delivered
from the manufacturer without some thought.
The following guidelines should be observed when a vehicle is to be retrofitted with
accessories, have technical changes made to it or a part has to be replaced at some
time in the future.
Advise should always be obtained from an authorised Škoda Service Partner
before buying any accessories and before making any technical changes .
This is particularly the case when accessories are bought in a foreign country.
Škoda Genuine Accessories and Skoda original parts can be bought from author-
ised Škoda Service Partners who also professionally undertake the assembly of parts
which were purchased there.
All Škoda original accessories which are listed in the catalogue of original accesso-
ries such as spoilers, transport systems, child seats, etc., are homologized.
Radios, aerials and other electrical accessories should only be installed by author-
ised Škoda Service Partners.
The guidelines issued by Škoda Auto must be observed when making technical
changes.
This is to ensure that no technical damage occurs to the vehicle, that travelling and
operating safety are maintained and that the chnages are permissible. The authorised
Škoda Service Partners undertake this work professionally or refer it to a specialist
company in special cases.
Any damage which is done caused by technical changes made without consulting
a Skoda dealer is excluded from the guarantee.
WARNING
We advise you, in your own interest, to only use Škoda Genuine Accessories
and Škoda original parts which have been expressly approved for use on your
Škoda. Reliability, safety and suitabiliity have been established for these Škoda
original parts.
We cannot guarantee suitability of installation into your vehicle of other
products despite keeping a constant eye on market developments (also not in
the case where there is an attestation or permission can be produced).
Technical changes
Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational
faults. This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the
networking of the electronic components. This means that the operating safety of your
vehicle can be considerably jeopardized, a greater wear of vehicle parts can occur and
finally the vehicle registration documents expire.
We trust that you will understand that Škoda Auto cannot be liable for damage
resulting from unprofessional work.
We therefore recommend that you have all work carried out using Škoda original parts
at authorised Škoda Service Partners.
WARNING
Work or modifications on your vehicle, which have been carried out unprofes-
sionally, can cause operational faults - risk of accident!
Vehicles of category N1
The vehicle of category N1 is a vehicle which is designed and manufactured for trans-
porting loads with a maximum weight of 3.5 tonnes.
WARNING (continued)
s43s.1.book Page 214 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 215
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
First-aid box* and Warning triangle* (Octavia)
The first-aid box* is attached by a strap to the right-hand side of the luggage compart-
ment.
The warning triangle can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber
straps fig. 172.
If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle, please contact a
specialist garage.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
First-aid box* and warning triangle* (Estate car)
For vehicles of the type estate car the first-aid box and the warning triangle are housed
in a compartment on the right side in the luggage compartment. You can open the
compartment by turning the locks in the direction of arrow fig. 173.
If you wish to equip your vehicle additionally with a warning triangle, please contact a
specialist garage.
Note
Pay attention to the use-by-date of the contents of the first-aid box.
Fire extinguisher*
The fire extinguisher is attached with straps in a holder under the driver seat.
Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extinguisher.
The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person or company annually
(please observe the differing legal requirements).
Fig. 172 Placing of the warning triangle
(Octavia)
Fig. 173 Placing of the warning
triangle (Estate car)
s43s.1.book Page 215 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance216
WARNING
If the fire extinguisher is not correctly attached, in case of sudden manoeuvres
or an accident it can be “thrown” through the interior compartment and cause
injuries.
Note
The fire extinguisher must comply with the relevant and valid legal requirements.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher
is used after the expiration date, its proper function is no longer assured.
The fire extinguisher is only supplied in certain countries within the scope of
delivery.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit and the lifting jack* are housed in a box in the spare wheel*
fig. 174 or in the space for the spare wheel. There is also space here for the remov-
able ball for the trailer towing device*. The box is attached with a strap on the spare
wheel.
The vehicle tool kit contains the following parts (depending on equipment fitted):
Wire clamps for removing the full wheel trims,
Plastic clip for a wheel bolt cover,
Wheel wrench*,
Towing eye,
Adapter for the wheel bolts lock.*
Screwdriver* for removing the fog lights
18)
.
Before placing the lifting jack* back in its storage area, screw in the arm of the lifting
jack fully.
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack* is only intended for your model of vehicle.
On no account attempt to lift a heavier vehicle or other loads - risk of injury!
Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely attached in the luggage compart-
ment.
Note
Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap.
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit is intended for the repair of minor tyre defects. The tyre repair kit
contains a compressor, inflation bottle, operating instructions and accessories.
The repair with the tyre repair kit is not at all intended to replace a permanent repair
on the tyre, this repair only serves to reach the next specialist garage. The repair can be
undertaken on the vehicle immediately. Please read the attached instructions care-
fully before the repair.
The tyre repair kit is located in a textile bag. There is a velcro fastener on the underside
of the bag, with which the bag is attached to the floor covering of the luggage compart-
ment in such a way that the side of the bag rests on the right side of the luggage
compartment and on the seat backrest.
Fig. 174 Luggage compartment: storage
compartment for vehicle tool kit
18)
Valid for Octavia RS and Octavia Scout.
s43s.1.book Page 216 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 217
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel lies in a well under the floor covering of the luggage compartment and
is fixed in place using special screws fig. 175.
Before removing the spare wheel, you must take out the box with the vehicle tool kit
box page 216, fig. 174.
One should check the inflation pressure in the spare wheel (at best when generally
checking the tyre air pressures - see sign on the fuel filler flap page 208) to ensure
that the spare wheel is always ready to use.
Temporary spare wheel
A warning label displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel indicates that your
vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare wheel.
Please observe the following notes when driving with a temporary spare wheel:
The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h with this spare wheel and pay particular attention
while driving. Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
The inflation pressure for this spare wheel is identical to the inflation pressure of
the standard tyres. The temporary spare wheel R 18 must have an inflation pressure of
420 kPa (4.2 bar)!
Use this spare wheel only to reach the nearest specialist garage as it is not intended
for continuous use.
No other summer or winter tyres must be mounted on the rim of the spare wheel
R 18.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
The following steps should be carried out before actually changing the wheel.
– If it is necessary to change a wheel, park the vehicle as far away as possible from
the traffic flow. The place you choose should be level.
–Have all the occupants get out. While changing a wheel, the occupants of the
vehicle should not stand on the road (e.g. behind a crash barrier).
– Apply the handbrake firmly.
–Engage 1st gear or if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox, position the
selector lever into position P.
– If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
–Take the vehicle tool kit page 216 and the spare wheel* page 217 out of the
luggage compartment.
WARNING
If you find yourself in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights
system and place the warning triangle on the side of the road at the prescribed
distance from your vehicle while observing all national legal provisions. In this
way you are protecting not only yourself but also other road users.
Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack - danger of
suffering injury.
Caution
If you have to change a wheel on a slope first block the opposite wheel with a stone or
similar object in order to secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
Note
Comply with the national legal regulations.
Fig. 175 Luggage compartment: Spare
wheel
s43s.1.book Page 217 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance218
Changing a wheel
Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible.
– Take off the full wheel trim* page 218 or the caps page 219.
– In the case of light alloy wheels remove the wheel trim cap page 219.
– First of all slacken the safety wheel bolt * and afterwards the other wheel bolts
page 219.
– Jack up the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is clear of the ground
page 220.
– Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper etc.).
– Take off the wheel.
– Fit on the spare wheel and tighten the wheel bolts slightly.
–Lower the car.
– Tighten the wheel bolts firmly, alternately and diagonally using the wheel wrench
(crosswise) and last the safety wheel bolt* page 219.
– Mount the full wheel trim/wheel trim cap or the caps.
Note
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily.
You must never grease or oil the wheel bolts!
When fitting on unidirectional tyres, ensure that the tyres rotate in the correct
direction page 208.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, you must perform the following steps.
– Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well.
– Stow the vehicle tool kit in the space provided.
– Check the tyre pressure on the spare wheel just mounted as soon as possible.
– Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as
soon as possible. Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening
torque of 120 Nm.
– Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about possibilities for
getting repairs done.
WARNING
It is necessary to observe the guidelines given on page 210 if the vehicle is
subsequently fitted with tyres which are different to those it was fitted with at
the works.
Note
If you find, when changing the wheel, that the wheel bolts are corroded and diffi-
cult to turn, the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque.
Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed to a workshop where the tightening
torque can be checked.
Full wheel trim*
Pulling off
– Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit into the reinforced edge of the full
wheel trim.
– Push the wheel wrench* through the clamp, support the wheel wrench at the tyre
and pull off the wheel trim.
Installing
– First press the full wheel trim onto the wheel at the valve opening provided. Then
press the full wheel trim into the wheel in such a way that its entire circumference
locks correctly in place.
s43s.1.book Page 218 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 219
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Caution
Use the pressure of your hand, do not knock on the full wheel trim! Heavy knocks
mainly on the points where the full wheel trim has not been inserted into the wheel,
can result in damage to the guide and centering elements of the full wheel trim.
Check for yourself that the safety wheel bolt is located in the hole in the area of the
valve before fitting the full wheel trim onto a steel wheel which is attached with a safety
wheel bolt page 220.
Wheel bolts with caps*
Pulling off
– Push the plastic clip sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the clip
are positioned at the collar of the cap and detach the cap.
Installing
– Push the caps fully onto the wheel bolts.
The caps are located in the well of the luggage compartment.
Wheel trim caps*
Pulling off
– Carefully remove the wheel trim cap using the wire clamp fig. 177.
Slackening and tightening wheel bolts
Slacken the wheel bolts before jacking up the vehicle.
Slackening wheel bolts
– Push the wheel wrench* fully onto the wheel bolt
19)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench* and turn the bolt about one turn to the left
fig. 178.
Fig. 176 Removing the cap.
19)
Use the appropriate adapter for slackening and tightening the safety wheel bolts page 220.
Fig. 177 Pulling off wheel trim cap on
light alloy wheels
Fig. 178 Changing a wheel: Slackening
wheel bolts
s43s.1.book Page 219 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance220
Tightening wheel bolts
– Push the wheel wrench* fully onto the wheel bolt
19)
.
– Grasp the end of the wrench* and turn the bolt to the right until it is tight.
WARNING
Slacken the wheel bolts only a little (about one turn) as long as the vehicle has
not yet been lifted with the lifting jack* - risk of accident!
Note
Apply pressure carefully with your foot to the end of the wrench* if it proves difficult
to slacken the bolts. Hold tight on the vehicle when doing this and ensure that you have
a steady position.
Raise vehicle
You have to raise the vehicle with the lifting jack* in order to be able to
take off the wheel.
Position the lifting jack* by selecting the jacking point which is closest to the wheel to
be removed fig. 179. The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the
lower sill. The engraving is only visible after opening the door.
– Position the lifting jack* below the jacking point and move it up until its claw is
positioned directly below the vertical web of the lower sill.
– Align the lifting jack* so that its claw grasps the web of the lower sill and the
base plate is resting flat on the floor.
– Turn the lifting jack* up further until the wheel is just clear of the ground.
Ground which is soft and slippery below the lifting jack* can cause the vehicle to slip
off the lifting jack*. It is therefore always necessary to place the lifting jack* on a solid
surface or use a wide and stable base. Use a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber foot mat) if
the surface is smooth, such as cobbled stones, a tiled floor, etc.
WARNING
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed - risk of injury!
Take suitable measures to prevent the base of the lifting jack from slipping
off - risk of injury!
Not positioning the lifting jack* at the specified points can result in damage
to the vehicle. The jack can also slip off if it does not have sufficient grip - risk of
injury!
It is important to support the vehicle with suitable supporting blocks if you
wish to work under the lifted vehicle - risk of injury!
Securing wheels against being stolen*
You need a special adapter for slackening the safety wheel bolts.
– Pull off the full wheel trim/cap from the wheel hub or cap from the safety wheel
bolt.
Fig. 179 Changing a wheel: Jacking
points for positioning lifting jack
A
A
A
B
Fig. 180 Safety wheel bolt with adapter
s43s.1.book Page 220 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 221
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Insert the adapter with its toothed side fully into the inner toothing of the safety
wheel bolt right down in such a way that only the outer hexagon is jutting out
page 220, fig. 180.
– Insert the wheel wrench* fully onto the adapter .
– Slacken the wheel bolt, or tighten it firmly page 219.
– Reinstall the full wheel trim/wheel cap after removing the adapter or place the cap
onto the safety wheel bolt.
– Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible.
Steel and light alloy wheels must be tightened to a tightening torque of 120 Nm.
The safety wheel bolts on vehicles fitted with them (one safety wheel bolt per wheel)
can only be loosened or tighten up by using the adapter provided.
It is meaningful to note the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter
or the rear side of the safety wheel bolts. You can obtain a replacement adapter from
an authorised Škoda Service Partner, if necessary, by quoting this number.
We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the
vehicle. It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit.
Caution
Damage can occur to the adapter and safety wheel bolt if the safety wheel bolt is tight-
ened up too much.
Note
The set of safety wheel bolts can be obtained from an authorised Škoda Service
Partner.
Jump-starting
Initial steps
You can use the battery of another vehicle for jump-starting yours if the engine does
not start because the battery on your vehicle is flat. You will require jump-start cables
for this purpose.
Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the battery
supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged
battery in your vehicle.
Jump-start cables
Only use jump-start cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps. Please pay attention to the manufacturer's instructions.
Positive cable - colour coding in the majority of cases red.
Negative cable - colour coding in the majority of cases black.
WARNING
A discharged battery may already freeze at temperatures just below 0°C. In
case of frozen battery carry out no jump-starting - risk of explosion!
Please pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the
engine compartment page 197, “Working in the engine compartment”.
Note
There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may
flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected.
The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the vehicle.
Switch off any mobile phone, pay attention to the instructions for use of the mobile
phone in such a situation.
We recommend that you purchase the jump-starting cable in the specialist shops
of the battery manufacturers.
A
B
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 221 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance222
Start engine
It is important to connect the jump-start cables in the correct order.
Connecting positive terminals
– Attach one end to the positive terminal fig. 181 of the discharged battery
.
– Attach the other end to the positive terminal of the battery supplying the power
.
Connecting negative terminal and engine block
– Attach one end to the negative terminal of the battery supplying the power .
– Attach the other end to a solid metal part which is connected firmly to the
engine block, or to the engine block itself.
Starting the engine
– Start the engine of the vehicle providing current and run the engine at idling speed.
– Now start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
– Interrupt the attempt at starting an engine after 10 seconds if it does not start right
away and wait for about 30 seconds before repeating the attempt.
– Disconnect the cables on the engine in exactly the reverse order they were
connected up.
WARNING
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never make contact
with each other. Furthermore, the cable connected to the positive terminal of
the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the
vehicle - risk of a short circuit!
Do not affix the jump starting cables to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery
being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being started.
Run the jump-start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotating
parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries - risk of caustic burns!
The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly.
Keep any sources of ignition (naked flame, smouldering cigarettes etc.)
away from the battery - risk of an explosion!
Never jump-start the batteries which have a too low electrolyte level - risk
of explosion and caustic burns!
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
General
Please pay attention to the following instructions if you are going to use a tow rope:
Driver of the towing vehicle
– Do not drive off until the tow rope is taught.
– Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accelerator
particularly gently if your vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Driver of the towed vehicle
– Switch the ignition on so that the steering wheel is not blocked and you can also
operate the turn signal lights, the headlight flasher, the windscreen wipers and
windscreen washer system.
Fig. 181 Jump-starting using the
battery from another vehicle: A - flat
vehicle battery, B - battery providing
current
A
1
A
A
A
2
A
B
A
3
A
B
A
4
s43s.1.book Page 222 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 223
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
– Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if your
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
– Note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is
running. You will require significantly greater physical force to depress the brake
pedal and to steer the vehicle if the engine is not running.
– Ensure that the tow rope is always kept taught.
Tow rope or tow bar
A tow bar is safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimizes any shocks. You can use
a tow rope only if a suitable tow bar is not available.
The tow rope must be elastic to protect the vehicle. Thus one should only use plastic
fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material.
Only attach the tow rope to the towing eyes provided for this purpose page 223
and page 224.
Driving style
Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice. Both drivers should be
familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle. Unskilled drivers should not
attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in.
One should be constantly vigilant not to allow impermissibly high towing forces or
jerky loadings. There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the
points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when you attempt to tow a vehicle
which is not standing on a paved road.
Caution
If the gearbox of your vehicle no longer contains any oil because of a defect, your
vehicle must only be towed in with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground, or on
a special vehicle transporter or trailer.
Note
Please comply with any national legal provisions particularly regarding the
switched on signal systems, when towing in or tow-starting another vehicle.
The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the
front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle.
Front towing eye
The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.
Fig. 182 Front bumper: protective grille / installing the towing eye
Carefully remove the cover as follows.
– Guide the fingers into the opening fig. 182.
– By pulling in the direction of arrow , first of all slacken the cover in the upper area
on the side to the fog lights.
– Afterwards, also slacken the cover on the other side in the direction of arrow
and remove it.
– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop fig. 182 - right and
tighten. For tightening, we recommend that you use for example the wheel
wrench*, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object which you can push
through the eye.
– In order to reinstall the cover after screwing out the towing eye, first of all insert it
starting on the side facing the marking. Then press the cover closed on the side
facing the fog light. The cover must engage firmly.
A
A
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 223 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance224
Front towing eye for Octavia RS and Octavia Scout
The towing eye is stored in the box for the vehicle tool kit.
Fig. 183 Front bumper Octavia RS: Protective grille / Octavia Scout: Cover
Octavia RS
– Guide one finger into the opening of the grille fig. 183.
– Unlock the cover by pulling it in direction and remove it.
– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop page 223, fig. 182 -
right and tighten it as much as possible.
– After screwing out the towing eye, reinsert the cover and lock it in place. The cover
must engage firmly.
Octavia Scout
– Press on the upper part of the cover and remove it.
– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop page 223, fig. 182 -
right and tighten it as much as possible. For tightening, we recommend that you
use for example the wheel wrench*, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar
object which you can push through the eye.
– After screwing out the towing eye, reinsert the cover and lock it in place. The cover
must engage firmly.
Caution
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the
towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
Rear towing eye
Fig. 184 Rear bumper: Remove cover / rear bumper: Installing the towing eye
– Unlock the bottom part of the cover by pulling it downwards in direction of arrow
fig. 184.
– Unlock the upper part of the cover by pulling it in direction of arrow and
remove it.
– Screw in the towing eye by hand to the left up to the stop fig. 184 - right and
tighten it as much as possible. For tightening, we recommend that you use for
example the wheel wrench*, the lashing eye of another vehicle or a similar object
which you can push through the eye.
– In order to reinstall the cover after screwing out the towing eye, first of all insert the
upper part of the cover and then press in the lower part. The cover must engage
firmly.
Caution
The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened, otherwise the
towing eye can tear when towing in or tow-starting.
A
A
A
1
A
B
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 224 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Breakdown assistance 225
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Towing in a vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox
Please refer to the notes page 222.
The vehicle can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear
wheels raised. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
Towing of a vehicle with an automatic gearbox
Please refer to the notes page 222.
The car can be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope. Refer at the same time to the
following guidelines:
Move selector lever into N.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
The maximum permissible towing distance is 50 km. The gear oil pump does not
operate when the engine is not running; the gearbox would not be adequately lubri-
cated at higher speeds and over longer towing distance.
Caution
If the vehicle is towed in by a recovery vehicle, it should only be towed in with the front
wheels raised. If the vehicle is raised at rear, the automatic gearbox is damaged! (Does
not apply to the automatic gearbox DSG).
Note
The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow
in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km.
Towing a vehicle with four-wheel drive
Please refer to the notes page 222.
The vehicle can be towed in using a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front axle raised.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h, the maximum permissible towing distance is
50 km.
Note
The vehicle must be transported on a special vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow
in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing distance is greater than 50 km.
s43s.1.book Page 225 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs226
Fuses and light bulbs
Electric fuses
Replacing fuses
Defect fuses must be replaced.
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located on the left
side of the dash panel behind the safety cover and under the cover in the engine
compartment on the left.
– Switch the ignition off and also the electrical component affected.
– Use a screwdriver to take off the fuse cover on the side of the dash panel fig. 185
or the fuse cover in the engine compartment page 227.
– Find out which fuse belongs to the relevant component page 228, “Fuse assign-
ment in the dash panel” or page 227, “Fuse assignment in engine compart-
ment”.
– Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the fuse cover, insert it onto the respective
fuse and pull out this fuse.
– Defect fuses can be detected by their melted metal strips. Replace the defect fuse
by a new fuse of the same ampere number.
– Fit on the fuse cover again.
We recommend that you always have the small box of replacement fuses in your
vehicle. You can obtain replacement fuses from the range of Škoda original parts or
from a specialist garage
20)
.
Colour coding of fuses
Caution
Never attempt to “repair” fuses and also do not replace them with a fuse of a higher
amperage - risk of fire! This may also cause damage at another part of the electrical
system.
Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist garage if a
newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time.
Fig. 185 Fuse cover: left side of the dash
panel
20)
The small box with replacement fuses is part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in some coun-
tries.
Colour Maximum amperage
light brown 5
brown 7,5
red 10
blue 15
yellow 20
white 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
s43s.1.book Page 226 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs 227
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Fuse cover in engine compartment
On some vehicles, the battery cover must be removed before removing the fuse cover
page 203.
Removing fuse cover
– Move the circlips fig. 186 as far as the stop, the symbol appears behind the
circlip and remove the cover.
Installing fuse cover
– Position the fuse cover on the fuse box and push the circlips as far as the stop -
the symbol is visible behind the circlip.
Caution
When unlocking and locking the fuse cover, it must be pressed on the sides to the
box, otherwise damage can occur to the locking mechanism.
Carefully position the fuse cover in the engine compartment. If the cover was not
correctly positioned, water can get into the fuses and this results in a damage to the
vehicle!
Fuse assignment in engine compartment
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or
only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
Fig. 186 Fuse cover in engine compart-
ment
A
A
A
A
No. Power consumer Amperes
F1 Not assigned
F2 Control unit for automatic gearbox DQ 200 30
F3 Measuring circuit 5
F4 Valves for ABS 30/20
F5 Control unit for automatic gearbox 15
F6
Instrument cluster, windshield wiper lever and turn signal
light lever
5
F7 Power suppy terminal 15, Starter 40
F8 Radio 15
F9 Phone 5
F10 Engine control unit, Main relay 5/10
F11 Control unit for auxiliary heating 20
F12 Control unit for CAN databus 5
F13 Engine control unit 15/30
F14 Ignition 20
Fig. 187 Schematic representation of
fuse carrier in engine compartment
s43s.1.book Page 227 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs228
Fuse assignment in the dash panel
Certain electrical components are only standard on certain vehicle model versions or
only suppliable as optional equipment for certain models.
F15
Lambda probe
glow plug system relay
10
5
F16
Central control unit, right main headlight, right rear light
unit
30
F17 Horn 15
F18 Amplifier for digital sound processor 30
F19 Front window wiper 30
F20
Water pump
valve for fuel dosing
10
20
F21
Lambda probe
Vacuum pump
10/15
20
F22 Clutch pedal switch, brake pedal switch 5
F23
Secondary air pump
Air mass meter
Fuel high pressure pump
5
10
15
F24 Activated charcoal filter, exhaust gas recirculation valve 10
F25 Pump for ABS 30/40
F26 Central control unit, left main headlight, left rear light unit 30
F27
Secondary air pump
Glow plug system
40
50
F28 Not assigned
F29 Power supply terminal 30 50
F30
Terminal X
a)
50
a)
In order not to drain the battery unnecessarily when starting the engine, the electrical compo-
nents of this terminal are automatically switched off.
No. Power consumer Amperes
No. Power consumer Amperes
1
Diagnostic socket, Engine control unit, Electrical fuel
pump
10
2 Control unit for ABS, ESP 5
3 Airbag 5
4 Heating, Air conditioning system, Reversing lights 5
5 Control unit for headlamp beam adjustment 5
6
Instrument cluster, control unit for automatic gearbox,
control unit for electromechanical power steering, parking
aid, Haldex coupling
5
7 Not assigned
8 Not assigned
9 Not assigned
10 Not assigned
11 Not assigned
12 Central locking control unit 10
Fig. 188 Schematic representation of
the fuse carrier in the dash panel
s43s.1.book Page 228 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs 229
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Electrically adjustable seats are protected by automatic circuit breakers, which
switch on again automatically after a few seconds after the overload has been
eliminated.
Bulbs
Changing bulbs
The relevant lamp must always be switched off before a light bulb is replaced.
Defect light bulbs should only be replaced with light bulbs of the same type. The desig-
nation is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
Changing certain bulbs is not something which you can do yourself, but requires to be
done by a specialist. Other parts of the vehicle must be removed in order to change the
light bulbs. This applies, in particular, to bulbs which can only be reached from the
engine compartment.
13 Diagnostic socket, Light switch 10
14 Control unit for automatic gearbox, Selector lever lock 5
15 Central control unit - interior lights 5
16 Climatronic 10
17 Not assigned
18 Not assigned
19 Control unit for trailer detection 5
20 Not assigned
21 Cornering lights for the left and right side 10
22 Air blower for Climatronic 40
23 Front power window 30
24 Cigarette lighter 25
25
Rear window heater
Rear window heater, Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating
and ventilation)
25
30
26 Power socket in the luggage compartment 20
27 Fuel pump relay, Injection valves (diesel engine) 15
28 Not assigned
29 Engine control unit, Crankcase ventilation heater 10
30 Control unit for automatic gearbox 20
31 Vacuum pump 20
32 Rear power window 30
33 Electric sliding/tilting roof 25
34 Control unit for convenience functions 20
35 Anti-theft alarm system 5
36 Headlight cleaning system 20
No. Power consumer Amperes
37 Front seat heating 30
38 Heated rear seats 30
39 Not assigned
40 Air blower for heating and air conditioning 40
41 Rear window wiper 15
42 Not assigned
43 Towing device 15
44 Towing device 20
45 Towing device 15
46 Heated windscreen washer nozzles 5
47 Relay for auxiliary heating 5
48 Not assigned
49 Light switch 5
No. Power consumer Amperes
s43s.1.book Page 229 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs230
We therefore recommend that you have any bulbs changed by an authorised Škoda
Service Partner or, in exceptional cases, by calling on other professional assistance.
Please note that the engine compartment is a hazardous area page 197, “Working
in the engine compartment”.
We recommend that you always have a small box of replacement bulbs in your vehicle.
You can obtain replacement bulbs from Škoda original accessories or from a specialist
garage
21)
.
A stowage place for the bulbs is located in the box in the spare wheel.
Fitted with a xenon headlight
Change of bulbs on vehicles with Xenon lights (low beam lights, parking lights and
main beam lights) should be undertaken by a specialist garage.
Bulb - Overview
21)
The small box with replacement bulbs is part of the basic equipping of the vehicle in some coun-
tries.
Front headlight Halogen headlight Xenon headlight
Low beam light H7 D1S
Main beam light H1
Parking lights W5W/W5W BL
Daylight driving lights*
PY21W SLL/LED
a)
a)
Octavia RS, Octavia Scout
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights*
H8/HB4
a)
Light unit (Octavia) Bulb
Reversing light P21W
Turn signals PY21W
Twin filament light bulb for the brake lights and tail lights P21/4W
Twin filament light bulb for the rear fog lights and tail
lights
P21/4W
Parking lights W3W
Rear light unit (Combi) Bulb
Reversing lights, brake lights, tail lights and rear fog light P21W
Turn signals PY21W
Parking lights W3W
Others Bulb
Side turn signal lights LED
Licence plate light C5W
3. Brake light LED
Entry lighting W5W
front interior lighting C10W
Reading lights W5W
Rear interior lighting C10W
Luggage compartment light W5W
Door warning light C5W
Lighting in storage compartment C3W
s43s.1.book Page 230 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs 231
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
WARNING
Bulbs H7 and H1 are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
risk of injury!
It is recommended to wear gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb.
Gas discharge bulbs* (xenon bulbs) operate with a high voltage, profes-
sional knowledge is required - danger to life!
Caution
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest amount of dirt
reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth, serviette or something
similar.
Note
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is assumed that
no major complications will arise. Other light bulbs should be replaced by your
specialist garage.
Front headlight
Positions of the light bulbs in the front headlight fig. 189.
- Front turn signal light
- parking lights and low beam
- main beam light
Removing the headlight
The headlight must be removed in order to change the light bulb of the parking lights,
low beam lights and main beam lights as well as the turn signal lights.
Removing the headlight
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Open the bonnet page 196.
– Unscrew the plastic nut fig. 190.
– Pull the fuse in upward direction.
– Pull the locking lever of the headlight as far as the stop in the direction of arrow .
– Unplug the plug connector and carefully take out the headlight in the direction of
arrow .
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist
garage.
Fig. 189 Front headlight: Fitting posi-
tion of the bulbs
A
A
A
B
A
C
Fig. 190 Front headlight: Fitting posi-
tion of the bulbs
A
A
A
B
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 231 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs232
Turn signal light at the front
Changing light bulb for turn signal light (at the front)
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight page 231.
– Turn the socket in the direction of arrow OPEN and take it out together with the
light bulb for the turn signal light fig. 191.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far as
the stop.
– Insert the socket with the changed light bulb into the headlight and secure it by
turning in the direction of arrow CLOSE to the right.
Note
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist
garage.
Front parking lights and low beam
Removing the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight page 231.
– Remove the protective cap page 231, fig. 189.
– Remove the socket fig. 192.
– Take the faulty bulb out of the fixture and insert a new one.
– Insert the protective cap.
Removing the light bulb for the low beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight page 231.
– Remove the protective cap page 231, fig. 189.
– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left and
remove fig. 192.
– Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the right up
to the stop.
– Insert the protective cap.
Fig. 191 Removing the light bulb for the
turn signal light
Fig. 192 Removing the bulbs for the
parking and low beam light
A
B
A
A
A
B
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 232 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs 233
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Note
In order to facilitate the removal of the socket with the bulb for the parking light, we
recommend to remove first of all the bulb for the low beam light.
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist
garage.
Main beam light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the headlight page 231.
– Remove the protective cap page 231, fig. 189.
– Unplug plug fig. 193.
– Press the wire clamps in the direction of the headlight and then unhook them
to the side.
– Remove the light bulb and insert the new light bulb in such a way that the fixing
lugs of the light bulb socket fit into the recesses at the reflector.
Installation takes place in the reverse order.
Note
After installing the headlight, the headlight setting must be checked by a specialist
garage.
Fog lights and daylight driving lights*
Fig. 194 Front bumper: Protective grille / removing the fog light
Plug - bulb for daylight driving lights* fig. 194. Plug - bulb for fog lights.
Removing the cover
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Guide the fingers into the opening fig. 194.
– By pulling in the direction of arrow , first of all slacken the cover in the upper area
on the side to the fog lights.
– Afterwards, also slacken the cover on the other side in the direction of arrow
and remove it.
Removing the fog light
– Guide your hand into the opening, in which the cover was located, and press the
spring bolt fig. 194 - right.
– Take out the fog light.
– Turn the connector with the light bulb up to the stop towards the left and remove.
– Replace the lamp, insert the connector with the new lamp and turn to the right up
to the stop.
– For the installation, first of all insert the fog light with the interlock to the side far
away from the marking of the vehicle.
– Press into place the headlight onto the side facing the marking.
Fig. 193 Removing the light bulb for the
main beam light
A
C
A
A
A
B
A
C
A
B
A
C
A
A
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 233 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs234
– In order to reinstall the cover, first of all insert one part of the cover starting on the
side facing the marking. Then press the cover closed on the side facing the fog light.
The cover must engage firmly.
Cover of fog lights Octavia RS, Octavia Scout
Fig. 195 Front bumper: Octavia RS / Octavia Scout
Removing the cover - Octavia RS
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Guide one finger into the opening fig. 195 and remove the cover.
Removing the cover - Octavia Scout
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Guide the wire clamp from the vehicle tool kit into the opening above the fog
light and remove the cover.
Fog lights Octavia RS, Octavia Scout
Fig. 196 Front bumper: Fog lights / fog lights: Replacing light bulb
Removing the fog light
–Screw out the screws fig. 196 - left with the aid of the screwdriver*, which is part
of the vehicle tool kit
22)
.
– Take out the fog light.
Changing the bulb and installing the fog light
– Press the locking button of the plug and remove the plug from the socket
.
– Turn the socket with the bulb to the left up to the stop and take it out.
– Change the bulb, insert again the socket with the new bulb and turn it to the right
up to the stop.
– Connect the plug to the socket .
– Screw in the screws again and insert the cover. The cover must engage firmly.
A
1
A
2
22)
Valid for Octavia RS and Octavia Scout.
A
1
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
A
A
B
s43s.1.book Page 234 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs 235
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Light unit (Octavia)
Fig. 197 Luggage compartment: Cover for the lamp holder / removing the lamp holder
Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp holder fig. 197 - left.
– Press the catches in the direction of arrow and take out the lamp holder fig. 197
- right.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far as
the stop.
– Insert the lamp holder in such a way that the catches lock in place in the housing.
– Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.
Change the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Unlock the locking button and open the cover of the lamp holder fig. 197 - left.
– Take the defective light bulb (arrow or ) out of the housing and replace it with
a new one.
– Close and lock the cover of the lamp holder.
Rear light unit (Combi)
Fig. 198 Luggage compartment: Side compartment / removing the lamp holder
Changing light bulbs in the lamp holder
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the side compartment cover by turning the locks in the direction of arrow
fig. 198 - left.
– Take out the cover of the lamp holder on the luggage compartment side.
– Take out the light bulbs of the tail light (arrow and ).
– Press the catches in the direction of arrow and take out the lamp holder.
– Press the defective light bulb into the socket, turn to the left and remove.
– Press a new light bulb into the socket and turn the light bulb to the right as far as
the stop.
Change the light bulb for the parking light
– Switch the ignition and all lights off.
– Remove the side compartment cover by turning the locks in the direction of arrow
fig. 198 - left.
– Take out the cover of the lamp holder on the luggage compartment side.
– Take the defective light bulb (arrow or fig. 198) out of the housing and
replace it with a new one.
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
A
1
A
2
s43s.1.book Page 235 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Fuses and light bulbs236
– Remove the lamp holder cover on the luggage compartment side and close the
side compartment.
s43s.1.book Page 236 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 237
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Technical Data
Technical Data
General information
The details given in the official vehicle registration documents always take precedence
over the details in the Owner's Manual. Please refer to the official vehicle registration
documents or consult an authorised Škoda Service Partner concerning the engine with
which your vehicle is equipped.
Used abbreviations
Performances
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reducing
equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
Weight
The loading capacity is reduced in line with the range of the special equipment. The
unloaden weight contains a fuel tank topped up to 90%. A driver with a weight of 75
kg is also included in the value.
Identification details
Abbreviation Importance
kW Kilowatt, measuring unit for the engine output
rpm Engine revolutions per minute
Nm Newton meter, measuring unit for the engine torque
g/km
discharged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven
kilometer
RON
Research octane number, measuring unit for the knocking
resistance of petrol
TSI
Petrol engine with a turbocharger and a direct fuel injection
system
TDI PD
Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system unit
injector
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbocharger and injection system Com-
mon Rail
M5 / M6 5-speed/6-speed manual gearbox
AG6 6-speed automatic gearbox
DQ6/DQ7 6 speed-/7 speed automatic gearbox DSG
DPF Diesel particle filter
Abbreviation Importance
Fig. 199 Vehicle data sticker
s43s.1.book Page 237 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data238
Vehicle data sticker
The vehicle data sticker page 237, fig. 199 is located on the floor of the luggage
compartment and is also stated in the Service schedule.
The vehicle data sticker contains the following data:
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Vehicle type
Gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment number, engine output, engine
code
Partial description of the vehicle
7GG, 7MB, 7MG - vehicles with DPF page 173
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into the
engine compartment on the right hand shock absorber dome. This number is also
located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen.
Engine number
The engine number is stamped into the engine block.
Type plate (production plate)
The type plate is located in the lower area of the left centre column.
Sticker on inside of fuel filler flap
The stickers are affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap and contain the following
information:
The prescribed types of fuel,
Tyre size,
Tyre pressure.
Fuel consumption according to the ECE standards and
EU guidelines
Depending on the range of the special equipment, style of driving, traffic situation,
weather influences and vehicle condition, the consumption values which in practice
result when using the vehicle can deviate from the indicated values.
Urban traffic
The consumption measurement in urban traffic begins with starting of the cold engine.
Afterwards the normal urban traffic is simulated.
Non-urban traffic
For the consumption measurement in non-urban traffic the vehicle, as in daily
motoring, is accelerated and braked several times in all gears. The vehicle speed
changes within the range from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined traffic
The consumption value in the combined traffic consists of 37% from the value for the
urban traffic and of 63% from the value for the non-urban traffic.
A
1
A
2
A
3
A
4
A
5
s43s.1.book Page 238 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 239
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Dimensions
Dimensions (mm)
OCTAVIA
OCTAVIA
GreenLine
OCTAVIA RS COMBI
COMBI
GreenLine
COMBI RS COMBI 4x4 SCOUT
Length 4569 4569 4597 4569 4569 4599 4569 4584
Width 1769 1769 1769 1769 1769 1769 1769 1784
Width including exterior mirror 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018 2018
Height
1462
1485
a)
1449
b)
a)
The value corresponds to the status with rough road package.
b)
The value corresponds to the status with SPORT package.
1462
1449
b)
1447
1468
1490
a)
1455
b)
1468
1455
b)
1451
1495
1520
a)
1533
Clearance
140
164
a)
125
b)
140
125
b)
127
140
164
a)
125
b)
140
125
b)
128
138
163
a)
179
Wheel base 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578 2578
Track gauge front / rear 1541/1514 1535/1508 1528/1508 1541/1514 1535/1508 1528/1508 1541/1514 1531/1500
s43s.1.book Page 239 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data240
Engine oil specifications
The grade of engine oil should be selected in accordance with precise
specifications.
The engine of your vehicle has been factory-filled with a high-grade oil which you can
use throughout the year - except in extreme climatic regions.
You can mix various oils together with each other when refilling with oil. This does not,
however, apply for models with flexible service intervals (QG1).
Engine oils are, of course, undergoing continuous further development. Thus the
information stated in this Owner's Manual is only correct at the time of publication.
Authorised Škoda Service Partners are informed by Škoda Auto about current changes.
This why you should always have engine oil changed by an authorised Škoda Service
Partner.
The specifications (VW standards) stated in the following must be indicated separately
or together with other specifications on the bottle.
Engine oil specifications for models with flexible service intervals (QG1)
Engine oil specifications for vehicles with fixed service intervals (QG2)
If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can
be used once for refilling.
Petrol engines Engine oil specifications
Content
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil
level must be between the markings page 198.
1,2/77 kW - EU5 VW 504 00 3,6
1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4 VW 503 00, VW 504 00 3,2
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5 VW 503 00, VW 504 00 3,6
1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2 VW 503 00, VW 504 00 4,5
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)
VW 504 00 4,6
2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5 VW 504 00 4,6
Diesel engines Engine oil specifications
Content
a)
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3 VW 506 01, VW 507 00 3,8
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4 VW 507 00 4,3
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
Petrol engines Engine oil specifications
Content
a)
a)
Oil capacity with oil filter change. Inspect oil level when filling; do not fill up too much. The oil
level must be between the markings page 198.
1,2/77 kW - EU5 VW 502 00 3,6
1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 3,2
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 3,6
1.6 ltr./75 kW - EU4, EU2 VW 501 01, VW 502 00 4,5
1.6 ltr./75 kW MultiFuel - EU4, EU2 VW 502 00 4,5
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
(1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)
VW 502 00 4,6
2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5 VW 502 00 4,6
s43s.1.book Page 240 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 241
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
If the oils specified above are not available, oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can
be used once for refilling.
Caution
Only the above-mentioned oils may be used on vehicles with flexible service intervals
(QG1). We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will
maintain the properties of the oil. In exceptional cases, you must top up only once
engine oil complying with Specification VW 502 00 (only for petrol engines) or Specifi-
cation VW 505 01 (only for diesel engines) to maximum 0.5 litres. You must not use
other engine oils - risk of engine damage!
Note
Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you engine
oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle. Consequently, you will
always have the correct engine oil for refilling.
We recommend using a preservative from the Škoda original accessories offered
by your Škoda dealer.
For further information - see Service shedule.
Diesel engines Engine oil specifications
Content
a)
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3 VW 505 01 3,8
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD DPF - EU4 VW 507 00 4,3
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR DPF - EU4, EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5 VW 507 00 4,3
s43s.1.book Page 241 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data242
1.2 ltr./77 kW TSI - EU5
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 77/5000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 175/1550-4100
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1197
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Maximum speed km/h 192 192 191 191
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 10,8 10,8 10,9 10,9
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Urban 7,1 7,0 7,1 7,0
Non-urban 4,9 5,2 4,9 5,2
Combination 5,7 5,9 5,7 5,9
CO
2
emission - combination
134 136 134 136
s43s.1.book Page 242 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 243
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Permissible gross weight 1865 1890 1880 1905
Unloaden weight ready for work 1265 1290 1280 1305
Loading capacity 675 675 675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC 600 600 600 600
Permissible front axle load 1000 1000 1000 1000
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
c)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 600 600 600 600
s43s.1.book Page 243 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data244
1.4 ltr./59 kW - EU4
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 59/5000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 132/3800
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1390
OCTAVIA
M5
COMBI
M5
Maximum speed km/h 173 172
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 14,2 14,3
OCTAVIA
M5
COMBI
M5
Urban 9,6 9,6
Non-urban 5,6 5,6
Combination 7,0 7,0
CO
2
emission - combination
167 167
s43s.1.book Page 244 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 245
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M5
COMBI
M5
Permissible gross weight
1855/1845
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1870
Unloaden weight ready for work 1255 1270
Loading capacity
675/665
a)
675
Loading capacity when using the TLC
600/590
a)
600
Permissible front axle load 1000 1000
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1150
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
900
b)
1100
c)
/900
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
900
b)
1100
c)
/900
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 600 600
s43s.1.book Page 245 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data246
1.4 ltr./90 kW TSI - EU5
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 90/5000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 200/1500-4000
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1390
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Maximum speed km/h 203 202 202 201
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 9,7 9,7 9,8 9,8
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Urban 8,5 8,0 8,5 8,0
Non-urban 5,0 5,3 5,0 5,3
Combination 6,3 6,3 6,3 6,3
CO
2
emission - combination
148 147 148 147
s43s.1.book Page 246 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 247
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
Permissible gross weight 1910 1930 1925 1945
Unloaden weight ready for work 1310 1330 1325 1345
Loading capacity 675 675 675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC 600 600 600 600
Permissible front axle load 1000 1000 1000 1000
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
c)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
1200
a)
1400
b)
/1200
c)b)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 600 600 600 600
s43s.1.book Page 247 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data248
1.6ltr./75kW - EU4, EU2
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 75/5600
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 148/3800
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1595
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
AG6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
AG6
Maximum speed km/h 190 184 188 184
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 12,3 14,1 12,4 14,2
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
M5
MultiFuel
OCTAVIA
AG6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
M5
MultiFuel
COMBI
AG6
Urban 10,0
9,4/13,0
a)
a)
Biofuel Ethanol E85.
11,2 10,0
9,6/13,2
a)
11,2
Non-urban 5,8
5,5/7,5
a)
6,1 5,8
5,7/7,7
a)
6,1
Combination 7,4
7,0/9,5
a)
7,9 7,4
7,2/9,7
a)
7,9
CO
2
emission - combination
176
162/157
a)
188 176
167/162
a)
188
s43s.1.book Page 248 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 249
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
AG6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
AG6
Permissible gross weight
1880/1870
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1915/1905
a)
1895 1930
Unloaden weight ready for work 1280 1315 1295 1330
Loading capacity
675/665
a)
675/665
a)
675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC
600/590
a)
600/590
a)
600 600
Permissible front axle load 1000 1000 1000 1000
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1200
b)
1400
c)
/1200
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
1200
b)
1400
c)
/1200
a)c)
1200
b)
1400
c)
/1200
a)c)
1200
b)
1400
c)
/1200
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 600 600 600 600
s43s.1.book Page 249 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data250
1.8 ltr./118 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK (1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI - EU5)
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm
118/4500-6200 (112/4300-6200)
a)
a)
1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI
Maximum torque Nm per rpm
250/1500-4500 (250/1500-4200)
a)
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1798
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Maximum speed
km/h
223 (219)
a)
a)
1.8 ltr./112 kW TSI
223 (219)
a)
222 (218)
a)
222 (218)
a)
218 (214)
a)
211 (208)
a)
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h
s
7,8 (8,1)
a)
7,8 (8,1)
a)
7,9 (8,2)
a)
7,9 (8,2)
a)
8,1 (8,4)
a)
8,4 (8,7)
a)
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Urban 9,5 9,1 9,5 9,1 10,3 10,2
Non-urban 5,5 5,4 5,5 5,4
6,2/6,5
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
6,4
Combination 6,9 6,6 6,9 6,6
7,7/7,9
a)
7,8
CO
2
emission - combination
158 155 158 155
180/184
a)
182
s43s.1.book Page 250 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 251
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Permissible gross weight 1950 1970 1965 1985 2070 2130
Unloaden weight ready for work 1350 1370 1365 1385 1470 1530
Loading capacity 675 675 675 675 675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC 600 600 600 600 600 600
Permissible front axle load 1050 1050 1050 1050 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150 1230 1230
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1300
a)
1500
b)
1300
c)b)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
c)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1300
a)
1500
b)
1300
c)b)
1300
a)
1500
b)
1300
c)b)
1300
a)
1500
b)
1300
c)b)
1500
a)
1600
b)
1500
c)b)
1500
a)
1600
b)
1500
c)b)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 251 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data252
2.0 ltr./147 kW TSI - EU5, EU2 DDK
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 147/5100-6000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 280/1700-5000
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1984
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Maximum speed km/h 242 240 239 237
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 7,2 7,2 7,3 7,3
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Urban 10,2 10,4 10,2 10,4
Non-urban 5,9 6,2 5,9 6,2
Combination 7,5 7,7 7,5 7,7
CO
2
emission - combination
175 180 175 180
s43s.1.book Page 252 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 253
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Permissible gross weight
1915/1980
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1935/2000
a)
1930/1995
a)
1950/2015
a)
Unloaden weight ready for work 1435 1455 1450 1470
Loading capacity
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
Loading capacity when using the TLC
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
Permissible front axle load 1100 1100 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100
1100/1150
a)
1100/1150
a)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 253 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data254
1.6 ltr./77 kW TDI CR - EU5
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 77/4400
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 250/1500-2500
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1598
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA M5
GreenLine
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M5
COMBI M5
GreenLine
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
Maximum speed km/h 190 191 190 189 190 189 185
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 11,8 11,8 12,0 11,9 11,9 12,1 12,7
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA M5
GreenLine
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M5
COMBI M5
GreenLine
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
Urban 5,7 5,5 5,6 5,7 5,5 5,6 6,7
Non-urban 3,9 3,7 4,2 3,9 3,7 4,2 4,6
Combination 4,5 4,4 4,7 4,5 4,4 4,7 5,4
CO
2
emission - combination
119 114 123 119 114 123 141
s43s.1.book Page 254 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 255
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA M5
GreenLine
OCTAVIA
DQ7
COMBI
M5
COMBI M5
GreenLine
COMBI
DQ7
COMBI 4x4
M6
Permissible gross weight 1950 1940 1975 1965 1955 1990 2075
Unloaden weight ready for work 1350 1355 1375 1365 1370 1390 1475
Loading capacity 675 660 675 675 660 675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC 600 585 600 600 585 600 600
Permissible front axle load 1050 1050 1100 1050 1050 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1100 1150 1150 1150 1230
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
a)
Uphills up to 12 %
b)
Uphills up to 8%
c)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
1400
a)
1600
b)
/1400
b)
c)
1600
a)
1700
b)
/1600
b)
c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 255 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data256
1.9 ltr./77 kW TDI PD - EU4, EU3
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 77/4000
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 250/1900
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1896
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
Maximum speed km/h 192 189 191 189 181
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 11,8 12,2 11,9 12,3 12,9
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
Urban 6,3 7,7 6,3 7,7 7,7
Non-urban 4,2 5,0 4,2 5,0 4,9
Combination 4,9 5,9 4,9 5,9 6,0
CO
2
emission - combination
130 155 130 155 159
s43s.1.book Page 256 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 257
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M5
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M5
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
Permissible gross weight
1955/1945
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1980/1970
a)
1970 1995 2080
Unloaden weight ready for work 1355 1380 1370 1395 1480
Loading capacity
675/665
a)
675/665
a)
675 675 675
Loading capacity when using the TLC
600/590
a)
600/590
a)
600 600 600
Permissible front axle load 1050 1100 1050 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150 1230
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1600
b)
1700
c)
/1600
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 257 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data258
2.0 ltr./103 kW TDI CR - EU4, EU5
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm
103/4000 - EU4
103/4200 - EU5
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 320/1750 - 2500
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1968
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Maximum speed km/h 211 209 210 208 204 199
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 9,5 9,6 9,6 9,7 9,8 10,1
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Urban 6,1 6,7 6,3 7,0 7,4 7,4
Non-urban 4,0 4,5 4,3 4,6 5,1 5,1
Combination 4,8 5,3 4,9 5,4 5,9 5,9
CO
2
emission - combination
126 138 129 143 155 155
s43s.1.book Page 258 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 259
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA
M6
OCTAVIA
DQ6
COMBI
M6
COMBI
DQ6
COMBI 4x4
M6
SCOUT
M6
Permissible gross weight
1995/1985
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
2015/2005
a)
2010 2030 2105
2170/2160
a)
Unloaden weight ready for work 1395 1415 1410 1430 1505 1570
Loading capacity
675/665
a)
675/665
a)
675 675 675
675/665
a)
Loading capacity when using the TLC
600/590
a)
600/590
a)
600 600 600
600/590
a)
Permissible front axle load 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100 1150 1150 1230 1230
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1600
b)
1700
c)
/1600
a)c)
1600
b)
1700
c)
/1600
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 259 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data260
2.0 ltr./125 kW TDI CR - EU5
Engine
Performances
Fuel consumption (in ltr./100 km) and CO
2
emission (in g/km)
Power output kW per rpm 125/4200
Maximum torque Nm per rpm 350/1750 - 2500
Number of cylinders/Displacement (cm
3
)
4/1968
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Maximum speed km/h 226 224 225 223
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h s 8,3 8,3 8,4 8,4
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Urban 7,5 7,9 7,5 7,9
Non-urban 4,6 4,9 4,6 4,9
Combination 5,7 6,0 5,7 6,0
CO
2
emission - combination
149 159 149 159
s43s.1.book Page 260 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data 261
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Weight (in kg)
OCTAVIA RS
M6
OCTAVIA RS
DQ6
COMBI RS
M6
COMBI RS
DQ6
Permissible gross weight
1950/2015
a)
a)
Vehicles of the group N1.
1970/2035
a)
1965/2030
a)
1985/2050
a)
Unloaden weight ready for work 1470 1490 1485 1505
Loading capacity
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
555/620
a)
Loading capacity when using the TLC
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
480/545
a)
Permissible front axle load 1100 1100 1100 1100
Permissible rear axle load 1100 1100
1100/1150
a)
1100/1150
a)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer braked
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
b)
Uphills up to 12 %
c)
Uphills up to 8%
1400
b)
1600
b)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
1400
b)
1600
c)
/1400
a)c)
Permissible trailer loads, trailer unbraked 650 650 650 650
s43s.1.book Page 261 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Technical Data262
s43s.1.book Page 262 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index 263
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
Index
A
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Active driver-steering recommendation . . . . . . . 169
Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 142
electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Air outlet vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Alternator
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Antilock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Antilock brake system (ABS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Auto Check Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Auto Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Automatic driving lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Emergency programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . 121
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Automatic seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Automatic vehicle wash systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Automatic wiper/washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Avoiding damage to your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 203
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Inspecting the electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Belt
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 196
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Boot lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Brake
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Bulbs
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Button for the central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Buttons on the driver's door
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
C
Car state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Changing the engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Changing wheels around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
s43s.1.book Page 263 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index264
Child safety seat
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Classification into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Use of child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Children and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Climatronic
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning) . . . . . . 100
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Clothes hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cockpit
General view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Connection to the internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Convenience operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Converting/masking over headlights . . . . . . . . . . 180
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant quantity
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Coolant temperature/coolant level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cornering lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Correct seated position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Counter for distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cup holder
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
D
Daylight driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Deactivating
an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Deactivating an airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
De-icing the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Detachable towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Diesel engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Diesel particle filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Distance driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Door
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
E
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Electric power-operated window
Operational faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Electric sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Electrically adjustable exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Electronic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Electronic stability programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Electronic stability programme (ESP)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Engine
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Engine compartment
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Engine electronics
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
replenishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine oil level
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Engine revolutions counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 179
s43s.1.book Page 264 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index 265
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Exhaust gas
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Exhaust gas inspection
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Exterior mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
F
First-aid box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fixing net
Combi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Octavia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fog lights with the function CORNER . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Saving energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fuel reserve
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Full wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
G
Gearbox
mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
General view
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 132
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Hazard warning light system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Head airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Headlights
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Headlight cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Heated windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating) . . . . . . . . 104
Defrosting windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Recirculated air mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Interior light
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Interior monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Intermittent wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
J
Jacking points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 222
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
L
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Leather care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Lifting jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 220
s43s.1.book Page 265 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index266
Light
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Lighting of the interior of the vehicle
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Lights
converting/masking over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Liquid in reservoir for windshield washer system
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Lock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
lock
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Locking and unlocking from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lugagge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 74
Folding double hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Folding hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Lashing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Luggage compartment door
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Luggage net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Luggage rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
M
Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 57
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Manual shifting of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Memory for the on-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 132
Connection to the hands-free system . . . . . . 133
Connection with the hands-free system . . . . 126
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Motoring abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Multi-functional indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
N
Note holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
O
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Open door
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Opening a single door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Opening for skis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Operation in winter
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
De-icing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Overview of the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . 198
P
Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Parking aid
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
parking aid
Front and rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Passive Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Petrol engines
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Power windows
Button in front passenger door and in rear doors 47
Buttons on the driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
with central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
s43s.1.book Page 266 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index 267
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
R
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Rear armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 90
Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Rear window
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Rear-view mirror
Exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Recharge battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Recommendation for changing gears . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Synchronisation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Running in the car . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
S
Safe securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Safety information
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Safety wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Saving electrical energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Seat belt height adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 148
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
taking off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Selector lever lock
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Selector lever-emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Service Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service Interval Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Setting temperature
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Side airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Stability system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
after fuel tank has run empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Steering
active driver-steering recommendation . . . . 169
Steering force assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Storage compartment
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Storage facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Sun screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Switching lights on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
T
Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
TCS
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 132
Temperature
outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
the first 1 500 kilometres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
The roof luggage rack system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Thickness of brake pads
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
s43s.1.book Page 267 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Index268
Tow-starting and towing vehicle
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Traction control system (TCS)
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Two-way radio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tyre inflation pressure
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tyres
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
U
Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Uphill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Ventilation
Auxiliary ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
W
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Washing vehicle by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Wax treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 218
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Windows
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Windscreen washer nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Windshield washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
X
XDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
s43s.1.book Page 268 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Notes 269
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
s43s.1.book Page 269 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Notes270
s43s.1.book Page 270 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Notes 271
Using the system Safety Driving Tips General Maintenance Breakdown assistance Technical Data
s43s.1.book Page 271 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
Škoda Auto pursues a policy of constant product and model development. We trust
that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape, equipment and
engineering, may be introduced at any time. The information about scope of delivery,
appearance, performances, dimensions, weight, fuel consumption, standards and
functions of the vehicle is only correct at the time of publication. Certain items of
equipment might only be installed later on (information given by the local authorised
Škoda Service Partner) and only envisaged for particular markets. It is therefore not
possible for legal claims to be made based on the data, illustrations and descriptions
contained in this Owner's Manual.
Reprinting, reproduction or translation, either in whole or in part, is not permitted
without the written consent of Škoda Auto.
Škoda Auto expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
We reserve the right to make changes to this document.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2010
s43s.1.book Page 272 Thursday, May 13, 2010 1:21 PM
ŠkodaService
ŠkodaGenuine Parts
ŠkodaGenuine Accessories
SIMPLY CLEVER
How you can contribute to a cleaner environment
The fuel consumption of your Škoda - and thus the level of
pollutants contained in the exhaust - is also determined by
how you drive.
The noise level and wear and tear are also influenced by how
you personally handle your vehicle. This Owner's Manual tells
you how to drive your Škoda to achieve the minimum impact
on the environment, and how to save money at the same time.
Look up „Environment“ in the Index to find out more.
Please also refer to all the texts identified with a
in this
Owner's Manual.
Make your contribution - for the sake of the
environment.
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Octavia anglicky 05.10
S64.5610.07.20
1Z0 012 003 MD
… 47 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Skoda-Octavia-2011

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Skoda Octavia 2011 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Skoda Octavia 2011 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 17,23 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Skoda Octavia 2011

Skoda Octavia 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 199 pagina's

Skoda Octavia 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 259 pagina's

Skoda Octavia 2011 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 203 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info